Home

DT80 User`s Manual

Contents

1. e Input actions commands to manage the DT80 s Serial Channel and to interpret the information coming back from the serial device into the Serial Channel The various input actions available are detailed in the section Control String Input Actions 2152 Input actions are not enclosed by The general form of the control string is e any combination of output actions enclosed by and or e any combination of input actions There may be any number of blocks of output actions and input actions as shown in the following example Serial Channel commands 1SERIAL output actions options 1SERIAL input actions options 1SERIAL output actions input actions options 1SERIAL output input output input options The control string is always executed in order left to right giving you complete control over the sequence of actions Where a bi directional dialog occurs between the DT80 and serial device the output actions and input actions can be included in the same Serial Channel command as shown above or in separate Serial Channel commands as follows BEGIN RAIM 1SERIAL output actions options 1SERIAL input actions options END This latter approach simplifies the appearance of the program steps for supervising the Serial Channel particularly if there are a number of data points to be prompted and interpreted or parsed in each access Note however that each instance of 1SERIAL uses up one
2. current is proportional to temperature temperature AL UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 162 2 Wire AD590 Series Inputs Figure 67 A1 Wiring for AD590 series input using internal shunt 1AD590 2AD590 3AD590 4AD590 LM35 Series Inputs IC temperature sensors for long cables ature voltage is proportional to temper tE mperature see Note LM34 and LM35 minimum 0 degrees 3 amp 4 Wire LM35 Series input full temperature range This wiring configuration supports the full sensors operating temperature range It requires some additional components two resistors and two diodes 2x 1N914 Figure 68 L1 for LM35 series input full temperature range 3 and 4 Wire LM35 Series Inputs restricted temperature range This wiring configuration supports a restricted lower operating temperature range for the sensor The temperature must be above ten degrees 10 C for LM35 45 amp TMP35 37 10 F for LM34 However this configuration does not require any additional components and requires only three wires to the sensor Accuracy can be improved by replacing the link wire between the and terminals with a wire from the terminal of the logger to the terminal of the sensor Figure 69 L2 Wiring for LM35 series input restricted temperature range LM135 Series Inputs IC constant current supply voltage is proportional to temperature UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 163
3. DCE 4 20 GND Signal Ground 5 T DSR Data Set Ready DTE DCE 6 6 RTS Request To Send DTE gt DCE 7 4 CTS Clear To Send DTE lt DCE 8 5 RI Ring Indicator DITE 4 DCE 9 22 Table 17 RS 232 Pinouts For applications where a DTE is connected to another DTE eg a DT80 is connected to a host computer e the RXD and TXD signals must be crossed over so that one device s TXD is connected to the other device s RXD e The Request To Send output changes its meaning to Clear To Send Output ie a device sets it active when it is able to receive data This allows hardware flow control to operate in both directions e DCD DTR DSR and RI are not normally used CABLE DETAILS DT80 RS 232 comms cable direct connection to computer DE 9 to DE 9 COMPUTER dataTaker product code PROIBM 6 oe M DT80 Null modem DE 9 computer DTE crossover cable DTE DT80 RS 232 comms cable direct connection to computer DE 9 to DB 25 COMPUTER DB 25 DTE M dataTaker product code PROIBM 6 plus 9M 25F adaptor No connection DT80 Null modem DB 25 computer DTE crossover cable DTE Figure 73 DT80 to computer RS 232 comms cable DE 9 computer upper diagram and DB 25 computer lower diagram UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 171 DT80 RS 232 comms cable modem connection DE 9 to DE 9 dataTaker product code PROMOD 6 DT80 Straight through DE 9 modem DTE parallel cable DCE DT80 RS 232 comms c
4. Linearization Error The DT80 s linearization errors are much lower lt 0 1 C over the full range than other error sources Thermistors WIRING DIAGRAMS see Resistance Inputs e160 Thermistors are devices that change their electrical resistance with temperature They measure temperatures from 80 C up to 250 C and are sensitive but highly nonlinear The DT80 has channel types for many 2 wire YSI thermistors and for other thermistor types the DT80 supports thermistor scaling see Thermistor Scaling Tn 2632 YS01 100 44001A 44101A 100 65 YS02 300 44002A 44102A 45 SO3 1000 44003A 44101A 20 44035 YS04 2252 44004 44104 1580 1 44033 75 45004 46004 200 46033 46043 44901 90 44902 70 YS05 3000 44005 44105 150 7 44030 75 45005 46005 200 46030 46040 18 Yellow Springs Instruments YSI Incorporated www ysi com UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 136 44903 90 44904 70 YS07 5000 44007 44107 150 18 44034 15 45007 46007 250 46034 46044 44905 90 44906 70 YS17 6000 44017 150 22 45017250 46017 200 46037 46047 YS16 10k 44016 150 34 44036 T5 46036 200 YS06 10k 44006 44106 150 35 44081 76 45006250 46006200 46031 46041 44907 90 44908 70 RTDs WIRING DIAGRAMS see Resistance Inputs 2 60 Resistance Temperature Detectors are sensors generally made from a pure or lightly doped metal whose electrical resistance increases with temperature Provided that the eleme
5. Retrieving Logged Data Logged data from the DT80 can be retrieved by e unloading the data to a host computer through one of the DT80 s communications interfaces this does not remove the data from the internal memory or USB memory device e removing an inserted USB memory device from the data logger and reading this in a computer with a USB port e Inserting a USB memory device into the D780 to extract data stored in internal memory then removing the USB memory device and reading this in a computer this may remove the data from internal memory See also Logging and Retrieving Alarms 2 2 Retrieving Logged Data USB memory device Transfer When a USB memory device is plugged in to the D780 it is immediately detected then the option is given on the display to download data from the internal memory to the external memory device If the USB memory device contains a suitable ONINSERT DXC 116 file the ONINSERT DXC startup job is transferred from the card to the D780 and run becomes the DT80 s current job Retrieving Logged Data Comms Unload Commands for retrieving data from a DT80 s internal memory or card to a host computer using one of the DT80 s communications interfaces are presented in Unload Commands r74 next and summarized in the Summary Retrieval Commands e166 table During an unload the r return e echo m error messages and z alarm messages switches are disabled to prevent transmiss
6. 3CVcounts for third class 29 0 to 30 999 C interval A4CVcounts for fourth class 31 0 to 32 999 C interval 5CVcounts for fifth class 33 0 to 34 999 C interval It also loads cumulative data into the following three CVs UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 57 6CVnumber of under range samples lt 25 C 7CVnumber of over range samples gt 35 C 8CVtotal counts sum of 1 7CV Number of Occurrences Counts A A 25 0 35 0 jC Figure 20 Histogram example Then return and log the channel variables using another schedule such as RB1H 1 8CV R Rainflow Cycle Counting Rainflow cycle counting also called rainflow analysis is an internationally accepted method of fatigue cycle counting used for monitoring long term accumulative structural fatigue damage The process reduces large quantities of cyclic data collected from sensors attached to the structure over a long period of time into relatively simple histograms As a structure deflects due to repetitive external influences measurements produce arbitrary peak and valley sequences that form closed loops or cycles Each loop or cycle has a size the difference between peak and valley magnitudes and rainflow analysis accumulates a profile of the number of cycles versus cycle size into a histogram A minimum cycle size can be defined that sets a noise rejection level and cycle sizes below this level are rejected as noise and are not counted The DT80 implements
7. Date 22 05 2005 Date can be in several formats selected by P31 as follows 0 Day number DDDDD 86 1 default European DD MM YYYY 28 03 2002 2 North America MM DD YYYY 03 28 2002 3 ISO YYYY MM DD 20024705728 System variable 12SV returns the combined day time as decimal days System variable 15SV returns the day of the current year See also Setting the DT80 s Clock Calendar and Efficient Storage of Time and Date Text Ten 80 character text channels 1 10 are available for labelling data headings site identification DT80 identification and so on Define the string by sending for example 2 my text string M J Then the string is returned unloaded whenever n is included in a channel list Text channels can also be set based on data returned via the serial channel Control String Input Actions P152 Control characters may be included in the text string eg M for carriage return Internal Maintenance There are several internal maintenance channels which are read in the same way as normal channels These allow for UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 30 example the terminal voltage of the DT80 s internal batteries to be measured See the internal Maintenance section of the DT80 Channel Types table System Timers There are four internal reloading system timers which are read in the same way as channels The four timers increment at the following rates and reset to zero when their range ma
8. Field width Temperature units UM 0085A0 Seconds Mode Seconds ASCII ASCII Seconds Mode digits characters Mode 600 1 to 30000 0 0 to 2 30 1 to 255 32 1 to 255 space 13 1 to 255 CR which the DT80 automatic ally follows with LF 30 0 to 255 1 Oto5 T 1to9 0 0 to 80 variable 0 0 to 3 DT80 User s Manual When a password is defined the DT80 automatically signs off after this period of inactivity see Password Protection Comms Ports 95 P15 Mode 0 Auto 1 Force Sleep 2 Force Normal Operation See Controlling Sleep 21327 Sets how long the DT80 waits to enter low power mode after communication or peripheral device activity and so on see Controlling Sleep 132 ASCII character as decimal number between data points in free format mode r21 Forced to 44 comma when in fixed format mode If using successive immediate schedules see Cautions for Using Immediate Schedules P46 ASCII character as decimal number between groups of data points in a scan in free format mode PoI Note When P24 13 the default the DT80 always automatically follows this carriage return ASCII 13 with a line feed character ASCII 10 See FORMAT OF RETURNED DATA p21 Timeout before incoming XOFF state is automatically switched to XON state P26 0 disables timeout P31 Date Format 0 day number 1 DD MM YYYY European 2 MM DD
9. Figure 16 Concepts statistical report schedule and statistical sub schedule A report schedule can instruct the D780 to return statistical information average SD max min for one or more channels The D780 does this by e scanning its input channels and executing calculations at frequent intervals of time then e retaining intermediate values to produce a statistical data summary at longer intervals Note that there are two schedules involved e The primary statistical data is collected at frequent intervals which are determined by the statistical sub schedule RS UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 46 e The statistical data summary average SD is returned and logged at longer intervals which are determined by the report schedule that is requesting the statistical information the statistical report schedule Think of the statistical sub schedule as a fast schedule the slave running within below its slower statistical report schedule the master This is why RS is called the statistical sub schedule The statistical sub schedule has its own interval trigger The default is one second but you can change that see Redefining the Statistical Sub Schedule s Trigger 47 47 below To return statistical data include in any report schedule a statistical channel option for the specific input channels calculations and so on where statistically scanned is required For example RA1H 2TT AV returns e
10. Page 187 Channel Name Channel Numbers Channel Options Channel settling time Channel Types Channel Units Channel Variables Clock Calendar CMRR Combining Methods Common Mode Voltage Comms Wakes the DT80 Condition Tests Conditional Calculations Conditional Processing Configuration Line Constant Current Excitation BGI Continuous Report Schedules No Trigger Control String Input Actions Control String Output Actions Controlling Sleep Crest factor data acquisition system data logging system Data storage Data Storage Capacity Readings MB Date DCE Default Default Value Delay UM 0085A0 38 25 LA 32 34 38 47 56 57 61 63 as Dl 161 161 177 178 185 2 18 29 61 130 138 140 161 161 38 37 44 56 63 64 64 118 179 61 65 179 180 100 131 131 50 65 Loe 1591 180 182 180 182 125 69 70 37 180 114 109 114 29 22 Delete Commands Deleting Logged Alarm Records Deleting Logged Data Deleting the Backup Files from Flash Differential input Differential voltage Digital Channels Digital Manipulation Digital output Digital state input 1 bit input Direct local connection Direct Local RS 232 Connection Direct Connection Directory Structure Directory Structure of USB memory devices Disabling Data Logging Display DO actionText DO Command Download DSR ac
11. is a Signed 32 bit integer These counters are low speed polled counters Channel Options The following channel options are applicable to digital input channel types UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 142 DS none DN DB channel factor Bitmask This specifies which input channels to read For example 2DN 7 bitmask 0111 binary will return the state of inputs 2D 3D and 4D in bits O Isb 1 and 2 respectively For channel 5D the mask bit is zero so it is not read and bit 3 of the returned value will always be zero 5D can then be used as an output if desired The default values for DN and DB are 15 and 255 respectively ie read all bits C channel factor Wrap Value Counter will reset to O or wrap around when this value is reached For example if 8 pulses are received on input 4D then channel 4C 3 will count in the sequence 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 so after 8 pulses the value 2 will be returned Default value is O do not reset e R Reset counter is cleared to 0 after returning its current value Connecting to Digital Inputs Warning The DT80 s digital inputs are NOT reverse polarity protected Therefore ensure signal polarity is correct positive to numbered terminals negative to DGND terminals before connecting signals to the DT80 s digital inputs Warning Do not apply more than 30Vdc to inputs 1D 4D and do not apply more than 20Vdc to inputs 5D 8D Digital input channels 1D 4D and 5D 8D have
12. lines Tx Rx RTSCTS D Tx Rx RTSCTS D Re RISCTS O Z Y B GND Z A Y B GND A Y B GNO Note you may need to terminate each end of the cable with a 1 5kQ resistor Figure 53 Serial Channel transmit and receive flows WIRING CONFIGURATIONS ANALOG CHANNELS This section contains configuration diagrams for wiring signals and sensors to the DT80 s analog channels channels 1 to 4 on the right of its front panel Analog Channels Introduction r15 covers important concepts you need to be familiar with to successfully use the wiring configurations presented here concepts such as the DT80 s terminal designations independent inputs and shared terminal inputs and sensor excitation Which Analog Input Configuration Should Use 2 7 also contains useful information Note the dotted line may or may not be required depending upon the noise considerations etc Voltage Inputs UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 157 Shared Terminal Voltage Inputs Shared Terminal 16 introduces this wiring configuration Up to three of these inputs can share the terminal on any channel Maximum number of shared terminal voltage inputs on a DT80 3 per channel x 4 channels 12 Wiring gauge length and environment is non critical Shared Terminal Voltage Inputs sharing the terminal Figure 54 V1 Wiring for shared terminal voltage input 1 V 2 V 3 V 4 V Independent Voltage Inputs Independent Analog Inputs 216
13. n nC c Trigger after c counts on a high speed counter channel n 1SERIAL text Trigger on the arrival of characters from an external serial device at the DT80 s Serial Channel The trigger can be of the form 1SERIAL where any character arriving triggers the schedule note that there is no space between or 1SERIAL AbC where arrival of the exact string ADC triggers the schedule See SERIAL CHANNEL P148 where n is a digital channel number m n is a sequence of digital channel numbers see DIGITAL CHANNELS 2141 text isa string of characters arriving at the DT80 s Serial Channel terminals from an external serial device Note For edge triggering the minimum pulse width is approximately 16ms Triggering on Preset Counters If a counter is preset to a value greater than its specified trigger count the schedule is not triggered For example a schedule set to trigger after 10 counts on digital counter 2 2C 10 cannot be triggered if counter 2 is assigned a value of 15 Examples Trigger on Digital Channel Event The schedule header RC1E instructs the D780 to run Report schedule C on every transition of digital input 1 1E The report schedule trigger RA3 E instructs the D780 to run Report schedule A whenever digital input channel 3 receives a low to high positive rising transitions Examples Trigger on Serial Channel Event The schedule header RB1SERIAL Pasta8zZ instructs the D780 to run Report sched
14. ALARM3 T gt 10 00 00 Temp Error 1DBO 12 produces a single alarm output based on several temperature tests and a time test The combined alarm becomes true when any one of 2TK 3TK or 5TK exceeds 100 C after 10 00 00 am UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 83 The combined alarm ALARM T gt lt 06 00 18 00 AND ALARM 1TK gt 35 Vents open 1DSO W 1 opens the vents in a glasshouse if the air temperature exceeds a threshold during daylight hours The combined alarm becomes true if the temperature exceeds 35 C between the hours of 06 00 and 18 00 switching ON low active the DT80 s digital state output 1 1DSO W 1 to activate the vent mechanism and issuing a Vents open message Polling Alarm Data Alarm data that is the current value of alarm inputs can be polled requested by the host computer at any time There are three commands for polling alarm data in returns the current input value of alarm n For numbered alarms only ix returns the current input values of all alarms in For numbered and un numbered schedule x where x A B K alarms TALL returns the current input values of all alarms in all schedules When un numbered alarms are polled by x and ALL the alarm number is returned as A0 The format of data returned by an alarm poll command differs for the default free format mode h and fixed format mode H See the following examples Examples Polling Alarm Data When the DT80 is in free format
15. ALARMS lt AlarmOverwrite gt lt AlarmSize gt lt Dest gt Aem Logged data and alarm information from this schedule will be stored on the USB memory device dd at Logged data and alarm information from this schedule will be stored on the internal flash disk default lt DataOverwrite gt DATA OV Data for this schedule will be overwritten when the data store is full default DATA NOV Data will NOT be overwritten when the data store is full When the data store fills logging will stop and the Attn LED will flash lt DataSize gt nB Allocate n bytes for storing data for this schedule nKB Allocate n kilobytes for storing data for this schedule nMB Allocate n megabytes for storing data for this schedule nR Allocate space for n data records for this schedule nS Note 1 Allocate space for n seconds worth of data for this schedule nM Note 1 Allocate space for n minutes worth of data for this schedule nH Note 1 Allocate space for n hours worth of data for this schedule nD Note 1 Allocate space for n data worth of data for this schedule lt AlarmOverwrite gt ALARMS OV Alarms for this schedule will be overwritten when the store is full default ALARMS NOV Alarms will NOT be overwritten when the store is full When the store fills logging will stop and the Attn LED will flash lt AlarmSize gt nB Allocate n bytes for storing alarms for this schedule nKB Allocate n kilobytes for storing alarms for this schedule nMB Allocate n megabyt
16. STATUS Commands aaa aa aaia 122 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 7 STATUS peon ipod ai Liso 122 SSA A o E o AA 122 Part K Hardware and POWeEYL ccccscesceceeseceeneeeeeceeneeeeeeeeneaseeeneneaees 124 INPUS aN A OUMUTS cacaos 124 BESO ORE Fe AIS ao 124 PSE GO VV GNIS no 124 PSE EGS A lh ase A ce vais wena vie ni on AA 125 MEMOR Y estes aceciesecectece vaca E E E E AA 125 Solo o ei Aa 125 USB memory device CommandS ccoccccccnconcncnccnnncnnnnnnnoncnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnanennnnns 125 INSIDE THE DT8O0 aptas 126 Accessing the main battery oocoococcocconconconocnocnonconcononconnononnnnnononnnnnoncnnnonnnnnnnnnnons 126 Accessing the lithium memory backup battery occocconconocnoccocconioncnnccnonnncnoncnnnnnos 127 MOUNT NEO fo rn 128 Dinensions ots bs 9 6 o ern ee aE E E aurora eee ene 128 POW ii A 129 POWERING THE DIO crceictecnsctenn ca ncenanatecaenansenaavnavacecwaatsenaenneaunrauawenneeuneewnenseaeneroueusnmenaeens 129 Operating Environment ss ei aci 129 Internal Power Main Battery oocccoccoccconcoccconoococononconanonnonononnnnononnnnanonancnnonannnnos 129 Main Battery is Disconnected for Shipping cccocccocccocncocnconnconnnocnccononononononanonanonannonnnonanos 129 Main Battery Life catarata 129 ESA OWED sensn AE E EEE 130 0 a a e E E A E E E E A 130 Internal Memory Backup Balttery ocoocooccoccocccccoccocncooncononncononnnnco
17. Where statistical results are to be tested then channel variables provide the only means of using statistical results in alarms For example the program tests the standard deviation of the temperatures read over each minute BEGIN RS1S RAIM 3TT SD 1CV W ALARM1 1CV gt 0 1 Excessive variability END A schedule or an immediate scan containing a CV channel option can e initialize a channel variable automatically e be sent from the host computer to assign a value to a channel variable Reading a Channel Variable The DT80 treats channel variables in the same way as normal input channels return and log the current value of a channel variable using a normal schedule command Arithmetic Operations When storing input channel data into channel variables use one of four basic arithmetic operations and For example the immediate scan command 5V 1CV scans channel 5V sets 1CV equal to 1CV 5V acts as an accumulator and reports the value of 5V Similarly the immediate scan command 5V S1 1CV scans channel 5V applies span 1 S1 sets LCV equal to 1CV 5V S1 and reports the value of 5V S1 Statistical Channel Variables When a channel variable is included as a channel option for a statistically scanned channel the statistical result is stored in the channel variable and not the individual readings For example the schedule command RS5S RA10M 3V AV 1CV MX 2CV MN 3CV stores the 10 minute av
18. e reliable data transfer errors are detected and data is automatically re sent e support for application protocols such as e mail and FTP thermocouple A temperature sensing device constructed from dissimilar metals See Thermocouples 2134 transducer A device that converts a physical parameter temperature for example into an electrical voltage or current It is usually a sensor with additional electronics for signal conditioning and scaling UART Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter A hardware component that provides an RS232 serial interface The DT80 uses two UARTs one for the host RS232 port one for the serial sensor UDP User Datagram Protocol A component of the TCP IP suite of protocols UDP is a simple connectionless protocol that operates in a similar way to an RS232 link except that the link can be across a LAN or the Internet UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 186 Unlike TCP UDP does not guarantee that all data will be delivered unshared input a differential input USB Universal Serial Bus A standard method of connecting peripheral devices to a host computer The DT80 operates both as a USB device when talking to a host computer and as a USB host when talking to a USB memory device See USB COMMUNICATIONS 295 USB Memory Device A memory device designed to be connected to USB These devices can either be hard disk drives or flash memory devices They are generally powered from t
19. in fixed format mode Useful in terminal mode communications i with the DT80 Fix lock schedules f Prevents a DT80 s scan schedules trigger or channel list being modified Note that a reset still erases the schedules Fixed format Host h Fixed format mode of data returned from DT80 P21 mode Schedule ID li Returns schedule identifier Enable default internal K Allows DT80 to measure battery charger and other internal housekeeping quantities checks these every P61 seconds see P61 21122 if measurements awake UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 112 data Taker serial N Prefixes the DT80 s serial number to a schedule s returned data number prefix for example dataTaker DT80 080015 5PT385 232 5 indicating the data is from dataTaker DT80 number 080015 Messages M Enables error and warning messages to be returned to host see ERROR MESSAGES 7174 Channel numbers IN Includes channel number and type if C switch is on with returned data See FORMAT OF RETURNED DATA P21 Return data R Allows real time data to be returned to the host computer r can reduce power consumption Synchronize to IS Synchronizes all schedules time intervals to midnight for midnight example RA1M scans on the minute Otherwise schedules run from entry time See Time Triggers Synchronizing to Midnight P48 Add time to returned t Equivalent to a T at beginning of a schedule s channel list data Unit
20. 0 5CV W 1 6CV W 2 5CV RAIS 1CV W 1CV 1 ALARM 1CV gt 6CV XB 5CV W 5CV 1 6CV W 2 5CV RBX LOGONB 1 5TK END logs data at increasing intervals as the experiment proceeds The program calculates the next log point as an incrementing power of 2 seconds that is it logs the temperatures at 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 seconds as follows RAIS is a simple one second accumulator 1CV W 1CV 1 ALARM 1CV gt 6CV tests if the next log point has been reached indicates start of actionProcesses XB polls report schedule B 5CV W 5CV 1 increments the exponent 6CV W 2 5CV calculates the next log point indicates end of actionProcesses RBX LOGONB is a report schedule that collects data when polled 1 5TK Combining Alarms Alarms can be combined together to yield a single result from several alarm tests They are combined using logical operators which replace the digitalAction actionText and actionProcesses Of all except the last alarm The actions associated with the combined test are attached to the last alarm Any alarm delay period is also associated with the last alarm The logical operators are AND OR and XOR The DT80 evaluates a combined alarm in the order in which its component alarms appear in the schedule command This means that the alarm numbers do not have to be sequential Examples Combining Alarms The combined alarm ALARM4 3TK gt 100 OR ALARM2 2TK gt 100 OR ALARM 5TK gt 100 AND
21. 1 Obtain a valid unused IP address for use on the Ethernet network Ask your network administrator if this is possible do it and write the number down then jump straight to step 2 If this is not possible continue below a Switch on every device on the network to which you re going to connect the DT80 This is vital to ensure automatic detection of every existing static IP address on the network occurs later in this procedure b Using a Windows computer that has TCP IP installed configured and operating correctly on the network do the following i From the Start menu select the Control Panel ii Select the Network Connections icon iii Right Click on the network icon which we have connected our logger to and select status iv Write down the four part number shown in the IP Address field for example 192 168 30 3 The first three parts of this number 192 168 30 in the example constitute the network number you ll need for the DT80 s IP address v Ifyou want the DT80 to communicate beyond the local network to which you re about to connect it also write down the numbers shown in the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway fields of the IP Configuration dialog box You ll use these later vi From the Start menu choose Programs gt MS DOS Prompt An MS DOS window opens Here you ll use the PING command to locate a vacant IP address on the network using the network number found in substep iii above 192 168 30 followed by a fourt
22. COM amp LPT i 4 Communications Port COM1 Serial Port 4 ECP Printer Port LPT1 Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM11 Y Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM12 Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM23 Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM24 Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM25 Y Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM26 Standard Serial over Bluetooth link COM6 Y USB Serial Port COM8 50 Sa Pai ELA Dounble Click on the most likely candidate This will open the USB 3 devices properties We can identify the FTDI manufacturers label here Diraca hp Peta EE E LPT Ler ar 158 Sora Loarre Using the USB Connection Once the driver has been successfully installed the USB connection will operate in a very similar way to an RS232 connection except that e it will be faster e you do not need to set baud rate or flow control options However note that e it is not recommended that the logger be allowed to go to sleep while the USB cable is connected e modems cannot be used on the USB interface UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 96 RS 232 Communications Quick Start e Toconnect the DT80 directly to a local host computer go to Setting Up a Direct Connection 2100 e Toconnect the D780 to a distant host computer using a modem communications link go to Setting Up a Remote Connection 2103 DT80 RS 232 Basics The DT80 has a 9 pin male connector for RS 232 serial communication to a co
23. For example if P39 2 in this case P40 does not matter then the clock time must be set as a decimal value T 11 7528 Time is maintained through both software and hardware resets Time and date stamps can be added to real time data and to logged data see T and D in Switches 112 Time and date are automatically logged whenever data is stored Setting the DT80 s Date D When setting the data Taker data logger s calendar use the date format defined by P31 For example if P31 2 then the date must be set in North American format D 02 01 2000 The DT80 s date is maintained through both software and hardware resets Time and date stamps can be added to real time data and to logged data see T and D in Switches 112 Time and date are automatically logged whenever data is stored Setting Date and Time Together DT Use the DT command to set the D780 s date and time simultaneously independent of P31 date format and P39 time format The command s formats match those of the date and time fields of fixed format mode records The command looks like DT YYYY MM DD hh mm ss where yyyy is the year Date MM isthe month DD is the day hh is the hour Time mm is the minute ss is the second Here s an example DT 2000 11 23 13 09 40 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 118 Resetting the DT80 The DT80 provides the following methods for clearing and initializing its sub systems 119 Command Action Effe
24. This can sink up to 100mA 30Vdc so it can drive a low voltage actuator or relay or LED directly See wiring diags A 47k pullup resistor to 3 3V is also included allowing logic devices to be driven e Outputs 5D 8D are not suitable for directly driving loads such as relays or LEDs Logic devices can however be driven Note that each of these output drivers is tri stateable When outputs 1D 4D are used to directly drive loads the load will be ON when the output is in the LOW state Thus if a load was wired up to output 1D you would use 1DSO 0 to turn the load ON and 1DSO 1 to turn it OFF The default state of the output drivers on channels 5D 8D is disabled tri stated This allows these channels to be used as inputs When a digital output command for channels 5D 8D is evaluated the output state is set to the required value then the output driver is enabled The output will then stay enabled until an input command is evaluated for that channel For example pa E iT PP 4 ATT AY IJA CI R 5 1 DELAY 10 6D then logic 1 for 5ms then logic O for 10ms then the output driver will be disabled will drive logic O on output 6D for 10ms The RELAY terminals are voltage free normally open latching relay contacts Table 1 DT80 Channel Types r29 for voltage and current ratings Use LRELAY 1 to close the contacts 1IRELAY 0 to open see WIRING CONFIGURATION DIGITAL CHANNELS ost samoto citar output wiring contgurati
25. Time from falling edge to rising edge Time from falling edge to falling edge Time of rising edge Time of falling edge Use this channel s value as thermocouple reference junction temperature Use this channel s value to correct the DT80 s electrical zero Use this channel s value as bridge excitation voltage RS232 levels full duplex RS422 485 levels full duplex RS422 485 levels DT80 User s Manual Applies a previously defined span See Spans Sn 262 Applies a previously defined polynomial See Polynomials Yn 262 n Function 1 x Vx Ln x Log x Absolute x Xx Grey code to binary conversion 32bit See Intrinsic Functions Fn r612 Applies a previously defined thermistor scaling equation See Thermistor Scaling Tn 263 and Thermistors 2136 Returns the difference xUnits between the latest reading and the previous reading NO Or B jo MD Time difference seconds between the latest reading and the previous reading Rate of change xUnits per second based on latest and previous readings and their respective times Rate of change xUnits per second Useful when the sensor reading is already a difference e g resetting counters Integration with respect to time xUnits seconds between the latest and the previous readings area under curve Normally used for digital channels If used on analog channels then channel factor is interpreted as a threshold val
26. and polynomials ahead of the schedules and alarms e A span s number is not related to any channel number they do not have to match Use any span for any channel e Use one span for each type of sensor transducer Example Span The commands S17 0 300 100 1000 kPa RA5M 1V S17 Boiler pressure define the span S17 then use it in a schedule which instructs the data Taker to return data in the form Boiler pressure 239 12 kPa Boiler pressure 247 33 kPa y Polynomials Yn Polynomials are used to define calibrations for non linear sensors A total of 50 spans and polynomials can be defined Polynomials are applied to channels as a channel option see Yn 35 A maximum of six polynomial coefficients can be entered The DT80 evaluates a polynomial according to the formula 0 y k x ky kx kox 2 kgx3 k x4 Kkgx5 n 5 where x is the channel reading and the k s are coefficient terms A polynomial is defined as follows Yn k0 k1 k2 k3 k4 k5 Text where n is the polynomial number 1 to 50 polynomials and spans must not both use the same number UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 62 k k are the coefficient terms only the coefficient terms up to the required order need to be entered ext replaces the channel s default units text Simple scale and offset corrections are also possible internally the D780 treats spans as a first order polynomial The coefficient terms of a polynomia
27. applies to DT80s running version 5 02 or later firmware WARNING dataTaker products are not authorized for use as critical components in any life support system where failure of the product is likely to affect the system s safety or effectiveness List of Major Tables Table 1 DT80 Channel Types r29 Table 2 DT80 System Variables r32 Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 23s Table 9 DT80 Parameters 2112 Table 10 DT80 Switches 2113 Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 2115 Table 12 DT80 Resets 119 Table 13 DT80 TEST Report 121 Table 14 DT80 Delete Commands Summary 2166 Table 15 DT80 Retrieval Commands Summary r168 Table 16 ASCII Characters 2170 Table 17 RS 232 Pinouts e171 Table 18 DT80 Error Messages 176 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 2 Contents Part A E AAPP PP A 11 DTO CONCCOUS aan 11 Wat IS NS DIS ad ds 11 DI SO FHenaly SOMWareeesomritoi a ierooe celos cicins 11 FADOULT MIS Maniac A 12 ATO Or ine WT SO SINE ACES ineditos 12 cai A esate 12 LOW dt 12 SWC OR soe carers E E A AO 13 Connecting to a Host Computer ccccocccccnncccncoccnccocnocononconnonannnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnannonnnnonnnonannnnanienon 13 DEMING COMMAS vinilo 13 ZOGC ANS AMO q PPP PP UR OO A O O nia ene ene 13 Ways USING MIS nd a id da bono 14 Fundamental Inputs and Ranges ococcocccccccccoccnconconconcnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnns 14 Fundamental Input Ranges desann iaa a ia sabe ai e
28. ee O lana T ae temperature See LM Figure 70 L3 Wiring for LM135 series input WIRING CONFIGURATION DIGITAL CHANNELS Digital Input Wiring configurations D1 Wiring 1 4D Only Voltage Free 4 S 1 if contact open Contact 1DS 0 if contact closed Channel Types DB BN DB C HSC 1D D GND D2 Wiring for 1 8D logic level digital 4 if i lts state or counter MS MEN Sa High input 1DS 0 if input is logic O Low Channel Types DB BN DB C HSC TTL Output e g PLC D7 Wiring To read position 1PE Phase Encoder 4PE uses 1C 8 2C 2PE uses 3C amp 4C Phase Encoder Figure 71 Digital Input Wiring UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 164 Digital output wiring configurations D3 Wiring for digital output to drive relay D4 Wiring for digital output to drive LED D5 Wiring for logic level digital output D6 Wiring for Relay Output 1 4D Only 1DSO 0 to turn relay on 1DSO 1 to turn relay off 1 4D Only 1DSO 0 to turn on LED 1DSO 1 to turn off the LED Mm 1D 12V GND DC 1 8D 1DSO 1 provides logic 1 High 1DSO 0 provides logic 0 Low Input e g PLC 1RELAY 1 to turn load on 1RELAY 0 to turn load off Figure 72 Digital Output Wiring UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 165 Part M Reference COMMAND SUMMARIES Summary Delete Commands The following table summarizes all the clear delete erase commands supported by the DT80 Job Da
29. from the function list via the front panel went i be corr i Lo E Sample Disk Atin E Figure 27 DT80 Display Display The display normally shows the current value for all channels and alarms for the current job Each channel or alarm is shown one at a time The actual channel or alarm shown is selected by pressing the up and down directional keys on the front panel In addition it shows several status values that can also be selected via the up and down directional keys The channels and alarms are arranged in the same order that they are defined in for the current job Displaying Channels and Alarms When channel data is displayed the top line of the display shows the channel identification The default is the channel number and type If a channel identification text has been entered as a channel option then the first 16 characters of that text is displayed When alarms are displayed the top line of the display identifies the alarm and the state of the alarm ON or OFF Ifthe alarm channel definition includes identification text then this is displayed when the alarm is not true If the alarm contains action text this is displayed when the alarm is true Alarms must be numbered to be displayed The bottom line on the display shows the most recent reading as a numeric value or bar graph If the channel or alarm has not yet been sampled the display shows For example assume that the following job has been
30. 19891 PF OBMAT 2 00 000065 EVENT 2001 03 29 14 33 024 418964 Reset 2 00 000065 SELF DIAGNOSTIC 2001 04 19 01 13 46 228619 datarilemap cpp 119 EVENT 2001 04 24 19 23 09 621897 Main power brownout EL The format of the information returned from the event log is the same whether the DT80 is in free format mode or fixed format mode Events the Whole Log The event log can only be unloaded in its entirety it s not possible to unload just a defined timespan of the log Once an unload of the event log has started it must go to completion There is no command to quit an unload part way through Clearing the Event Log Clear the event log by sending CEVTLOG to the DT80 This command clears the EVENT LOG file and initializes it with an Event log created entry such as EVENT 2001 04 23 14 32 26 042234 Event log created This entry is the first item unloaded in subsequent unloads of the event log STATUS Commands STATUS The STATUS command returns a report showing the status of the DT80 s schedules channels alarms memory and logging to the host computer The first line of the report shows the version creation date and creation time of the DT80 s firmware The last line reports the DT80 s current switch settings see Switches 1122 Send the u switch to make STATUS results less verbose dataTaker 80 Version 4 09 0001 Flash 2001 02 18 J ls sila none F Scan Schedules Active Halted 0 0 Alarm
31. 26 12 30 00 A 2000 07 26 Here s the A from to command showing valid forms of the fixed format style date and time A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 0 250366 2000 07 28 18 30 00 0 750244 A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 2000 07 28 18 30 00 0 750244 A 2000 07 26 2000 07 28 18 30 00 0 750244 A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 0 250366 2000 07 28 18 30 00 A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 2000 07 28 18 30 00 A 2000 07 26 2000 07 28 18 30 00 A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 0 250366 2000 07 28 A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 2000 07 28 A 2000 07 26 2000 07 28 Deleting Logged Alarm Records Delete logged alarm records from the data memory of the DT80 using these commands UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 88 DELALARMS Deletes the current job s alarms Job names directory DELALARMS JobName Deletes only JobName s alarms Structures programs and DELALARMS Deletes all jobs alarms AA NOESEN These commands are also listed in Summary Delete Commands r166 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 89 Part H DT80 Front Panel The DT80 front panel has a 2 line by 16 character back lit liquid crystal display 6 keys and 3 status indicator lights The display provides information about data Taker data logger status channel data alarms and store operation In addition the display will indicate conditions that require attention and USB memory device status The DT80 from cannot be programmed from the front panel However pre defined commands can be issued by selecting
32. 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 ve 53 53 53 53 53 53 26 0 21 0 28 0 29 0 53 53 53 33 0 53 foo U 53 53 La 30 0 co A e 32 0 34 0 36 0 cy 38 0 39 0 007568 1 A 0 22 000732 1 A 0 22 001586 1 A 0 22 080932 1 A 0 22 000732 1 A 0 22 000854 1 A 0 22 006103 1 A 0 22 000732 1 A 0 22 000732 1 A 0 22 005371 1 A 0 22 000732 1 A 0 22 000732 1 A 0 22 004638 1 A 0 22 009887 1 A 0 22 50564 0060 065F 50643 0060 3BEB 43500 0060 EFD2 43676 0060 300D 43929 0060 7D84 47816 0060 8DDA 46851 0060 1BC1 42886 0060 5617 43869 0060 DCC9 45980 0060 F09F 43405 0060 37F1 45734 0060 CDC4 47549 0060 89B3 43370 0060 E99A Alarm number 0 real time data 1 logged data 2 unused 3 end of data return end of unload for logged data 4 data discontinuity record caused by sending one of the LOGOFF or Halt commands or by changing jobs 6 burst complete applicable to the DT800 7 burst timeout applicable to the DT800 Error number Information Number Parameter number Status message number Test message number Password mess
33. 648 to 1 count 2 147 483 647 counts Accuracy of the DT80 Maximum measurement error is given by error reading Basic Accuracy FullScale Reading 0 01 where Basic Accuracy is as specified in the following table DC voltage measurement 0 1 0 35 DC current measurement 0 15 0 45 DC resistance measurement 0 1 0 35 Frequency measurement 0 1 0 25 Derived Measurement Ranges The following table indicates typical measurement ranges and resolutions for derived measurements using external sensors 4 20mA Loop O to 100 0 01 Temperature 250 0 to 1800 C depends on sensor Strain Gauges and 10 ppm 1 ppm Bridges 10 ppm 10 ppm 10 ppm 100 ppm Analog State 0 or 1 1 Analog Channels Introduction Input Terminals The DT80 provides four analog input channels numbered 1 to 4 Depending on the wiring configuration used these allow between 4 and 12 separate voltages to be measured Each analog input channel on a D780 is a 4 wire connection Figure 2 P15 that allows voltage current resistance and frequency to be measured These are the fundamental signals output by most sensors It is not necessary to use all four terminals on each channel two are often adequate Figure 2 Analog input channel terminal labels The exact function of each terminal varies depending on how the channel is programmed In general terms e The Excite terminal can be a voltage input or it
34. Channel Definitions A channel definition defines a measurement to be taken It is therefore the fundamental building block that you use when programming the DT80 Channel definitions are normally enclosed in a schedule definition The schedule definition specifies when to take the measurements The channel definitions specify what to measure on which terminals and how to sample and process the data value A sample schedule definition is shown below RA2S 2DS 3R 4W 2 V 0 1 GL3V Speed km h FFO 9CV W 9CV 1 This shows four channel definitions which are part of the A schedule Each time this schedule runs which will be every 2 seconds four measurements will be taken 1 The logic state of digital channel 2 will be sampled 2 A resistance connected to analog channel 3 4 wire connection will be measured 3 A voltage connected to analog channel 2 and terminals will be measured and displayed as a speed value 4 An internal general purpose variable will be updated incremented Let us now examine the syntax of a channel definition more closely A channel definition consists of up to four components e the channel type is a mnemonic code which tells the DT80 what sort of quantity is being measured or what sort of sensor is attached In the above example the channel types are DS digital state R resistance V voltage and CV channel variable A channel definition must always include a channel type e achannel number pre
35. Counter 2 Clock 47KQ 22nF Y Schmitt 47KQ Input H M Counter 3 Clock 47KO 22nF 3V Quad 2 Clock Up Quad 2 Clock Down Schmitt 47KO est OHEC a gt Counter 4 Clock 47KQ 22nF Figure 51 High Speed Counter Channels Fig x shows a simplified circuit diagram for the DT80 s four hardware counter inputs As can be seen the channels can be divided into two pairs of inputs 1C 2C and 3C 4C Each pair can be used as either e two independent counter inputs for pulse counting or e asingle phase encoder quadrature input for use with position sensors that provide phase encoded outputs A and B Using Counter Inputs Channel Types Counter inputs can be monitored using the following channel types In each case n represents the channel number 1 4 for HSC 1 2 for PE nHSC High Speed Counter returns the number of positive transitions seen on counter input nC The counter value is a signed 32 bit integer nPE Phase Encoder returns the current relative position of the phase encoder device connected to input pair nPE The value returned is in counts and is a signed 32 bit integer which may be positive or negative depending on the direction of travel Channel Options The following channel options are applicable to high speed counter input channel types HSC PE channel factor Wrap Value Counter will reset to O when this value is reached For example if 8 pulses are received on input 3C then
36. HOST_PORT BAUD_RATE 115200 PROFILE HOST PORT FLOW_CONTROL HARDWARE PROFILE HOST MODEM EXT POWER SWITCH 3 SINGLEPUSH 2 Provide power to the modem and if required control its power as discussed in Powering the D780 s Modem 7102 3 Connect a suitable comms cable between the serial port on the DT80 s modem and the D7T80 s Host RS 232 port Suitable cables are discussed in DT80 to Modem Cable e101 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 103 DT80 lt gt MODEM CABLE Figure 36 Connect the DT80 to its modem 4 Atthe remote host end of the link connect a suitable comms cable between the serial port on the host computer and the local modem This cable is normally supplied with the modem 5 On the host computer launch suitable dataTaker or terminal software for example DeTransfer DeLogger or HyperTerminal 6 Configure the host software s communications parameters as required It is recommended hardware flow control and the use of an error correcting protocol 7 Wait a few minutes after connecting the DT80 to its modem step 3 above then attempt to connect to the remote DT80 from the host computer The few minutes wait gives the D780 time to automatically initialize its modem usually occurs within a minute of detecting the modem s presence but for certainty it is recommended to wait longer Installing the Host Computer s Modem If running DeTransfer or DeLogger Pro on the computer install
37. Job Commands P55 Once a job has been unlocked and stored alarms and data has been deleted use the following commands to delete the job DELJOB Deletes the current job from the DT80 See the Table 15 DT80 DELJOB JobName Deletes only JobName from the DT80 Retrieval Commands DELJOB Deletes all jobs from the DT80 Summary 16s table If any schedule has stored alarms or data into memory or data logging is enabled by LOGON or schedules are locked by F the job cannot be erased the D780 issues error message E4 or E48 see ERROR MESSAGES 7172 Sending a new job to the D780 automatically erases the current job from the runtime environment However the job and its data remains in memory and can be run again at a future time Special Commands in Schedules Here are some special commands that will be useful for controlling the flow of data processing in schedules There are two tools for conditional program flow control e the IF command e conditional expressions and one tool for unconditional program flow control e the DO command Conditional Processing IF Command The DT80 s IF command allows processes to be performed conditionally that is upon other factors being true The general format of the command is IF condition actionText actionProcesses where If condition is true the processes are carried out See Condition Tests 250 below lf condition is false the processes are not carr
38. LCV is greater than or equal to 1000 Combining Methods The different scaling and calculation methods can be used together The following comprehensive examples are the best way to demonstrate UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 65 Example 1 In this program a vector average is calculated The inputs are wind speed and direction BEGIN Wind 01 Wind speed calibration 0 50m s 0 1000mV S1 0 50 0 1000 m s Wind direction 0 2Pi radians 0 360deg 0 1000mV S2 0 6 2832 0 1000 radians Y3 0 1 m s Units text for wind speed report Y4 0 1 Deg Units text for wind direction report RA5S Schedule to scan every 5 seconds 1V S1 1CV W Sample wind speed 2V S2 2CV W Sample wind direction 3CV W 3CV 1CV COS 2CV Sum x components ACV W 4CV 1CV SIN 2CV Sum y components 5CV W 5CV 1 0 Number of scans RB1M Calculate report and log every minute Calculate mean magnitude 6CV W SQRT 3CV 3CV 4CV 4CV 5CV 6CV Mean Wind Magnitude Y3 FF1 Calculate direction 7CV W ATAN 4CV 3CV 57 29 Determine direction quadrant 7CV W 7CV 3CV gt 0 AND 4CV lt 0 360 7CV W 7CV 3CV lt 0 AND 4CV lt 0 180 7CV W 7CV 3CV lt 0 AND 4CV gt 0 180 If wind speed is zero return 1 0 7CV W 7CV 6CV lt 0 7CV 1 7CV Mean Wind Direction Y4 FF0O 1 5CV W 0 END LOGON G Example 2 This program scans ten channels and calculates a cross channel aver
39. PrOQraMS occcoccnccccncoccncccnncncncnncnconcnononnnnnnnnnnncnnrncnncnnnanonos 48 Time Triggers Synchronizing to Midnight cooocccccnccccnconcnconcnnonnnnncncnncnonanonnnnonnnnnnnnnos 48 Retrieving Entered Schedules and Programs ccccccecccsecccececeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeseueeseeeeseeeaes 49 Triggering and Schedule OFder cccccccccsccceeccceeeeceeeccueeceeeecueeceueecsueesueeseeeesseeseaeessaeens 49 Changing a Schedule THAT aa ii 49 Naning ScNeduleS a a lonas 49 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 4 Halting Se Resuming SCE quie cari ca 49 E oe O ieaciantiaonaaparamennevianeiat 49 Deleng Scnedules sirope oia 50 Special Commands in Schedules ooccoccoccconconconcoccocnocncononncononnonnonononnonncnnonnnnnoncnnns 50 Conditional Processing IF Command oocccoccccncnccncnnoncncnnnnnnnnnoncnnonnnonnrononnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnos 50 Conditional Processing Boolean Expressions ccccccceececeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeaeesaeeessaees 51 Unconditional Processing DO Command c occccncncnncnccncnnncnnnnnnnnncncnnnnnnnnnonnnonnnnonancnncnnnnos 51 Part D o o o 93 Part E Manipulating Data asspreidooiconer orientaciones 56 Channel Options Statistical oooncoccconionnccnconnoccccnconccnnconnnnnonncnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnancnannns 56 A 29 eee eee ne eae ee E ee eee ene ee 56 Standard Deviation in 56 Maximum and Minimum MX and MN oocccoccnncnnnccnncnnncnnnnonnnnnonanonnnno
40. RESET command RESET w5 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 119 Manual Reset Button A hardware reset is initiated and a triple push reset by pressing the D780 s manual reset button To do this insert a straightened paper clip or similar object through the small hole located between the D780 s Host RS 232 port and the USB port P125 Factory Defaults Both the triple push reset and the FACTORYDEFAULTS command restart the D780 using its factory defaults which are kept in the DT80 s Flash memory Some of these settings are listed in the Factory Default 1 4 column of the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 2115 A triple push reset ignores and does not delete any user defaults USER INI and ONRESET DXC but the FACTORYDEFAULTS command does the following e deletes USER INI working from internal memory e deletes USER INI backup from Flash memory e deletes ONRESET DXC working from internal memory e deletes ONRESET DXC backup from Flash memory To return a DT80 to its totally original as shipped state send the FACTORYDEFAULTS command reconnect then send the FORMAT B command LEDs and Messages After a Reset The DT80 does the following after it is reset 2125 Acquire LED flashes immediately then resumes RESET heartbeat flash Initializing lt DOne Also if externally powered Charge LED off momentarily then on All LEDs flash rapidly four times SINGLEPUSH Then Attention LED on
41. RS 232 gt Figure 38 Ethernet setup use RS 232 comms to add Ethernet settings to your DT80 s user startup defaults a From DeTransfer send the command PROFILE ETHERNET IP_ADDRESS w x y z where w x y z is the unused IP address you wrote down in substep 1 b vii above The DT80 s initialization file USER INI now contains the IP address b If you want the DT80 to communicate beyond its local network that is with external networks or subnets that are connected to your local network by gateways go to step 4 But if you only want the DT80 to communicate on the local Ethernet network jump to step 5 4 Add your network s IP subnet mask and IP gateway to the DT80 s initialization file only required if the DT80 is to communicate beyond its local network a From DeTransfer send PROFILE ETHERNET SUBNET MASK s tC u v where s t u v are the numbers you wrote down from the Subnet Mask field in substep 1 b iv above b From DeTransfer send PROFILE ETHERNET GATEWAY 0 p gqg r where O p q r are the numbers you wrote down from the Default Gateway field in substep 1 b iv above The DT80 s initialization file USER INI now contains the local network s IP subnet mask and IP gateway 5 Reset the DT80 Send ib SINcLEPUSH D gt RS 232 gt Figure 39 Ethernet setup reset the DT80 to load the Ethernet PROFILE setting s a From DeTransfer send SINGLEPUSH or carry out a firm rese
42. Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting if a schedule isn t from date or date time specified alarms Ax from to Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting are always from date or date time and ending with date or unloaded date time schedule by sche A JobName Returns alarms for JobName in the order of report dule A JobName from A JobName from to A JobName x A JobName x rom A JobName x rom to Event Log UEVTLOG Table 15 DT80 Retrieval Commands Summary schedule A to K Returns alarms for JobName starting from date or date time Returns alarms for JobName starting from date or date time and ending with date or date time Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from date or date time Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from date or date time and ending with dateor date time Returns the contents of the event log GETTING OPTIMAL SPEED FROM YOUR DT80 Speed Factor ADC Settings The current settings of the DT80 s ADC calibration settling time sampling time can be adjusted using various channel options parameters and switches See Table 9 DT80 Parameters 21 12 and Table 10 DT80 Switches 21 3 The default ADC settings are suitable for most sensors and we recommend that you don t alter these unless you re an experienced DT80 user Speed Factor Number of Channel
43. Table 4 DT80 Job Commands 255 or Naming Schedules A name can be added maximum eight characters no spaces to any of the general purpose report schedules RA RB RK For example RA Boiler 1 10S 1 5TK Schedule names are returned in the DIRJOBS report see Table 4 DT80 Job Commands 255 and STATUS14 report STATUS14 2123 Halting amp Resuming Schedules Schedules can be halted individually or as a group H Halt all schedules HA HAB HKHalt RA RB RK schedule HS Halt the statistical sub schedule see Statistical Sub Schedule Halt Go r47 Schedules can be resumed GOed individually or as a group G Resume all schedules GA GB GKResume RA RB RK schedule GS Resume the statistical sub schedule see Statistical Sub Schedule Halt Go 247 247 Locking Schedules Schedules in the DT80 can be locked by the F switch command F 2122 to prevent them from being accidentally changed or deleted UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 49 The entire job that contains the schedules can also be locked see the LOCKJOB JobName command in Table 4 DT80 Job Commands P55 Deleting Schedules The individual schedules cannot be deleted from the DT80 the entire job containing the schedules must be deleted Important A locked job must be unlocked and any stored data and alarms deleted before the job itself can be deleted see the UNLOCKJOB DELDATA and DELALARMS commands in Table 4 DT80
44. YYYY North American 3 YYYY MM DD ISO 4 D D Decimal days since base date 5 Ss Decimal seconds since base date See Localisation P13 Sets significant digits of output data Note logged data is always stored to 5 digits so P32 gt 5 is only useful for real time data If P33 gt 0 this defines fixed field width for all output data right justified space padded or least significant digits truncated P21 P36 Units 0 C Celsius 1 F Fahrenheit 2 K Kelvin 3 R Rankin Data is converted before being placed into store and cannot be converted at unload time Page 110 UM 0085A0 Decimal point character ASCII 46 1to255 The character used as a decimal point in floating point numbers see Output Format Time format Mode 0 Oto5 P39 Time Format 0 Hh mm ss s 1 s s decimal seconds since midnight 2 m m decimal minutes since base 3 h h decimal hours since base 4 D D decimal days since base 5 s s decimal seconds since base See Time 230 Time separator character ASCII 58 1to255 ASCII character as decimal number separator character for hh mm ss time format Time sub second digits Digits 3 O to 6 Sets number of digits in time outputs DDE OLE tag control Mode 0 0 to 2 P45 Mode 0 off 1 OLE 2 DDE 41 Whitespace is replaced with underscore Time instant format format Mode 0 Oto 5 P50 Mode of instants in time 0 P39P22P31 time delimiter date 1 P31P22P39 date delimiter time
45. _ KK Digital Section Analog Section Digital Channels main ground D GND Analog channels main ground A GND Figure 49 The DT80 has two ground systems Analog Ground The floating analog section of the DT80 has its own ground analog ground which is brought out to the six AGND terminals This analog ground is isolated from the DT80 s other ground the DGND terminals DIGITAL CHANNELS The DT80 provides e 4 bidirectional digital I O channels 1D 4D with open drain output driver and pull up resistor e 4 bidirectional digital I O channels 5D 8D with tri stateable output driver and weak pull down resistor e 1 voltage free latching relay contact output RELAY UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 141 e 1LED output Attn e 4 hardware counter inputs 1C 4C which can be used as independent counter channels or as two quadrature phase encoder inputs Channels 1C and 2C are low threshold capable Bidirectional Digital I O Channels 3V 47KQ OAT te 9100 9100 5 802 3 3nF _ e La Figure 50 Digital Circuit Enable Figure 50 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the DT80 s eight digital I O channels As can be seen the channels can be divided into two groups 1D 4D and 5D 8D While these two groups have different hardware characteristics discussed below all eight channels are accessed and used in much the same way Each of the eight digital channels can be used as either e adigital input for monitoring t
46. a data logging session a discontinuity record is written into the currently open file for that report schedule In unloaded data a discontinuity record looks like a normal data record except that all data items are set to zero and its record index is set to 4 D 080435 J08 1 2001708717 10132 123 0 118530 EA 0 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 0 00000 The discontinuity record indicates that a break occurred in the acquisition of data and is included in data subsequently unloaded from memory Whenever a G command Go all report schedules or a Gx command Go report schedule x is issued after a halt command data logging resumes in the currently open data log file s Deleting Logged Data To delete logged data from memory at any time use the following commands DELDATA Deletes the current job s data from Job names internal memory and USB memory directory device structures DELDATA JobName datetime Deletes only JobName s data from programs and internal memory and USB memory alarms are not device Deletes records with time stamps erased prior to the specified date Note The date and time are in the format of the DT80 s current date format P31 and time format P39 settings UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 70 DELDATA JobName iso datetime Deletes only JobName s data from internal memory and USB memory device Deletes records with time stamps prior to the specified date Note The date and time are in the s
47. can also be read modified and then updated For example 1V 7CV means that the value of 7CV is divided by the reading on channel 1 and the result is returned to 7CV Note that these actions occur only at report time and not during statistical sampling Channels tagged with NR are not returned to the host computer they may still be logged or displayed NL ND FFn default 1 Fen No log No display Working channel Fixed point format Oto 7 n decimal places Exponential format DT80 User s Manual Oto7 Channels tagged with NL are not logged they may still be returned or displayed Channels tagged with ND are not displayed on the LCD they may still be returned or logged Same as NR NL ND Working channels are usually used to hold intermediate values in calculations Specifies numeric format for display and free format h real time data For example FF2 returns 71 46 mv Page 37 Channel name and Units FMn BGmin max name name unit suni E Ma Table 3 DT80 Channel Options UM 0085A0 n decimal places Mixed FF or FE O to 7 n significant digits User specified name ASCII text Default units User specified name User specified units User specified name No units No channel name User specified units No channel name No units DT80 User s Manual For example FE2 returns 7 14e1 mV FMn uses exponential format if exponent is less than 4 or
48. channel table entry see 178 Serial Data Transmission and Reception If a job contains one or more 1SERIAL channel definitions then the serial channel is activated Data may then be received from a connected serial device at any time whilst the job is loaded As data is received it is stored in an area of memory called the serial channel receive buffer When a LSERIAL channel is evaluated ie when the schedule of which it is part executes the DT80 processes the control string from left to right Outout actions involve data being sent from the DT80 so they are performed there and then as they are encountered in the control string When the DT80 finds an input action in the control string it will read any previously received data from the receive buffer and attempt to match it against the format specified in the input action If no data is present in the receive buffer at the time that the input action is processed then the DT80 will wait up to 10 seconds this timeout is configurable for more data to arrive Then e If the incoming data matches that required by the input action then the DT80 will move on to the next input action in the string If the end of the control string is reached then the 1SERIAL channel will return 0 Success e Ifthe timeout expires while the DT80 is waiting for more data then evaluation of the 1SERIAL channel will be terminated and a receive timeout error code 20 will be returned e Ifthe timeout expires
49. clear the channel variables Classes i interval _ Number of Occurrences Counts A x K Channel Reading Figure 19 Histogram In addition the DT80 automatically counts the number of under range over range and total readings and stores these in three separate channel variables See also the Statistical 37 category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 232 The format of the histogram channel option is where is the lowest channel reading of interest is the highest channel reading of interest y gt x is the first channel variable mCV to store counts is the last channel variable nCV to store counts Three other counts are also stored by the D780 n 2 CV Number of readings under range lt x n 1 CV Number of readings over range gt y nCV Total number of readings including those out of range The histogram channel option does not affect the usual reporting or logging of the channel s readings The number of channels that can be histogrammed is limited by the number of channel variables available the DT80 supports a maximum of 500 CVs Example Histogram To create a histogram of a temperature channel over five classes requires eight channel variables RAIS 1TT H25 0 35 0 1 8CV This schedule generates a histogram with five temperature classes and intervals of 2 C 1CVcounts for first class 25 0 to 26 999 C interval 2CVcounts for second class 27 0 to 28 999 C interval
50. coe aa aE Ea iia 14 Accuracy ofthe DTO Sirrimi eae an En aaa e E i E 15 Derived Measurement Ranges occcocccoccconcconcconcconcconnonnnonnnonnnonnnonnnonnonnenanenanenanenaninaninons 15 Analog Channels INWOOUCHON spirit delia 15 A tah det tote seme due nace a a dame ted iaseutalebaniers 15 MORDICXOTS caia aa te 15 Gal Ranges and AttenuatoiS a a ii a ela cali 16 ANAlOGINDUL CONPGQUPATIONS ii ie iodo 16 Sensor EXCA UON ud ee ei 17 Digital Channels INtroduUCtION ooccocncoccocncocconncncnonncnconnnoncnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnonanonss 17 Serial Channel INE OG UCHO Mc Aaa 18 Programming the DiSlinini a a a a 18 Speciy Cannel NV OCS is laa occ ocie 18 A A A 18 A A A A A EE 18 Schedule COM AS o 18 O A A A arceiameee 19 Scaling ana Caca ee AO 19 olle Ale MB es esae A A 19 A 19 19 DEE A ahead edna utah EA E EE 19 HANS WIEN dnde dada 19 Si e O A 19 Examples of Things You Can Do with Channels oocccocccccccccccnccncncnacononnnnncncnncnonacnnnnnnnos 20 USB Memory CCVICCS snein e a sintesis direc 20 Format of Returned Data oocconcoccconcoccccnconcccnconcnnncnnnonccnncnnrnnncnnrnnrrnnrnnrnnnrnnrnannnnrnnes 21 Reale datar ide 21 Free Format MOJADA 21 Fixed Format Mode ui a E E 21 LOggea UDE ie EEE E E E OE OE E ET 22 VALI Col OFAN Feye e E E E E A 22 FCO OMA aaa 22 Guidelines for Successful Data Gathering coccconccconoccnoccnocncnnnonaconanonanancnnarnnanos 22 nn asake Aa a aaa ae dienes a
51. data followed by the text modifier listed above If more than one intrinsic function is placed in a channel s channel option list only the last is applied Example Intrinsic Function The channel list UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 61 1V F2 returns the square root of the reading as follows ly 435 6 my S0que Spans Sn Spans are used to define calibrations for linear sensors They are particularly suited to 4 20mA current loop inputs A total of 50 spans and polynomials can be defined Spans are applied to a channel as a channel option see Sn 30 A span is defined as follows Bn a gt CO Text where is the span number 1 to 50 spans and polynomials must not both use the same number are the physical coordinates of two points on the calibration line see Figure 26 P62 are the signal coordinates of the two points on the calibration line see Figure 26 P62 If not specified c and d default to 0 and 100 respectively which is useful for 4 20mA current loop channels channel type L replaces the channel s default units text A single span definition may be applied to any number of channels in any schedules or alarms Physical range iC for example Upper b physical Lower a physical Signal range c d mV for example Lower Upper signal signal Figure 21 Span coordinates Using Spans Guidelines e When creating a DT80 program define any spans
52. data from these sources each has a separate set of log files the general data logging commands apply to all Enabling Logging of Alarm States The actual logging of alarm state is enabled by the general LOGON command or by the LOGONx command for the report schedules to which the alarms belong where x A B K Alarm states are logged by the schedule to which they belong in the same way that data is logged by the schedule to which it belongs See LOGON and LOGOFF Commands r69 Overwrite Mode Normally alarm state is logged until the D780 s data storage memory is filled after which further logging ceases although the alarms continue to be tested and other actions performed However as with the logging of data 270 the logging of alarm states can also be done in overwrite mode in which the newest data progressively overwrites replaces the oldest data after the data memory is filled This is enabled by the OV schedule option Action Text is Included If alarms that are being logged have action text the action text is logged along with the alarm state in the DT80 s general data store And if the action text includes substitution characters the substitute text is included in the logged action text See Alarm Action Text eso Example Logging Alarm State and Action Text The program BEGIN P9 3 Log both transitions RC1S ALARM5 3TK gt 50 Warning v u LOGONC END UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 85 instructs t
53. default threshold point is OV so the input signal must have zero crossings in order to be measured If this is not the case eg for a logic sugnal the 2V channel option can be used to change the threshold point to 2 5V Period Measurement The period of a signal can be measured by taking the reciprocal of a frequency measurement eg RA5S 3 F 2V 1000 F1 Period s FF4 will return the period in seconds of an TTL level logic signal connected between 3 and 3 Given the 1000ms sample period the maximum period that can be returned will be approximately 1 0s The F1 option applies intrinsic function 1 1 x Thermocouples WIRING DIAGRAMS see Voltage Inputs 2157 Thermocouple Theory UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 134 Reference Junction Measurement Junction isothermal block Metal 1 To microvolt Metal 2 meter Reference Junction Prime temperature gradient Temperature Temper ature sensor A thermocouple is two wires of dissimilar metals that are e electrically connected at one end the measurement junction and e thermally connected at the other end the reference junction A small voltage is produced when the two junctions are at different temperatures The voltage is produced by the temperature gradient along the wires not by the junctions Its important that the purity of the thermocouple wire be maintained where significant temperature gradients occur Because high purity wire can be expensive
54. defined BEGIN MYJOB RA1M 1TK Boiler Temp FFO 2LM35 ALARM4 3V gt 2000 Over voltage 1CV W 1CV 1 ALARM7 4TT Oven OK gt 107 Oven Over Temp ND t The following screens will then be available These can be scrolled through using the up and down arrows on the keypad DISO V5 02 The default sign on screen indicates the DT80 s firmware version number and the name MYJOB of the currently loaded job No current job is displayed if there isn t one Date 23 10 2005 Time 16 44 02 Current date and time format can be changed using P31 and P39 Battery 903 Internal battery status This shows the approximate battery charge as a percentage a 290mA 6 2V charge 7 or discharge indicator battery current negative discharging and the battery terminal voltage Boiler Temp 97 C First user channel user defined channel name UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 90 Channel 2LM35 A Second user channel default channel name LT E Alarm4 OFF A ia 1356 3 mV A Oven Over Temp l 117 2 C Alarm 7 state alarm text replaces channel name when alarm is active Note that channel 1CV is not displayed because it is defined as a working W channel Working channels are not logged returned or displayed Bar Graph The channel value can be shown as a bar graph instead of a numeric value by using the BG channel option The BG option allows the values to be set that represent the left and right
55. drive It may be write protected or damaged ELUG Pn s in USER INI cut of range e An out of range parameter has been specified in the PROFILE It must be changed for correct operation _ E107 Counter is already used as a trigger e The specified counter is already used as a schedule trigger and cannot be used again E109 File IO error detailed description e An error occurred while reading or writing to a file o one of the drives A or B The detailed description will contain exact details of the error type For example a write protected file cannot be written to F113 Schedule option error e Invalid schedule option specified E114 Command parameter error e Invalid parameter specified for a command F115 Serial sensor string error e Invalid syntax within serial sensor control string Fll6 Cannot log detailed description e The DT80 cannot log data for one or more schedules for the indicated reason e If the problem was that an existing job of the same name had logged data alarms then you need to give the new job a different name or delete the old job s data using DELDATA DELALARMS E117 Incompatible schedule store units and trigger e You can only specify storefile size by time eg 12 hours data if the schedule trigger is time based E118 Error accessing drive x detailed description e The indicated drive A or B could not be accessed e Media may be absent not formatted or faulty Table
56. energy so that they can provide an output signal For example to read the temperature of a thermistor excitation current is passed through the thermistor to generate a voltage drop that can be measured The DT80 can provide e Voltage source of 4 5V via 1kQ Useful for powering some sensors however the supply is not regulated and consequently liable to drift with temperature e 200A Default current source for resistance measurement Very stable over environmental temperature range e 2 5mA Default source for RTD and bridge measurement Very stable over environmental temperature range e User supplied external excitation Ext terminal s The user can provide an external excitation which is appropriate to the sensor being used See the Excitation category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 23s table Digital Channels Introduction To 3 D D a p 1D 2D 3D 40 anp WE oanp 50 6D 7D 8D akp 1S eojn 48 y ReLay PE ape GND A B The DT80 provides e 4 bidirectional digital I O channels 1D 4D with open drain output driver and pull up resistor e 4 bidirectional digital I O channels 5D 8D with tri stateable output driver and weak pull down resistor these are SDI 12 compatible however SDI 12 operation is not currently supported by the DT80 firmware e 1 voltage free latching relay contact output RELAY e 1 LED output Attn e 4 hardware counter inputs 1C 4C which can be used as independent counter channels or
57. for channel type E7 Day set error e lllegal day number entered E8 Parameter read set error e Parameter index out of range e Parameter value out of range E9 Switch error e lllegal switch command character ElO Command error e Unrecognised keyword E12 Channel list error Channel number outside the legal range Incomplete channel sequence Invalid channel type e Polynomials or spans index out of range El8 STATUS command error e STATUSn outside the range 1 to 14 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 174 E23 Scan schedule error Schedule ID not A K X or S Scan time interval too large e Scan interval type invalid e Event or counter channels invalid B24 Unload command error e Schedule ID is not one of A K or X E25 Channel table full Internal acquisition and alarm table filled maximum 800 entries Additional channels cannot be declared E29 Poly span declaration error Polynomial or span index out of range 1 to 50 Individual terms not separated by a comma Range of terms outside 1 0e 18 to 1 0e18 E30 Analog measurement fault Faulty circuit board circuit board connector or circuit board power supply If fault persists after a hard reset contact your data Taker representative Boe Jo not found e The named job cannot be found E37 No current job e Acommand was entered that operates on the current job but there is no job currently loaded E39 Channel li
58. for minimizing the impact of ground potentials e Use only one system ground point e Ground sensors at one end of the sensor cable only This should nearly always be at the DT80 end e Wire the DT80 analog sub system making full use of its internal isolation see DT80 Analog Sub System 2141 and Figure 49 e141 Isolation The DT80 provides over 100V isolation of the analog sub system from the rest of the DT80 but limits inter channel isolation to 40V This allows for fast multiplexing and comprehensive error detection and correction DT80 Solves Ground Loop Problems There are three general areas of any measurement system that can give rise to ground loops described in greater detail in Grounds Ground Loops and Isolation 41 see Figure 5 223 The analog section isolation built in to the D780 removes the likelihood of ground loop problems between sensors and the data Taker data logger Of course other ground loop combinations are possible sensor to computer for example but the DT80 s isolation blocks most of these as well Other Ground Loop Solutions 23 Many ground loop problems can also be overcome by e using independent inputs instead of shared terminal inputs to remove the effects of sensor to sensor loops and or e connecting all grounds in a measurement system to a single common point although this is not always practical Noise Pickup There are two main ways in which noise can be introduced into sig
59. from menus and dialog boxes In addition to standard text output the capability to display and print real time and logged data in dynamic table chart and mimic meter views load data into a fully featured spreadsheet and replay saved data to any of the dynamic views DeLogger Pro is the big brother of DeLogger It has the added features of modem support a database data storage option the ability to connect to more than one data site at a time enhanced mimic screens additional spreadsheet and graphical analysis tools and e mail and web publishing capabilities DeTransfer is the easiest host software to use with the D780 programming language lts non graphical interface provides complete access to all of the DT80 s capabilities and it has separate send and receive windows which are the basis of its exceptional and unique functionality If your preference is a command line interface then DeTransfer is ideal DeView works in conjunction with DeTransfer It graphs real time data and unloaded data on the computer like traces on a chart recorder DeLoad is a software package which allows the access to your data via a single click of an icon Loggers can also be programmed with a simple drag and drop on an icon UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 11 dataTaker ActiveX this is a software package to allow you simple access to the logger in applications such as Visual Basic Visual C and VBA etc dataTaker Instrument driver for LabVIEW A co
60. from the root directory on the card Protecting Startup Files The DT80 has e an automatic mechanism for protecting its USER INI user startup profile file e anoptional mechanism for protecting its ONRESET DXC startup job file by making backup copies of these in Flash memory The original working files reside in internal memory drive See Figure 42 P117 Protecting startup files 1 backups are created Then whenever a firm reset is carried out the D780 automatically overwrites the working version possibly corrupt in internal memory drive with a copy of the backup version clean uncorrupt from Flash memory and runs the new clean copy in internal memory See Figure 28 P117 IN ONRESET ONRESET re Internal memory drive Flash memory Figure 42 Protecting startup files 2 backups replace working files on firm reset Protecting USER INI This process is completely automatic The first time a PROFILE command is sent to the D780 USER INI the working copy is created in internal memory and a backup copy of it is created in Flash memory Subsequently every PROFILE command sent e updates the working version of USER INI e causes the backup in Flash to be overwritten with a copy of the updated USER INI In this way the DT80 maintains an up to date backup of the latest profile settings Then whenever a firm reset occurs the D780 automatically replaces its working USER INI with a copy of the latest clean back
61. i s a ae gt a LU EAS ee ee i a A O AS ed C a Ardoz j Analog Estoril Channel Eber di Ermon i pmm Fiel cmc Figure 44 DT80 Wiring Panel Digital Channels see 7141 Wake Terminal see LOW POWER OPERATION P131 Digital Ground see DT80 Ground Terminals P141 Phase Encoder see P147 Counter Channels see High Speed Counter Channels P146 Mechanical Relay see Using Digital Outputs P144 Serial Sensor Port see P148 External Excitation see Sensor Excitation P17 Analog Channels see P133 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 124 DT80 Side Panel Ethernet por USB Pot _ RSz32Po0 Hardware Reset Hole External Power Connector Plug Pack Powe Connector Figure 45 DT80 Side Panel Ethernet Port see P104 USB Port see 295 RS232 Port see r96 Hardware Reset Hole see Manual Reset Button 2120 External Power Connector see r130 Plug Pack Power Connector see r129 MEMORY Storage Capacity The DT80 comes equipped with an internal 64Mbyte compact flash card designated drive B and an external customer supplied USB memory device designated drive A The storage format allows around 90 000 readings per megabyte Therefore the internal compact flash card provides 5 million readings Note Time and Date are included as readings in each schedule Whilst the external will be around 90 000 per Mbyte available N
62. i 4 EOT D 36 68 p 100 4 5 ENQ E OL 69 j 101 i 6 ACK F acknowledge 38 70 E OA 7 BEL G bell 39 quote 71 103 9 8 BS H backspace 40 72 i 104 9 HT I tab 41 73 f 105 10 LF J line feed 42 i 74 al 106 J 11 VT K vertical tab 43 bd 75 a 107 12 FF L form feed 44 comma 76 E 108 13 CR M carriage 45 dash 77 n 109 return 14 SO N 46 period 78 a 110 gt 15 SI O 47 slash 79 A 11 2 16 DLE P 48 y 80 si 112 P 17 DC1 Q XON 49 81 Q 113 q 18 DC2 R 50 E 82 si 114 El 19 DC3 S XOFF 51 A 83 115 gt 20 DC4 T 52 84 z 116 21 NAK U negative B3 lt 85 y Iir A acknowledge 22 SYN V 54 e 86 he 118 i 23 ETB W 55 y 87 ba 119 ll 24 CAN X 56 88 120 z 25 EM Y 57 d 89 121 Y 26 SUB Z 58 colon 90 22 8 27 ESC escape 59 gemicolon 91 123 28 FS 60 lt 92 backslash 124 29 GS 61 i 93 125 30 RS 62 j 94 i caret 126 tilde 31 US 63 95 underline 127 DEL delete Table 16 ASCII Characters UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 170 RS 232 STANDARD The following table lists the standard RS 232 pinouts for both 9 pin DB 9 and 25 pin DB 25 DCE and DTE interfaces as used in Figure 73 e171 and Figure 74 e172 Normally the DTE DT80 computer device s connector is male and the DCE modem device s connector is female DCD Data Carrier Detect DTE lt DCE 1 8 RXD Receive Data DTE lt DCE 2 3 TXD Transmit Data DTE DCE 3 2 DTR Data Terminal Ready DTE
63. iaa a s 93 Entering Bootstrap Mode senan dador ad 93 Status INGICALOMLIQMNS cui its 93 SAM MNAC pretest ne eerie TPN ee Dees Ne a a eee ee 93 ETSI MCG Ol 7 5 ries aan anh ae osc A geet eee 93 o E rey O aye ae ee ee 93 Part COMMUNICAION Soma 95 Automatic COMMS POM APDO at aio 95 Password Protection COMMS PolrfS ocooccccccnccccnccccnccnnnoncnccncncnncnnnncnononnnnnnnnnnnnnncnonnnnnnnnnnns 95 USB Communications cnica tina iniciada diiniita 95 installing tne YSB DIVET a ed 96 Using the USB Connection vs daa aa 96 RS 232 COMMUNICA IONS coocconcocccoccnncnnccnnconcnnncnnrnnncnnrnnrnnncnnrnnnrnnrnnnrnnrnnrnnnrnnrnanenanones 97 e O 97 DIO RS 2392 BASICS untada 97 HOS soe AA O 6 1 Re a ro a NNAS 97 Automatic Device DeleciO A cas 97 H st R9292 Fort CONS aia 97 A o react E EAEE A EE A E E A 98 ECNO ae ale a a 99 Input Buffer How the DT80 Receives and Processes a PrograM ooccccccnccccncccncccocnnono 100 COMMS Wakes MeDTS0 ssanie aa a a 100 DT80 Direct Local RS 232 Connection ocoocccccccccconcccnconcocononcncnonncnnnnnncononancononannnnnns 100 Setting Up a Direct omecion ii is 100 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 6 DT80 Modem Remote RS 232 CONNECtION occoocccccccccccnconcocnconconocononononcnnnnnononnnnnnos 100 DT S0 t0 Modem Cable iia a 101 Wiekolsiaa mila irl 742102 q aid 101 Modem Initialization Conditions ooccccocncconcncccnnnonnnconnncnnnnnonnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnn
64. input ranges are 30V factor voltage input P158 Current Current I 100 T current mA Figure 56 C1 wiring for UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 26 Note 1 2 4 20mA current loop L 100 4 Note 2 Resistance Resistance by 2 3 or R I 3W 4 wire methods 10KQ maximum Bridge 3 amp 4 wire quarter half amp BGI 350 II full bridge current 3W See Bridges excitation P138 Ratiometric 4 amp 6 wire BGV V 4W bridges voltage excitation Frequency Frequency measurement F 30 T Note 1 Time Date Time of day T and System writable Timers Day or date D writable System timers 1ST 60 See System Timers 231 2ST 60 3ST 24 4ST 7 writable Delay Delays schedule DELAY execution for nominated writable time System Data System variable SV some are writable Variables Channel variables CV general purpose holders writable for data calculation results Integer variables IV UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual shunt O current shunt Q offset adjust O Note 4 arm resistance Q offset adjust ppm Note 4 sample period ms range scaling factor scaling O Ohm ppm ppm HZ Counts ms independent current input using external shunt P 159 Figure 57 C2 Wiring for Independent current input using internal shunt P159 Figure 58 C3 Wiring for shared terminal current input using external shunt 159 Figure 59 C4 Wiring for independent current using internal shunt and external excitat
65. instructs the DT80 to change its ADC setup P11 and P47 to read channels 1 5TK then change it again to read channels 8V and 10V The schedule command RE1D DO U Job1 A DO DELDATA Job1 instructs the DT80 to every midnight 1D trigger unload data for schedule A of Job1 U Job1 A then delete Job1 s data DELDATA Job1 The program BEGIN RF5S DO h r 1 3TK RG30S DO H R 5PT385 6PT385 END instructs the DT80 to e every five seconds RF5S enter free format mode h and disable the return of real time data r for channels 1 3TK and e every 30 seconds RG30S return real time data R in fixed format H for the two PT385 channels UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 52 Part D Jobs Job Name A job must always have a name If there is no name supplied the D780 assigns the default name UNTITLED To assign a name to a job it needs to be enclosed maximum of 8 characters no spaces not case sensitive between straight quotation marks immediately after no space the BEGIN command If the quotation marks are omitted JobName and simply send BEGIN the D780 assigns the default name UNTITLED to that job A job is created when it is sent BEGIN or BEGIN JobName to the DT80 Remember if you omit JobName the DT80 assigns the default name UNTITLED to the job Program a Holder for Jobs Several jobs can be created one after the other in DeTransfer s send window or DeLogger
66. is keep the DT80 awake never enters sleep mode Extending Battery Life Therefore to extend battery life do not sample channels more frequently than your data gathering requires You can also save power by minimizing comms activity set the reporting switch to r and using high speed counters Low Power Programs Sleep Program This framework may be useful when designing low power programs Reset the DT80 before sending this program BEGIN P15 1 Sleep if not busy P17 5 Go to sleep quickly u n Disable channel ID and units S1 0 100 0 1 000 RH Define spans etc here RS15M Scan slowly for statistical schedules RA1H Especially for reporting schedules 1v Humidity S1 AV Define channels 2PT385 Air temp 4W AV 1CV IF 1CV gt 25 LOGON IF 1CV lt 20 LOGOFF END UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 132 Part L Sensors and Channels This part contains physical details including wiring diagrams of the sensors and channel types supported by the DT80 Analog channels e 4 20mA Current Loops P133 e Frequency P134 e Thermocouples P134 e Thermistors P136 e RTDs P137 e C Temperature Sensors P137 e Bridges P138 e Humidity Sensors P139 e Analog Logic State Inputs P140 Digital Channels e Digital Inputs 142 e Digital Outputs P144 e High Speed Counters P146 e Phase Encoders P147 Serial Channel e SERIAL CHANNEL P148 Wiring configurations analog cha
67. is currently no connection HANGUP is ignored This can be used in an alarm action command to cause the DT80 to hangup a call in progress when an alarm condition arises see Alarm Action Processes rs2 Example Modem Control Commands The use of the DT80 s modem control commands is demonstrated in the following program BEGIN SETDIALOUTNUMBER 12345678 RA10M Read boiler temp 1TK 1CV W IF 1CV gt 120 DIAL END Every 10 minutes the program instructs the D780 to initiate a dial out to phone number 12345678 if the boiler temperature is greater than 120 C Flow Control Flow control is the means by which communicating devices such as the D780 and its host computer control each other s transmission of characters to avoid data loss Flow control causes the receiver to disable transmissions by the sender if the receiver s input buffer is at risk of overflowing and thereby losing data The DT80 supports all methods of flow control e Software flow control SWFC also known as XON XOFF flow control XON XOFF handshaking or software handshaking e Hardware flow control HWFC also known as RTS CTS flow control RTS CTS handshaking or hardware handshaking e No flow control NOFC UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 98 e SWHW both software and hardware flow control The DT80 will often be used set to SWFC which is the default But there may be times when there is a need to change the DT80to HWFC for example when
68. is particularly useful for executing within schedules D780 commands that cannot normally be placed in schedules parameter switch unload alarm job and delete commands for example In other words the DO command allows direct commands to be placed within runtime commands so that the direct commands are executed during runtime Even a RESET command can be placed within a DO command but it is not recommend Warning Use the DO command with great care Although it s a powerful and flexible command it does not prevent unreasonable or unrealistic requests being made of the D780 during runtime and some users have found that it can lead to program execution problems or program failure DO actionText actionText is returned to the host computer whenever the DO command is executed within a report schedule actionText can be 6 Direct commands are commands that perform direct tasks within the DT80 the moment the commands are sent for example switch commands and parameter commands Runtime commands define the runtime tasks for example a schedule commana UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 51 e any printable text e Ato Z control characters G bell M carriage return and J line feed are often useful e the special substitution characters replaced by the current time when the text is returned and replaced by the current date when the textis returned When single quotes are used acound the actionTe
69. is specified then only the last one is used e g 1V AV MX is interpreted as 1V MX If you want to output both the average and the maximum then use two separate option sets iie LV AV MX For example if you specify 1V GL3V then you are really specifying 1V U NA N ESO MD10 FF1 T GL3V In this case the basic default options are U NA N ESO MD10 FF1 The V channel type specifies T as its default option which overrides the U option Then the user specifies GL3V which overrides the default gain lock option setting auto UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 34 Channel Option Table Input Termination Input Attenuators Resistance and Bridge Gain lock Excitation Internal Shunt Reference Offset Extra Samples Measurement Delay Reset T U default A NA default 3W AW none default GL30V GL3V GL300MV GL30MV II N default NSHUNT 2V ESn default O MDn default 10 R Channel factor UM 0085A0 Terminate inputs with 1MQ to AGND terminal Unterminate inputs Enable 10 input attenuators Disable input attenuators 3 wire measurement 4 wire measurement Auto range over 3 gain ranges Lock channel gain for 30V input signal range Lock channel gain for 3V input signal range Lock channel gain for 300mV input signal range Lock channel gain for 30mV input signal range Supply 250uA current excit
70. main internal battery is disconnected the memory backup battery can be re fitted in its holder inside the data logger ready to be automatically reactivated when the main battery is reconnected refer to Getting Maximum Life from the Memory Backup battery 30 If an activated memory backup battery is left in the D780 the memory backup battery has a life of e approximately five years if the main battery is present and powering the D780 e approximately one year if no other power is present Low POWER OPERATION Power POWERING THE D780 7129 discusses the ways to provide power to the data Taker data logger For applications where power consumption is critical the D780 has a sleep mode that reduces battery current drain from approximately 400mA maximum or 150mA typical to just 300A The DT80 automatically wakes from sleep mode when input channels are due to be scanned Plan your D780 program to ensure that the DT80 does not wake more often than is necessary This applies particularly to the statistical sub schedule Statistical Report Schedules r46 and alarms P77 When supplied from its internal main 6V battery the D780 has two power related modes of operation wake mode and sleep low power mode e n wake mode the DT80 is fully active and draws 150mA typical or 400mA maximum from the battery e In sleep mode only the bare essentials remain active and current drain is reduced to approximately 350pA Once asl
71. mode 221 and the alarm command ALARM5 2R gt 50 Warning M J is included in schedule F the alarm poll command 25 instructs the DT80 to return an alarm data record of the form AS ER gt 50 2R 123 45 Ohm where A5 is the alarm ID 2R gt 50 isthe alarm test 2R is the alarm input 123 45 is the current value of the alarm input Ohm is the units text for the alarm input When the DT80 is in fixed format mode r21 and the same alarm command ALARM5 2R gt 50 Warning M J is included in schedule F the alarm poll command 25 instructs the D780 to return an alarm data record of the form D OB0416 2001 04 12 07 20 40 0 08922 2F 5 2R gt 50 123 45 D0069 2614 where D signifies that this is a Data record 080416 is the DT80 5 serial number 2001 04 12 07 20 40 is the date and time of the alarm record 0 08932 2 signifies not used F is the name of the schedule containing the alarm command 5 is the alarm number 2R gt 50 is the alarm test 123 45 is the current value of the alarm input 0069 2614 are communications error checks record character count checksum Logging and Retrieving Alarms The DT80 stores alarm state records for later retrieval and analysis These records comprise the alarm state a timestamp the alarm number and any action text They can be logged into the DT80 s general data store whenever an alarm is tested See Logging Alarm States 285 below and Retrieving Logged Alarm States ss 1 Se
72. mode by the host at the end of a transmission session the D780 carries out an auto XON after 30 seconds see P26 P110 Similarly the D780 can control the transmission of commands and programs sent to it from the host computer To do this the DT80 issues e an XOFF character when its input buffer is 50 full and at 75 full and 90 full e an XON character when its input buffer is empty Hardware Flow Control HWFC In HWFC mode the transmission of characters is managed by the RTS Ready To Send and CTS Clear To Send lines of the RS 232 serial port of the sender and receiver The state of these lines determines if transmission by the sender can proceed The receiver raises the RTS line when it is able to receive characters from the sender and lowers the RTS line when not able to receive characters The RTS line of the receiver is connected by means of the communications cable to the CTS line of the sender and the sender only transmits characters when its CTS line is high The DT80 communications cable product code IBM 6 has the RTS CTS lines connected in this crossover manner see Figure 73 r171 HWFC is inherently more reliable than SWFC and is therefore preferred especially if there is any line or other noise on the communications link SWFC can become confused if the flow control characters are corrupted or lost whereas HWFC has constant levels that enforce the current flow control state at all times making it highly re
73. of change RC reading per time RS or integrate IB 5 A digital manipulation option for measuring the timing of signal transitions may then be applied TRR TRF TER TFF TOR or TOF The RAINFLOW option may then be applied The data value processed up to this point may then be accumulated using one or more statistical options each one in a separate option set Statistical channel options include AV SD MX MN TMX TMN DMX DMN IMX IMN INT NUM and H histogram 8 Finally the resultant value after applying the above options or values if multiple option sets are used may be stored in a channel variable using CV and op CV options Return logging and or display of the data may be disabled using the NR NL ND and W options and output formatting can be specified using FFn FEn and FMn and name units Default Channel Options All channel options have default values The DT80 follows a 3 step procedure to determine what options to apply 1 Start with the basic set of default options specified in the channel option table 2 Ifthe channel type specfies any default options then they are applied overriding any conflicting basic default options Default options for each channel type are listed in the channel type table refer Table 1 DT80 Channel Types P29 3 Finally if an option is explicitly specified in the channel definition then that setting is used overriding any default setting If more than one mutually exclusive option
74. of the Serial Channel by output actions Because of the loopback these strings appear in the receive buffer which can then be parsed by your input actions The strings you should send should contain data formatted in the same way that the real sensor would In this way you are simulating the sensor for the purposes of verifying that your program can correctly interpret what it needs For example if a loopback connection is used the commands 1SERIAL le ABCD 1234 013 4s 1 4d 1CV 1 1CV should store ABCD and 1234 0 into 1 and 1CV respectively This test allows you to differentiate between a failed sensor and program errors Serial Channel Examples 1SERIAL RS232 XyZ Discard the text XyZ and one or more whitespace characters case sensitive 1SERIAL Sd 1CV 8f 2CV cr 3CV Decode integer float and character with separating whitespaces 1SERIAL XC1 2000 d 1CV Wait 2 seconds for CTS to become high then decode integer 1SERIAL 1 3TK10131010 Send 1 3TK followed by a carriage return command 1013 and a line feed command 1010 to a device on the Serial A A A A A A E A A ae ISERIAL f 1CV d 2CV c 3CV Output 1CV as float 2CV as integer and 3CV as character to a printer or display connected to the Serial Channel 1SERIAL R1 W 1CV RO Raise RTS wait 1CV milliseconds then drop RTS 1SERIAL RS485 D2READ 013 2 2 1CV 2 2 2Cv Send a READ command to the sensor at address D2 on multidro
75. on an analog channel Output on a single digital channel Nybble output on a group of digital channels Byte output on a group of digital channels Pulse count on digital input High Speed Up Counter Relay Output Activate Attn LED 2125 Reference temperature of terminal block the DT80 s body temperature Terminal voltage of internal 6V lead acid battery Internal Lithium memory backup battery voltage Internal main battery current Analog 2 5V voltage source reference Analog zero voltage reference Internal 100 Ohm Shunt Internal analog 3 8V rail voltage Internal 3 3V rail voltage Internal system supply rail voltage Internal relay supply voltage Raw voltage onto system from external supply Common mode rejection ratio at maximum gain Table 1 DT80 Channel Types Notes AS DSO writable DNO writable DBO writable C writable HSC writable RELAY writable WARN writable REFT VBAT VLITH IBAT VREF VZERO R100 VANA VDD VSYS 255 2500 15 255 VRELAY VEXT bit mask Note 5 threshold mV delay ms Note 6 bit mask Note 5 bit mask Note 5 range range delay ms Note 6 delay ms Note 6 Byte State State Nybble Byte Counts Counts State State degC mV Ohms mV mV mV mV Result is O to 255 Channel number LSB of byte Max channel number 1 Result is
76. option NOV see Attn Indicator Schedule Options Selective Logging To selectively log channels and schedules e For channels use the NL channel option see Disabling Data Logging for Specific Channels r69 e For schedules use the LOGONx amp LOGOFF x commands see LOGON and LOGOFF Commands r69 Handle With Care Important The D780 does everything possible to avoid data loss caused by careless use However it does respond to resets and DEL commands instantly see Table 14 e166 DEL commands erase information without question DEL commands activate the moment they are sent to the data Taker data logger so please use with care See Deleting Logged Data 70 Retrieving Data The DT80 can do two things with the data it measures e Return it immediately to the host computer where it can be seen arriving on screen This monitoring function is data return in real time UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 19 e Store it in its internal memory and or an inserted USB memory device ready for retrieval unload to the host computer at a later time This is data logging The dataTaker DT80 can carry out these functions separately or at the same time Retrieving Real Time Data The DT80 s default is to return data to a connected host computer instantaneously that is as it is measured To override this send the r switch to the data logger see R 2113 Table 10 p1 3 Store this real time data as a file on
77. outputs to annunciate the DT80 alarm by switching devices such as relays sirens and lights or to directly control actuators and similar equipment In the ALARM command list the single digital state output or the pair of comma separated digital state outputs immediately after the alarm test A digital action can also be a channel variable e g ALARM 1CV 2DSO is valid If the alarm is true then the channel variable 1CV will be set to 1 true if the alarm is FALSE then channel variable 1CV will be set to O false Examples Digital Action The command ALARMn 2V gt 660 0 4DSO tests the voltage on channel 2 2V and e turns digital state output 4 ON when the voltage equals or exceeds 660 0mV e turns digital state output 4 OFF when the voltage drops below 660 0mV The command ALARMn 2V gt 660 0 7DSO 8DSO tests the voltage on channel 2 2V and e turns the two digital state output channels ON when the voltage equals or exceeds 660 0mV e turns the two digital state output channels OFF when the voltage drops below 660 0mV Alarm Action Text Shown as actionText in the alarm command ALARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses e77 optional Action text is automatically returned to the host computer and or logged to alarm memory e once whenever a single shot alarm ALARM or ALARMn tests true or e repeatedly at the controlling schedule s rate while a repeating alarm ALARMR or ALARMR1 remains true If th
78. particular sensor its measurements are always converted scaled to engineering units volts amps ohms C according to the channel type that was specified in the channel ID in the channel list this is why it is necessary to specify a channel s channel type Channel Factor f f Many input channel types support a channel factor a floating point number as a channel option see the Channel Factor column of the Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 29 table The channel factor channel option usually provides linear scaling However for some channel types the channel factor has a dedicated purpose and therefore cannot be used for scaling See 235 Example Channel Factor In the channel list 1V 1V 101 0 the first 1V returns true millivolts and LV 101 0 includes the channel factor 101 0 which returns the reading multiplied by 101 0 in units of millivolts as follows 1V 2 543 mV LY 256 84 mV Here the channel factor could be the attenuation of an input voltage attenuator network Intrinsic Functions Fn The DT80 has seven inbuilt and mutually exclusive intrinsic functions that are applied as channel options see Fn 36 The intrinsic functions available are F1 1 x inverse Inv F2 vx square root ES F3 Ln x natural logarithm Ln F4 Log x base ten logarithm Log FS Absolute x absolute value Abs F6 a square Squ F7 Grey code conversion 32 bit Gc Channels with an intrinsic function applied return
79. polled schedule It is specified by the RX schedule ID and triggered by an X poll command that is by an X character followed by CR sent from the host computer or from an alarm UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 45 Channels calculations and alarms included in a polled schedule are processed reported and or logged once every time the DT80 receives an X poll command Note that underneath the X schedule is really the same as the general purpose schedules It can therefore be used as a 12 general purpose schedule except that e the continuous trigger is not available The syntax RX is treated the same as RXX ie it specifies a polled trigger not a continuous trigger e a single X character can be used to poll the schedule which is treated the same as XX Example Polled Report Schedule The schedule RX 1V 2V runs once every time the DT80 receives an X or XX command Immediate Report Schedules lla ERL Figure 15 Typical immediate schedule Instead of scanning according to time or event triggers immediate schedules run immediately and once only when they are received by the D780 An immediate schedule is simply a list of input channels output channels calculations and or alarms with no schedule header that is no schedule ID and no trigger The D780 executes the list up to the next carriage return immediately and once only Note Any data resulting from an immediate schedule is returned to the ho
80. pre set with a safe IP address to avoid this happening in the unlikely event that you accidentally connect a powered DT80 to the network without firstly configuring it with a valid unused IP address An IP address has the general form n n n n where each n is a one two or three digit number between 0 and 255 169 254 97 8 for example Assigning an IP Address In general a device can be assigned an IP address in two ways e Dynamic IP Address The network automatically assigns an IP address to the device whenever it logs on to the network The address is temporary and may be different each time the device logs on e Static IP Address The user assigns an available IP address to the device The address is stored in the device and reused every time it logs on to the network The DT80 has a Static IP Address that is you must assign an IP address to the data Taker You do this by means of a PROFILE command which stores the address in the DT80 s initialization file USER INI The command has the form PROFILE ETHERNET IP_ADDRESS w x y z For example PROFILE ETHERNET IP_ADDRESS 192 9 200 15 Two Part Construction An IP address consists of two parts e A network number the part of the IP address that is the same for a group of computers and devices on the same network The network number identifies the network e Anode number the part of the IP address that uniquely identifies the node the network device a compute
81. proceeds through three phases a A special loader program is downloaded Attn LED flashes and display shows DT80 Bootstrap b The main firmware is downloaded Sample LED flashes and display shows DT80 Loader c A firm reset is performed display shows the normal sign on screen Important During the upgrade do not remove any cables or reset or power down the DT80 21 Once the upgrade is complete check that the version number displayed on the sign on screen is correct For example if the file DT80 5080002 dxf was loaded then the display should indicate DT80 V5 08 22 Connect to the DT80 and configure it with your preferred settings and programs The upgraded DT80 is now ready for use Note The above procedure can also be used to revert back to an earlier version of the firmware should that be required UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 173 In Case of a Failed Upgrade In the unlikely event that something goes wrong during an upgrade eg power to the DT80 or host computer is lost or the firmware file is corrupted use the following recovery procedure 1 Reset the DT80 by inserting a paper clip or similar into the reset hole Figure 45 DT80 Side Panel 125 23 If the old firmware starts correctly simply repeat the above upgrade procedure 24 If the firmware does not start correctly ie the normal sign on display is not shown and the DT80 does not respond to commands then hold down the Edit OK key and reset
82. rather than risking different values and tested against a number of setpoints Working Channels Hide CV Data When input channels or channel variables are used in intermediate steps of a program then the W channel option see W p37 can declare these as working channels and prevent data being returned or logged See examples Example 1 r66 alarms both as the test value and as the setpoint s For example 20 During program debugging the W option can be overridden by the W switch to return intermediate data Naming Channel Variables To name a channel variable use CVname Units For example UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 64 2CV WindSpeed km h CVname may have a maximum of 16 characters Uni ts may have a maximum of 8 characters Channel Variables Report Send the command NAMEDCVS to instruct the DT80 to return a summary of all named channel variables in use for example CV S CV Name Value Units 5 A Temp 89 1 Deg C 1 A Speed 23 4 m s is the channel variable number n nCV is the schedule identifier is the channel variable s name if any see Naming Channel Variables r64 is the value stored in the channel variable when the NAMEDCVS command was sent is the units defined for the channel variable Calculations Expressions The DT80 has a powerful expression evaluation capability Results can be assigned to channel variables output channels system timers and system variables Expressions can ON
83. rejection and speed ADC settling time See channel settling time r178 Ah Ampere hour a unit of electrical charge often used when referring to battery capacity analog a quantity that can vary continuously through a potentially infinite number of values for example the time swept out by the hands of a clock or the output of a thermocouple Compare with digital append To add a new record or data to the end of a file database string or list ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange A coding system designed for standardising data transmission to achieve hardware and software compatibility It assigns a 7 bit code to each of the 128 standard characters 96 visible characters letters numbers and punctuation marks including the space character 32 hardware control characters sounding a bell advancing a printer page carriage return line feed and so on See Table 16 r169 asynchronous Not synchronised not occurring at pre determined or regular intervals A telephone conversation is asynchronous because both parties can talk whenever they like In an asynchronous communications channel data is transmitted intermittently rather than in a constant stream UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 177 autoranging The process of changing amplifier gain automatically so that the signal is amplified as much as is possible without exceeding output limits autozeroing A stabilization method for removin
84. s text window and send them to the D780 all at once with one action This group of jobs is called a DT80 program When the program is sent all the jobs are stored in the D780 for future recall and the last one sent becomes the DT80 s active job If the jobs are sent one by one each new job replaces the previous one as the active job so that there is only ever one active job in the DT80 The DT80 s current active job can be changed by sending the RUNJOB JobName command see Table 4 DT80 Job Commands P55 Comments can follow the DeTransfer backslash command apostrophe character up toa carriage return Job Name Pre Job Commands Not af Switches P112 determine the system function kept in the DT80 with the job Uppercase is ON and lowercase is OFF BEGIN This command Parameters P109 are internal system settings that creates a DT80 Job when determine system function Most can be set and all processed by the DT80 This can be read job s components name Scaling and Calculations Various methods are directory structure available to scale data to engineering units channel commands and other factors functions spans polynomials and statements data and calculations alarms are all stored on in Schedules P133 Eleven general purpose the DT80 schedules are available RA RB RC RD RE RF RG RH RI RJ and RK with an optional statistical sub schedule Each has a list of channels to be scanned at programmable time intervals or on
85. schedule x starting from time or date time and ending with time or date time Returns data for JobName in the order of report schedule A to K Returns data for JobName starting from time or time date Returns data for JobName starting from time or date time and ending with time or date time Returns data for JobName report schedule x Returns data for JobName report schedule x starting from time or date time Returns data for JobName report schedule x starting from time or date time and ending with time or date time Returns the current job s alarms in the order of report schedule A to K Returns the current job s alarms for report schedule x Returns alarms for JobName in the order of report schedule A to K Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x Returns the current job s alarms in the order of report schedule A to K Returns the current job s alarms starting from BEGIN time or time date Returns the current job s alarms starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Returns the current job s alarms for report schedule x Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Returns alarms for JobName in the order of report schedule A to K Returns alarms for JobName starting from BEGIN time or time date Retur
86. side of the graph scale The channel label can be used to set the graph scale labels For example AV E Fuel Level F BG 10 900 displays zero scale no bars if measured voltage lt 10mV displays full scale if voltage gt 900mV Controlling what is shown on the display All defined channels and alarms will be shown on the display except for e channels which specify the ND no display channel option e working channels W channel option e un numbered ALARM of IF channels e channels used as the condition in an ALARM of IF Enable Disable status screens Status screens can be enabled or disabled for display by P19 Each bit in this parameter value represents a status screen A 1 enables and 0 disables The bit mapping is 0 1 Sign on 1 2 Date Time 2 4 Battery Status 3 8 Reserved 4 16 Reserved 5 32 Reserved 6 64 Reserved T 128 Reserved To make screens available set P19 to the sum of the decimal values following the required screens e g for Battery Condition and Current Job screens only set P19 5 i e 1 4 By default P19 255 and all screens are available If P19 0 and there are no channels or alarms to display then the sign on screen is displayed Transient Messages The display may also show temporary status screens such as Reading USB When a USB device is inserted the DT80 needs to read certain system information from it device before it can be used USB device This indicates that the DT80 doe
87. specific subdirectories containing ONINSERT DXC files exist on the card and an ONINSERT DXC file exists at the root level or e automatically program particular DT80s with their own specific job if serial number specific subdirectories containing ONINSERT DXC files exist on the card or e carry out a combination of these two options DT80s that do not find a subdirectory named with their serial number automatically load and run the ONINSERT DXC file at the root level and D780s that find their specific subdirectory automatically load and run the ONINSERT DXC file found there An ONINSERT DXC file for use with a specific DT80 can be created by sending RUNJOBONINSERT JobName while the card is inserted in that D780 This copies JobName into the specific D780 serial number directory on the card named for example SNO80271 creates directory if it does not exist and calls it ONINSERT DXC To create a generic ONINSERT DXC file for use with any D780 by sending RUNJOBONINSERTALL JobName while the card is inserted in the DT80 This copies JobNane into the card s root directory and calls it ONINSERT DXC Then when the card is inserted into a D780 if no DT80 specific directory exists the generic ONINSERT DXC file is run Deleting ONINSERT DXC The following delete commands are available for deleting ONINSERT DXC DELONINSERT Deletes ONINSERT DXC from the D7T80 s serial number directory on the card DELONINSERTALL Deletes ONINSERT DXC
88. the ASTM E 1049 85 standard Standard Practices for Cycle Counting in Fatigue Analysis Real time rainflow analysis can be carried out using the DT80 s RAINF LOW channel option which instructs the DT80 to monitor attached strain gauges at regular intervals and reduce the resulting large quantity of data into simple cycle histograms The DT80 can also produce a formatted report of the accumulated cycle histograms see Reporting Rainflow Data The Rainflow Report 59 Although the rainflow cycle counting has been optimized for welded steel structures it can be used to record arbitrary waveforms from other sources temperature cycles in a furnace or electrical signals for example Collecting Rainflow Data The Rainflow Channel Option Rainflow analysis is defined by the RAINF LOW channel option Although this is generally used for channels measuring strain gauge inputs you can also use it for any type of sensor that is monitoring a process that produces cycles of peaks and valleys with hysteresis The overall range of cycle sizes is divided into a number of smaller cycle size classes and as the analysis proceeds the number of cycles of each size class is counted These counts are accumulated into the D 80 s 32 bit signed Integer Variables channel type nIV The RAINFLOW channel option requires a maximum cycle size to be specified a noise rejection level and a range of sequential integer variables or channel variables th
89. the D780 automatically runs this file every time it is restarted by a firm reset Alternatively copy an ONRESET DXC file directly to the D780 s root directory from a USB memory device by FTP transfer or over Ethernet The working copy of ONRESET DXC can be deleted from the DT80 s internal memory which stops this startup job function by sending DELONRESET To backup the ONRESET DXC file see Protecting Startup Files 2 17 Note if the working copy is deleted the automatic replacement on reset function described in Protecting Startup Files 7 ceases The contents of an ONRESET DXC file cannot be altered A new file must be created directly in the DT80 using the RUNJOBONRESET JobName command again ONINSERT DXC When a USB memory device is inserted into a DT80 the D780 first looks for a subdirectory on the card named with its own serial number If it finds such a subdirectory it automatically loads and runs any ONINSERT DXC file it finds in the subdirectory If there is no subdirectory named with the D780 s serial number the D780 automatically loads and runs any ONINSERT DXC file it finds in the root directory of the card This auto programming function means that a single USB memory device can be inserted into a number of DT80s one ata 12 A singlepush reset see DT80 Resets UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 116 time and e automatically program all the D780s with the same job if no serial number
90. the DT80 e119 to load the PROFILE command From then on the D780 automatically power down resets the modem if it detects it to be unresponsive see Modem Initialization 2101 Modem Communications Operation Dialling In As the modem is initialised to automatically answer incoming calls the D780 does not have to monitor the RI signal at its Host RS 232 port or request the modem to answer the call But the D780 does have to monitor the CD signal to determine when a call has been established The DT80 does not receive commands or transmit data and status information unless it determines that a call has been established between itself and a host When a modem is attached DSR active the D780 monitors the CD signal to determine when it can transmit data and status information and receive commands e When CD is active the D 80 accepts commands and returns data and status information e When CD is inactive the D780 ignores any received characters and does not transmit data or status information This behaviour ensures that any rubbish characters received outside of a call are ignored and that the D780 does not send characters to the modem that the modem may interpret as commands to switch into a different operating state Dialling Out The SETDIALOUTNUMBER command is used to set the number to dial and the DIAL and HANGUP commands are used to initiate and terminate calls by the DT80 s modem to the host computer s modem These a
91. the local modem into Windows using the Modems control panel Then access the modem settings from within DeTransfer s or DeLogger Pro s connection properties See Figure 30299 and the appropriate data Taker software manual for instructions on making this connection Using the Modem Connection Once initialization is complete dial into the remote DT80 modem site from the host computer and the local modem to program the D780 recover data change program variables and so on Note The DT80 can be programmed and configured during the same connection session Visits to Site If the site is visited where the DT80 and the modem are installed the D780 can be communicated with directly from a PC Notebook by unplugging the cable from the modem to the D780 at the DT80 end and then plugging in a direct cable as supplied with the D780 from your PC Notebook to the DT80 Differences in the cable wiring allow the D780 to determine the type of connection and to respond appropriately DT80 Ethernet Communications By means of the RJ 45 Ethernet port on the DT80 s side you can communicate with the DT80 to send commands to it and retrieve data from it over a 10BaseT Ethernet network Ethernet Protocol TCP IP is the DT80 s default Ethernet protocol See TCP IP r186 Configuring a DT80 for Ethernet To use a DT80 on a TCP IP network you must configure the DT80 with three numbers e anlP address number e anIP subnet mask number e anlP gateway num
92. to deal with alarm situations Once the alarm is under control the first job could then be recalled by an appropriate alarm Job Commands The DT80 supports these job related commands UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 53 BEGIN JobName y END BEGIN y END DIRJOBS DIRJOB JobName DIRJOB DIRJOB SHOWPROG SHOWPROG JobName SHOWPROG LOCKJOB LOCKJOB JobName LOCKJOB UNLOCKJOB UNLOCKJOB JobName UNLOCKJOB DELJOB DELJOB JobName DELJOB DELDATA DELDATA JobName DELDATA DELALARMS DELALARMS JobName DELALARMS U U from to Ul trom to Ux Ux from to Ux from to U JobName U JobName from to U JobName from to U JobName x U JobName x from to U JobName x from to A A from to A from to Ax Ax from to Ax from to A JobName UA JobName from to A JobName from to A JobName x A JobName x from to A JobName x from to CURJOB UM 0085A0 When sent to the D780 creates a job called JobName When sent to the D780 creates a job called UNTITLED Returns a report of all jobs stored in See Table 4 DT80 the DT80 indicates locked job Job Commands P55 indicates current job Returns a report comprising various JobName details by schedule Returns a report of the current job and its details by schedule Returns a report of all jobs and their details by schedule Returns the current j
93. to wait for more characters to be read eventually returning a timeout For example if the control string is LSERIAL d 1CV abc Scan Error 1CV unchanged abc left in receive buffer phony Receive Timeout 1CV unchanged nothing left in receive buffer di N 1CV 123 nothing left in receive buffer esaba 1CV 123 abc left in receive buffer Control String Example The control string in the Serial Channel command 1SERIAL e WN 013 d 1CV S 2CV C 013 w 2000 specifies the following output and input actions for supervising electronic weighing scales connected to the serial channel of a DT80 the scales have a Weigh Now command WN which instructs the scales to perform a weighing operation e An input action e erases any extraneous characters that may have been sent by the scales at some earlier time WN 013 An output action Sends the Weigh Now command WN to the scales The WN command is terminated by a carriage return 013 See your serial device s manual for details of its command set sd 1CV s 2Cv An input action These scales return two comma separated values a batch number as an integer and the weight as a floating point value followed by a Carriage return e d 1CV will interpret the first returned value as an integer batch number and assign this to 1CV e Skip the comma in the returned data string e 2CV will interpret the second returned value as a floating point
94. voltage inputs Shared Terminal Voltage Inputs Single Quote Single shot alarms Sleep Sn Span coordinates Spans Sn SRAM S Record ST Stand Alone Startup Defaults Startup Files Startup Job Statistical Statistical Report Schedules Statistical Schedule Statistical Sub Schedule Halt Go Statistics STATUS Commands STATUS14 STATUS2 Storage Capacity Storage Status Strain Gauges Substitution UM 0085A0 148 16 158 185 159 158 158 80 99 77 100 110 131 135 132 36 62 62 36 87 2 186 186 2 186 PER 113 116 117 5 38 113 116 119 47 56 46 56 237 70 122 49 123 122 70 125 70 73 139 80 Characters Switches Synchronizing to Midnight System Timers System Variables TCP IP Terminal Labels Test TEST TEST Commands Test Report DT80 Health Text The Control String The U Unload Commands The U Unload Commands The U Unload Commands Thermistor Scaling Tn Thermistors Thermocouples Time Time Triggers Time Triggers Synchronizing to Midnight Trigger on External Event Trigger on Internal Event Trigger on Schedule Specific Poll Command Trigger on Time Interval DT80 User s Manual 2 48 53 80 112 113 114 118 119 122 186 186 48 113 27 31 E 321038 103 104 184 186 is 2 121 121 130 108 121 30 149 150 74 36 63 136 28 63 1
95. weight in kilograms and assign this to 2CV C 013 An output action These scales also have a Clear command C which instructs the scales to clear ready for the next weighing operation This output action sends the Clear command to the scales The Clear command is terminated by a carriage return 1013 w 2000 An input action These scales do not respond to commands for 2s after a Clear operation The w 2000 action ensures that at least this time elapses following a Clear DeTransfer Use a Double Backslash Important The DeTransfer program which is often used to supervise the DT80 has a number of special commands that begin with a backslash character see the DeTransfer Help The backslash character indicates to DeTransfer that the following command is to be interpreted and executed by DeTransfer For example UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 154 e w3 instructs DeTransfer to wait 3 seconds before communicating again with the data Taker e t instructs DeTransfer to read the computer clock and format a current time string e 013 instructs DeTransfer to send the single character carriage return to the connected dataTaker The backslash character and some number of characters following it will therefore not be sent to the DT80 if they are typed into DeTransfer This is an issue for the serial channel because a number of the Serial Channel input and output actions also begin with a backslash character In order to se
96. will be beneficial The internal memory of the DT80 and the memory in USB memory devices is completely managed by the file system The internal memory is configured as drive B and the USB memory device is configured as drive A To see the directory structure of the DT80 s internal memory by executing a DIRTREE B command from either DeLogger s text window or DeTransfer running on a connected computer Similarly see the directory structure of an inserted USB memory device by executing a DIRTREE A command Directory Structure of Internal Memory Volume in drive B has no label UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 71 2005 07 06 21 47 69632 lt RO gt FAILSAFE 2005 07 06 21 47 lt DIR gt EVENTS 2005 07 06 11 05 1309 EVENT LOG 2005 07 06 02 50 1407 ERROR LOG 2005 07 06 21 52 lt DIR gt INI 2005 07 06 11 05 169 USER INI 2005 07 06 21 53 lt DIR gt JOBS 2005 07 06 21 53 lt DIR gt SATURATE 2005 07 06 21 53 74 PROGRAM DXC 2005 07 06 21 53 3160 STATUSI4 10 File s 1970176 Bytes free Figure 23 Typical structure DT80 internal data memory send DIRTREE B When the logger is in formatted mode H see the dirtree returns the following format L lt serial gt yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 0 subsec 0 lt is_dir gt lt rd_only gt lt size gt lt date gt lt time gt lt name gt lt cc gt lt cs gt AND L lt serial gt yyyy mm dd hh mm ss 0 subsec 1 lt n_lines gt lt bytes_free gt lt v
97. 0 lt threshold or 1 gt threshold nDSO 0 output low nDSO 1 output high Channel number LSB of byte Max channel number 5 Channel number LSB of byte Max channel number 1 Max count rate 30Hz Not active during sleep Counter resets after range counts if set Max count rate 100kHz Active during sleep Counter resets after range counts if set 1RELAY 0 open 1RELAY 1 closed Relay is latching type so it only draws current when changing state 1WARN 0 LED off 1WARN 1 LED on Attn LED may also be used by the DT80 to indicate various warning conditions Used for thermocouple reference junction compensation Battery flat if below 5 6V Replace battery if below 2 8V Positive if charging negative if discharging 1 Input termination is on by default T for independent differential inputs only For shared inputs the terminal is UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 29 connected to AGND via an internal 100 ohm resistor so the 1M Ohm termination used for differential measurements is not required 2 Ifthe current shunt value is specified as the channel factor then that value is used Otherwise if the measurement uses the DT80 s internal shunt on the terminal eg 3 1 then the DT80 uses the actual calibrated resistance of its shunt Otherwise the external shunt is assumed to be 100 0 ohms 3 Alternatively parameter P36 can be set to force all temperatures to be returned in degF degR o
98. 0 DT80 User s Manual Page 58 c 0 Contains the count of cycles for the first cycle size class 21IV c 1 Contains the count of cycles for the second cycle size class 22IV c 2 Contains the count of cycles for the third cycle size class 23IV y y y d 7 Contains the count of cycles for the last cycle size class 33IV d 6 Contains the count of cycles that over ranged the maximum 34IV cycle size d 5 Contains the count of all cycles 35IV d 4 Contains the maximum buffered cycles 0 100 or 99999 if the buffer 361V has overflowed and buffered half cycles have been lost d 3 Contains the minimum valley encountered 37IV z d 2 Contains the maximum peak encountered 38IV d 1 Contains the total number of good points 39IV E d 0 Contains the total number of in error points out of range for example 40IV Y In practice some cycles do not close immediately and are buffered until a closure is detected Variable d 4 contains a count of these unclosed or half cycles Note The rainflow channel option can be used on a maximum of 16 channels Collecting Rainflow Data The Rainflow Sample Rate Rainflow cycle data is collected at a rate dependent on the frequency of influences deforming the structure under test These might be quite slow events Such as waves crashing against a sea wall or quite fast such as a high speed boat hull travelling through waves Place the channel being sampled for rainflow in a schedule that s triggered fast e
99. 0 dataTaker DT500 series DT600 series and the DT50 2000 dataTaker DT800 2005 dataTaker DT80 DCE Data Communications Equipment A DCE device a modem for example enables a DTE device such as a computer or a DT80 to communicate over phone lines or data circuits A DCE device connects to the RS 232 interface of a DTE device See DTE 181 default An attribute value or option that is assumed if none is explicitly specified A state or group of operating conditions determined by the manufacturer and factory set to which the DT80 automatically reverts after a reset differential input An analog input where the difference between two voltages is measured without reference to ground or any other common point For example the 1V command measures the differential voltage between the 1 and 1 terminals differential voltage The difference between the voltages on the two inputs of the DT80 s instrumentation amplifier the dataTakers precision differential analog input amplifier See common mode voltage r179 digital a quantity that is represented by a number that has a finite number of possible values The number of bits used to store a digital value determines the resolution ie how close two values can be and still be resolved distinguished Some quantities are inherently digital eg a logic signal or switch whose state can be represented by 1 bit UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 180 direct commands Commands that
100. 0 s U commands Ux Returns the current job s logged data for report schedule x Ux from Returns the current job s logged data for report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date Ux from to Returns the current job s logged data for report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date ding wit E U JobName x Returns JobName s logged data for report schedule x U JobName x from Returns JobName s logged data for report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date U JobName x from to Returns JobName s logged data for report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date where UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 74 from can be Both the time and date must be BEGIN start from first data point specified in the currently defined logged format for date P31 and time P39 time start from first data point logged at or after this time today time date start from first data point logged at or after this time and date LO can be END finish with last data point logged time end with last data point logged prior to this time today time date end with last data point logged prior to this time and date Note BEGIN and END used here are not the same as the BEGIN and END keywords used to indicate the start and end of a DT80 job Examples U Commands The command instr
101. 12 DT80 Resets 7119 In addition the DT80 automatically stores a backup copy of USER INI in the D780 s Flash memory see Protecting Startup Files 2117 When Do User Defaults Take Effect After a PROFILE command is sent to the D780 to set values in the USER INI file the D780 s behaviour does not change until the next time the sub system using that value is re started For example UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 113 e If the USER INI file contains special switch and parameter settings these are applied and re applied every time a firm reset is carried out They are not applied until the next reset after the PROFILE command is sent that specifies them e Ethernet Settings Firstly define a D 80 s Ethernet settings using PROFILE commands Then for the Ethernet settings to take effect a firm reset must be carried out see Resetting the DT80 119 Persistent Settings Settings specified using USER INI can be considered persistent because they are reapplied at every restart Individual commands can be sent to the D780 a parameter command such as P32 2 or a baud rate command such as PH 1200 for example that immediately overrides one or more of the DT80 s current permanent settings but these are only temporary in that they will be automatically replaced by the persistent PROFILE settings the next time the related sub system is restarted See the Default Value Any parameter can be PARAMET
102. 15M 1V Wind speed S1 1CV ALARM1 1CV gt 5 0 RA2M ALARM2 1CV lt 4 5 RA15M measures wind speed e every 2 minutes if wind speed is greater than 5m s or e every 15 minutes if wndspeed is less that 5m s as follows 1V Wind speed S1 1CV is the instruction to record the wind speed and assign it to channel variable 1 for testing UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 82 ALARM 1CV gt 5 0 RA2M changes the schedule s trigger to every 2 minutes RA2M if windspeed exceeds 5 0m s 1CV gt 5 0 ALARM2 1CV lt 4 5 RA15M changes the schedule s trigger back to every 15 minutes RA15M if windspeed drops below 4 5m s 1CV lt 4 5 Note the deliberate 0 5m s hysteresis to prevent oscillation around the switchover point The program RC30M LOGONC HC 5TK Oven Temp RD1M ALARM 5TK gt 120 GA ALARM 5TK lt 120 HA continuously monitors the temperature of an oven and logs the temperature whenever it exceeds 120 C RC30M LOGONC HC is a report schedule that logs LOGONC oven STK Oven Temp temperature 5TK when active initially halted by HC RD1M initiates the alarm tests every minute 1M ALARM STK gt 120 GC sets schedule C to Going GC if oven temperature exceeds 120 C 5TK gt 120 ALARM 5TK lt 120 HC sets schedule C to Halted HC if oven temperature drops below 120 C 5TK lt 120 Example Alarm Action Processes Using an Alarm to Poll a Schedule The program BEGIN 1CV W
103. 18 DT80 Error Messages UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 176 Glossary 4 20mA loop A common industrial measurement standard A transmitter controls a current in the range of 4 to 20mA as a function of a measurement parameter Any receiver s or indicator s placed in series can output a reading of the parameter Main advantage is 2 wire connection and high immunity to noise pick up Usually powered from a 24V supply 50 60Hz rejection The most common source of noise is that induced by AC power cables This noise is periodic at the line frequency DT80s are able to reject most of this noise by integrating the input for exactly one line cycle period 20 0 or 16 7ms O ohm a unit of resistance HA microamp 10 A HS microsecond 10 s uStrain microstrain strain expressed in parts per million ppm Strain is a measure of the stress induced change in length of a body uV microvolt 10 V A Ampere or amp a unit of current actuator A device that converts a voltage or current input into a mechanical output ADC Analog to Digital Converter Part of the DT80 s input circuitry that converts an analog input voltage to a digital number in other words it converts a smoothly varying signal to a quantised digital value The DT80 is a digital instrument and therefore requires an ADC to convert analog sensor signals into digital form prior to processing Important characteristics of an ADC are its linearity resolution noise
104. 191964 80 00 202068 40 00 2121 25 00 00 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 59 Total cycles58 Peak Valley mean12 6 Max Peak71 Min Valley 1 Max buffered cycles11l Valid input points 3100 00 The rainflow report provides a complete summary of the rainflow data for the collection period The cycle size range for each class the number of cycles in each class and the mean for each class is shown as well as the summary data Although the rainflow report cannot be logged in the DT80 the primary cycle count data used to make up the rainflow report can For example the program BEGIN Rainflow RA50T 2BGI RAINFLOW 72 5 1 28IV W RB7D 1 28IV LOGONB END logs the histogram data every 7 days Reports can be created manually after download of the primary cycle count data Example 1 Rainflow Cycle Counting Capture raw strain gauge data and perform rainflow cycle analysis using the program BEGIN RA5OT 1BGI RAINFLOW 1000 5 101 127IV W END This instructs the DT80 to e collect current excited bridge data 1BGI every 50ms RA50T and carry out rainflow analysis over the range of zero to 1000 ppm e apply a 5 rejection that is cycles smaller than 50ppm are rejected e accumulate cycles into histogram variables 101 through 127 101 127 this gives 20 cycle size classes for cycle counts and 7 others for summary information The matching rainflow report command RAINFLOW 1000 5 101 127IV returns rainflow histogram data
105. 2 s s decimal seconds since base 3 m m decimal minutes since base 4 h h decimal hours since base 5 D D decimal days since base See TOR and TOF in the Digital Manipulation 236 category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options r38 table Time interval format Mode 0 Oto 5 P50 Mode 0 P39P22P31 time delimiter days 1 P31P22P39 days delimiter time 2 s s decimal seconds 3 m m decimal minutes 4 h h decimal hours since base 5 D D decimal days since base See TRR TRF TFR and TFF in the Digital Manipulation r36 category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 3e table Serial sensor timeout Seconds 10 O to 60 Send P53 0 for no timeout Enable schedule wakeup Bits 16383 0 to Bitmap entered as decimal value 16383 SKJIHGFEDCBAX S bit 13 X bit1 0 Serial Channel debugging see Serial Channel Debugging Tools r156 Number of frame capture Count 5 1to100 Attempts left to capture complete cycles frame set must be set before a schedule is defined DT80 User s Manual Page 111 Excitation tolerance 10 Oto 100 Sets tolerance of excitation adjustment relative to specified value Send P58 100 for don t adjust excitation Maximum gain for automatic Mode 10 O to 10 P50 Mode gain ranging 0 20V Note maximum analog input voltage must not exceed 13V 1 10V 2 5V 3 2V 4 1V 5 500mV 6 200mV 7 100mV 8 50mV 9 20mV 10 10mV See P17 Maximum sampling kHz 50 1to 100 ADC speed must be set bef
106. 33 136 160 28 133 104 485 136 158 186 30 37 79 111 48 113 42 Trigger While Triggering and Schedule Order Triggers U Commands Uload Unconditional Processing DO Command Unload Commands Upgrading DT80 Firmware USB USB Communications USB Memory Device USB memory device USB Memory Device USB memory device Commands User Name User Units USER INI Using an Alarm to Poll a Schedule Using Digital Outputs Variables VCM Vdiff Version number components Visits to Site Voltage Voltage Excitation BGV Voltage Inputs While condition Working Channels Hide CV Data Working with Schedules Yn YS01 to YSO730 19 41 44 47 49 45 47 177 187 187 20 20 69 WLA EE 125 igo 44 27 37 63 180 180 187 104 26 139 161 161 133 134 157 45 51 64 Page 190
107. 53 timeout State Figure 55 2157 Channel from serial device via ie parameter sec See SERIAL CHANNEL RS 232 RS422 amp RS485 P53 specifies 148 for prompt and scan default timeout definition Use W or NR channel options to prevent state output Serial Enable disable serial SSPORT State Power supply for Channel sensor port writable transceiver Enable O disabled 1 enabled Automatically enabled if any serial sensor channels or schedule triggers defined Temperature Thermocouples Type B TB TC T scaling degC Figure 54 V1 Wiring for C D E G J K N R S TD TE Note 1 factor Note3 shared terminal voltage and T TG TJ input r158 amp Figure 55 V2 See Thermocouples TK TN Wiring for independent P134 TR TS voltage input P158 TT Platinum RTDs PT385 100 3W OG degC Figure 60 R1 Wiring for a 0 00385 0 00392 PT392 II resistance Note3 4 wire resistance input See RTDs 7137 Q r160 Figure 61 R2 Wiring Nickel RTD NI 1000 3W O C degC for 3 wire resistance input a 0 005001 I resistance Note3 2160 Figure 62 R3 Wiring See RTDs 137 Q for 2 wire resistance input Copper RTD CU 100 3W 0 C degC a 0 0039 II resistance Note 3 See RTDs 2137 O Thermistors Yellow Ys01 3W 1 parallel degC Springs 400XX series YSO2 resistor Q Note 3 See Thermistors 136 YS03 YS04 YSO5 YS06 YSO7 YS16 YS17 Semiconductor current AD590 100 V U current degC Figure 67 A1 Wiring for source type
108. 66 Data U Alarms A Alarms A UM 0085A0 U JobName U JobName from U JobName from to U JobName x U JobName x from U JobName x from to U U from U from to Ux Ux from Ux from to U JobName U JobName rom U JobName from to U JobName x U JobName x from U JobName x from to A Ax A JobName A JobName x A A rom A rom to Ax Ax from Ax from to A JobName A JobName from A JobName from to A JobName x END time or time date Returns data for JobName in the order of report schedule A to K Returns data for JobName starting from BEGIN time or time date Returns data for JobName starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Returns data for JobName report schedule x Returns data for JobName report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date Returns data for JobName report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Returns the current job s data in the order of report schedule A to K Returns the current job s data starting from time or date time Returns the current job s data starting from time or date time and ending with time or date time Returns the current job s data for report schedule x Returns the current job s data for schedule x starting from time or date time Returns the current job s data for
109. 85 5 Transmit Data Transmit Data A Data A va Receive Data Receive Data B lV pi Handshake output Transmit Data B Data B a Handshake input Receive Data A lv D Signal Ground Ground Ground GND Figure 52 The DT80 s Serial Channel terminals DTE Note that e The RTS and CTS handshake control signals are available for RS232 only e The DGND terminal is the signal return common for RS232 RS422 485 use differential signalling the ground is only used for connection to the cable shield e Activity on either of the indicated terminals ie Rx A and CTS B will wake the logger from sleep mode although the data in the particular message that woke the logger will be lost Note also that if the Wake feature is required and RS485 is being used then it will be necessary to link the Data terminals Tx Z and RTS Y to the wake enabled terminals Rx A and CTS B Setting Serial Channel Parameters The Serial Channel communications parameters are set by the command PS baud parity databits stopbits where baud is the baud rate at which you want the Serial Channel to operate Use 50 75 1200 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 parity can be N none O odd or E even N databits can be 7 or 8 8 stopbits can be 1 or 2 1 For example the command PS 9600 N 8 1 sets the Serial Channel comms quantifiers to 9600 baud no parity 8 data bits These communications settings are stored
110. 9688 mA PASS vos ditt 1 9 uv PASS Vos 3W 123 8 uy PASS Vos shunt 0 2 uv PASS vos D UV PASS Vos 140 UY PASS Vos 25 4 ay PASS Vos 65 0 wy PASS Term factor 1 00486 PASS Shunt 100R LOO LLA Ohm PASS CMRR 1067 daB PASS DT80 health PASS Table 13 DT80 TEST Report Event Log Background record keeping of critical events To aid in troubleshooting the DT80 automatically logs significant events power failures temperature extremes resets program failures into an event log which is a file named EVENT LOG in the EVENTS directory of the DT80 file system The event log may help pinpoint the cause of any unexpected readings or failures and will be used by dataTaker engineers if the DT80 is returned for service The size of the event log file is limited to 500 entries When EVENT LOG is full the D780 makes a copy of it overwriting any existing backup names the copy EVENT BAK and creates a new log file In this way the DT80 retains e the most recent 500 events in EVENT LOG and e the previous 500 events in EVENT BAK Results of the TEST command can automatically be logged to the event log see P10 r109 Unloading the Event Log Send UEVTLOG to unload the event log to the host computer This command instructs the D780 to return the entire contents of the event log For example UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 121 EVENT 2001 03 29 14 32 26 042234 Event log created EVENT 001 03 29 14d132133 50
111. A2S 4L instructs the DT80 to measure every 2 seconds 2S the current in the 4 20mA loop sensed by analog channel 4 across a 1000 shunt resistor the default The schedule RA2S 41 50 0 instructs the DT80 to measure every 2 seconds 2S the current in the 4 20mA loop sensed by analog channel 4 across a 500 shunt resistor Frequency WIRING DIAGRAMS see Voltage Inputs e157 The frequency of an analog input signal can be measured using the F channel type which returns a value in Hz Useful channel options for F channels are Channel Option Description SS channel factor sample period gate time in ms default is 30ms 2V offset input signal by 2 5V This effectively changes the threshold point from OV to approx 2 5V which is useful for TTL level inputs The range of frequencies that can be measured depends on the configured sample period channel factor For the default setting of 30ms this range is approximately 25Hz 20kHz If the input frequency is too low to be measured the underrange error value 99999 9 will be returned To measure lower frequencies the sample period should be increased For example 3F 1000 will measure down to 1Hz upper limit is still 20kHz while 3F 10000 will allow frequencies down to 0 1Hz to be resolved The drawback to selecting a long sample period is that the measurement will take a long time to complete This may delay the execution of other schedules Note that the
112. ALOUTNUMBER command Automatically issued by the DT80 to initialise a connected modem see Modem Initialization Settings P101 To disable automatic initialization set to empty string 11 A singlepush reset see DT80 Resets UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 114 EXT POWER SWITCH 0 1 n 0 PROFILE HOST MODEM EXT POWER_SWITC H 1 instructs the DT80 to use its relay terminals to supply and control power for the modem see Figure 34 102 PROFILE HOST_ MODEM EXT POWER _SWITC H n instructs the DT80 to use its digital output channel n n 1 to 8 to control an external power supply to the modem see Figure 34 102 PROFILE HOST MODEM EXT POWER_SWITC H 0 disables this function MAX CD IDLE number 43200 seconds 12 number must be gt 0 hours The number of seconds to wait while CD is inactive before re initialising the modem Set to 0 to disable this function SEND_BANNER_CONNECT YES NO YES When set to YES a string such as dataTaker 800 Version 4 01 s sent whenever CD changes from inactive to active COMMAND PROCESSING TIM 1 to 32767 1 second The number of seconds E the DT80 waits after sending a command to the modem to give the modem time to respond IP ADDRESS nnn nnn nnn nnn 0 0 0 0 SUBNET_MASK nnn nnn nnon nnn 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY nnn nnn nnn nnn 0 0 0 0 FTP_SERVER SUPPORTED YES NO YES Starts the DT80 s FTP server functionality using NO fr
113. ARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses and of the repeating alarm command is ALARMRn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses where n is the alarm number n is optional See Alarm Number 272 best is the alarm s true false test It is the D780 input to be tested see Alarm Input 2782 followed by the test condition see Alarm Condition 272 An optional delay period can be included in test see Alarm Delay Period 79 digitalAction is one or two digital state output channels whose These actions can be replaced by state mimic the alarm state See Alarm Digital a logical operator AND OR or Action Channels Ps0 XOR to combine more than one digitalAction is optional alarm UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 77 ACLIORDEXE is a text message that is returned to the host and or logged when alarm tests true See Alarm Action Text 280 actionText Is optional Note If single quotes are used instead of the double quotes then the text is sent only to the serial port This is useful when we need to communicate with modems in command mode ageELOnPLOCeSsses is a list of DT80 commands that are executed when alarm tests true See Alarm Action Processes P82 actionProcesses is optional Example Typical Alarm Command The alarm command ALARM1 2V gt 1000 1DSO HighVoltage 5CV 1 HA RB1M which you include in any report schedule contains the following ALARMI is the single shot al
114. D780 typically the work will follow this order Specify Channel Types The input channels are very versatile but the D780 does not automatically know what type of sensor is connected it must be informed A channel is defined by a channel type that determines how the DT80 s multiplexer is set up and how the readings are to be processed There are more than thirty different channel types see Table 1 DT80 Channel Types r29 A particular physical channel can be read using different channel types For example a thermocouple can be read as a thermocouple or as a voltage The command 1TK 1V returns both a temperature and a voltage based on two readings of the same sensor In very general terms when working with the D780 firstly select the most appropriate channel type for each sensor from Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 229 table The Wiring Configuration column shows appropriate wiring configurations connect the sensors accordingly Add Channel Options Then use channel options to modify channel function In a channel definition these are listed in round brackets immediately after the channel type The Channel Options 232 table describes the channel options Test Each Sensor Next it is recommended that each sensor is tested by declaring a simple schedule For example RA1S 2PT385 4W returns every one second RA1S the temperature of a platinum resistance temperature sensor PT385 connected as a 4 wire resistance 4W channel
115. DT80 contains a small cylindrical lithium memory backup battery See Figure 46 The DT80 s memory backup battery P130 The memory backup battery ensures that e the data e the DT80 s clock calendar e the DT80 s primary configuration settings mains frequency P11 date format P31 and time format P39 are not lost if power to the dataTaker is interrupted The memory backup battery can maintain this information for at least 12 months if necessary Just like the backup battery in a computer the D780 s memory backup battery needs to be replaced every five years or so if the safeguard capability is to be maintained The topic INSIDE THE DT80 2126 explains how to replace the internal memory backup battery The memory backup battery is a 1 2AA size 3 6V lithium type for example SAFT LS 14250 It s important that 3 6V and not 3 0V types be used both types are the same physical size Self Testing the Memory Backup Battery Use the DT80 to test its memory backup battery by e sending a TEST command see in TEST Commands DT80 121 including the VLITH channel type in a schedule or alarm see Table 1 DT80 Channel Types e29 table Getting Maximum Life from the Memory Backup battery The memory backup battery is not activated until the main battery is connected to the data Taker DT80 This means that the memory backup battery is effectively on the shelf it has a 10 year shelf life until the main battery is connected Thi
116. EGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Table 6 Alarm Unload Commands A where from canbe Both the date and time must be specified in the BEGIN start from first alarm logged currently defined format for date P31 and time P39 time start from first alarm logged at or after Note BEGIN and END used here are not the same as this time today the BEGIN and END keywords used to indicate the start time date start from first alarm logged at and end of a D780 job or after this time and date to can be END end with last alarm logged time end with last alarm logged prior to this time today time date end with last alarm logged prior to this time and date These commands are also listed in Summary Retrieval Commands r166 Examples A Unload Command The command instructs the D780 to unload the current job s alarm information for all report schedules in the order A to K and starting at 12 00 0n 19 1 2000 and ending at 12 05 on 20 1 2000 The command A Job1 B 11 15 instructs the DT80 to unload the alarms information for report schedule B of Job1 from BEGIN the first alarm logged until 11 15 today UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 87 The A Unload Commands The A unload commands return subsets of the alarm state records logged in the DT80 You define the subset to be returned by specifying combinations of e jobs and or report schedules and e p
117. ELAY would be controlled by 1IRELAY 1 connection to to turn power on to the modem Modem whilst 1RELAY 0 would turn power Power off DT80 controls the iPower DT80 controls the modem s power modem s power Supply supply by means of a relay supply by means of a connected to one of the DT80 s relay connected to the digital output channels D1 to D4 In digital channels 1 4 this case the modem would be Wager controlled by 3DSO 0 would turn power on to the modem whilst Power 3DO 1 would turn power off Figure 34 The DT80 can power a modem directly or control the modem s supply Automatic Modem Power Down Reset None of the above modem power arrangements provide for automatic power down resetting of the DT80 s modem if the modem ceases to respond To enable this DT80 feature send one of the following PROFILE commands see the HOST_MODEM 114 section of the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 21 5 table to the D780 e If the modem is powered from one of the DT80 s digital output channels n where n 1 to 8 send the command PROFILE HOST MODEM EXT POWER SWITCH n UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 102 e If the modem is powered via the DT80 s relay channel send the command PROFILE HOST MODEM EXT POWER SWITCH 1 e If the modem is not powered by either of the above send the command PROFILE HOST MODEM EXT POWER SWITCH 0 to disable the feature Then carry out a firm reset of the D780 see Resetting
118. ERS Pn SWITCHES A B C Z PPP IP ADDRESS REMOTE IP ADDRESS USER PASSWORD HOST PORT BPS for DT80 s Host RS 232 port DATA BITS STOP BITS PARITY FLOW HOST_MODEM DIAL for modem connected to DT80 s Host RS 232 port See DT80 Modem Remote RS 232 Connection F100 INIT number OFF ON nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn string string 50 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 7 8 LZ NO EVEN ODD HARDWARE SOFTWARE BOTH NONE string string p109 Column in the Table 9 DT80 Parameters r112 table Varies with switch see the Default e112 pre set for example PROFILE PARAMETERS p11 60 sets the DT80 for a 60Hz mains frequency environment PROFILE PARAMETERS P31 2 sets the DT80 to North American date format Any switch can be pre set for example column in the Table 10 PROFILE SWITCHES DT80 Switches r113 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 ANONYMOUS PASSWORD 57600 1 NO SOFTWARE ATD ATE0Q1 amp D2S0 48 amp C1 amp S0 A QN Switches are checked and set before parameters on every soft or firm reset Baud rate to use on DT80 s Host RS 232 port Number of data bits per character Number of stop bits per character Type of parity to include with each character Type of flow control to use on DT80 s Host RS 232 port Issued as prefix to number specified in the SETDI
119. G CONFIGURATION DIGITAL CHANNELS tor sampe cigtat input wring contguration diagrams Important Although the digital state outputs incorporate transient protection for inductive loads we recommend that you place a reversed diode across such loads The output drivers are not current limited so avoid shorting a supply line directly to a digital state output Other Considerations The digital input channels 1D 8D are scanned at 17ms intervals 60Hz This means that e the minimum input pulse width is 17ms shorter pulses may not be recognised e the maximum input count frequency assuming a 50 duty cycle is 30Hz Use the high speed counter channels High Speed Counter Channels r146 for higher count frequencies Digital inputs are not scanned while the DT80 is asleep Use the high speed counter channels High Speed Counter Channels 2146 if you need the logger to continue to count pulses even while asleep UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 143 Digital input transitions can be used to trigger or enable a report schedule see Trigger on External Event 243 for more details Counter channels can also be configured to trigger a schedule when the wrap value is reached see Trigger on External Event P43 A high to low pull down digital input transition can be used to wake the DT80 by connecting the digital input in parallel with the WK wake terminal The DT80 can then be programmed so that each time an external pulse oc
120. IAL 10 0 1CV gt 12346 1SERIAL s 1 gt pumpkin 1SERIAL 10s 1 gt pumpkin 1SERIAL 10 4s 1 gt pump Control String Input Actions The table below lists the commands available to interpret the information coming back into the Serial Channel from the serial device Input actions are not enclosed by in the control string Characters text For each character in the input action string the DT80 will read and discard all incoming characters from the serial device until that particular character is seen It then discards the matching character and starts looking for the next character in the input action text For example if the input action string is abc and the input data from the serial device is 3c3aabaAAc123 then all characters up to and including the second c will match ie they will be read and discarded Non printable characters may be specified using nnn or char notation as per Output Actions Control signal c1 n or wait up to n or nCV milliseconds for CTS input to be set high state Nal ncv RS232 only cO n or wait up to n or nCV milliseconds for CTS input to be cleared low c0 nCV RS232 only Wait w n or Delay for n or nCV milliseconds Actual delay time will be UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 152 Erase receive buffer Print amp erase receive buffer Fixed text string Xw nCv Ne NP m text or m n approximately 2ms or 2 charac
121. IDU iniciadas 163 4 Wire LM135 Series Inputs A eeteee eeebeds 164 WIRING CONFIGURATION DIGITAL CHANNELS ccccececcececcacsccacecceccacenesceacseanecesaenesaeass 164 Digital Input Wiring Configurations oisinnean a paai 164 Digital output wiring CONTIQUFAtiONS ocooccccccccnccncocnconconncanonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnanonnonanonanonnnns 165 Part M Reference oooocccoccccconoconccnnonnncnnncnnnennnennnan nan nrnnnrnnnennnannnannnananas 166 COMMAND SUMMARIES 0 it e 166 GETTING OPTIMAL SPEED FROM YOUR DT 8BO oocococccccococcoconcnconcaccncancncannnnanranancnnranancnnnanas 168 DEST O PO il da 168 ASCIEDECIMAL TABLE ais 170 RS 232 STANDARD ca 171 CABLEDE ES ehiec tus taarccacuhaecamaeaack ewer dacdcmantncnemaceuddececnde daesdadtamantvotdodsnacees 171 UPGRADING DT80 FIRMWARE sisi eee ae hee ceed et 172 Recommended PFreparatlOn ii ia 172 Firmware Upgrade Host USB or RS232 Poft occoccncnccccccnccccnccncncocnconcncnncnnnnnnnncncnncnonanos 173 in Case OF a Falea Upgrade e 174 ERROR MESSAGES ceccecsececccccncenccncecceneeceeeeneeaneasenseneeanenaeueeaneeaeeneaneaseaaeasenneaeeneseeseesaegs 174 GlIOSS AU Ys sea ca setae id 177 A 187 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 10 Part A The DT80 Figure 1 The dataTaker DT80 DT80 Concepts What is the DT80 The dataTaker DT80 data acquisition and logging instrument is a tool to measure and record a wide variety of quantities and values in the real world With the DT80
122. Interval triggered schedules Event triggered schedules Poll triggered schedules B Only these schedule instances are enabled ready for triggering UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 44 Figure 12 Triggers are enabled disabled by a While condition A report schedule s trigger can be enabled or disabled by an external condition See Figure 13 pP45 This is called the While condition that is trigger only While the external or internal condition is true The While condition can be either e states on one or more of the DT80 s digital input channels 1DS or e internal conditions specified to the D780 as states of channel variables nW Enable schedule While digital input n is high true n W Enable schedule While digital input n is low false m nW Enable schedule While ANY digital input m to n is high true m n W Enable schedule While ANY digital input m to n is low false nCV Enable schedule While nCV is non zero n CV Enable schedule While nCV is zero Note that the colon is required Examples While Condition The schedule header RALE 2W instructs the DT80 to run Report schedule A on every transition of digital input 1 1E only while digital input 2 is high 2W The schedule header RD1S 4 W instructs the D780 to run Report schedule D every second 1S while digital input 4 is low 4 W The schedule header RK2H 9W instructs the D780 to run Report schedule K every
123. LY contain channel variables and constants Data from input channels must first be assigned to channel variables to be used in expressions Expressions can contain the following operators modulus and exponent lt lt gt gt result 1 is true O is false AND OR XOR NOT gt 0 is true result O or 1 ABS LOG LN SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN SORT Sn Yn Fn Round brackets parentheses Note The trigonometric functions require arguments in radians where 1 radian 57 296 degrees Note The modulus operator converts both operands to integer The operator precedence is A or lt These operators have equal precedence or lt These operators have equal precedence lt lt gt gt lt These operators have equal precedence AND OR XOR or NOT lt These operators have equal precedence Expressions evaluate left to right but parentheses can be used to define a particular order of evaluation Parentheses can be nested Expressions are evaluated at the report time of the embracing schedule and in the order in which they occur within the schedule Conditional Calculations Boolean logic within expressions can be used to return a result that is dependent on a condition being true or false For example 2CV 1CV 2 1CV lt 1000 1CV 4 LCV gt 1000 returns a value of 2 1CV if 1CV is less than 1000 or a value of 4 1CV if
124. MX and MN channel options UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 56 The time and date of these can be reported with the TMX TMN DMX DMN IMX and IMN channel options See the Statistical 237 category Integration INT The integration channel option see the Statistical 7 category returns the integral area under the curve with respect to time in seconds using a trapezoidal approximation The units of an integration are those of the original reading multiplied by seconds Example Integration When integration is applied to a flow rate sensor as follows S5 0 0 1 0 1000 litres 3C Fuel Consumption S5 INT R the volume of the flow is returned Fuel Consumption 34 54 litres Int The flow rate sensor with a counter output 3C is scaled by a span S5 see Spans Sn s2 and then integrated Note that the span units have been declared as litres which is the result after integration although the span calibration is actually to litres per second Histogram Hx y m nCV The DT80 can be used to generate a histogram frequency distribution of channel samples by applying the histogram channel option which instructs the D780 to e divide the measured data range into a number of intervals called classes see Figure 20 257 e count the number of readings that occur in each class during the histogram period e load each class count into a separate channel variable Then use another schedule to read log and
125. NICATIONS Getting Started Power POWERING THE DT80 2129 discusses the ways to provide power to the DT80 The simplest option is to plug in the supplied AC adaptor The DT80 includes an internal 6V lead acid battery which can power the logger if the main external supply is interrupted UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 12 Important The D780 is shipped with its main internal battery disconnected We recommend the battery is connected as soon as practical so that it can charge from the mains adaptor or other external power source This is achieved by simply plugging the green power connector See Switch On When power is connected you should observe e the LCD backlight switches on e a brief clicking sound as the unit performs an initial self calibration e DT80 restarted Power loss is displayed on the LCD e the three front panel LEDs flash a few times then the red Attn LED continues to flash The DT80 is warning you that its power has been interrupted Press any of the front panel keys to clear this indication The Attn LED should stop flashing and the display should now read DT80 V5 02 No current job This indicates that e the version of DT80 firmware in use is 5 02 this number may vary and e no user program or job has been loaded The DT80 is now idle and waiting for instructions Connecting to a Host Computer In order to program the DT80 it is generally necessary to connect it to a host computer The e
126. S cocooocoocccocaconaronannnnarenarennrenanennnrenarenanennans 157 Voltage INDUS nasa diia 157 Shared Terminal Voltage Inputs ccoocccconnccccnccccnccnnnconnononononcnonncnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonnnncnanonnnninos 158 Independent Voltage Inputs occoocccocnconnoccnoncnononononononononononononononononononnnoncnancnanenones 158 GUS cita ta 158 Independent Current Input with External ShuUNt cooocnccoccccccnccccnconcnconcnnnnnnnnonnnncncnncnnnnos 158 Independent Current Input using the internal ShuUnNt cococcccocnccccncccnnnonnncnonnnnoncnanononos 159 Shared Terminal Current Inputs with External ShuntS occcoccncoccccocinccnccocnccncncnacnnnnnnnos 159 Independent current using internal shunt and external excitation ooccocccocccnncocnoo 160 Resistance INPUTS ra 160 A4WIFe RESISTANCE Apu iii ii A A did 160 e A 160 ZAVVAFEIROSISTAN GO MDUIS sicario n a ed hedge ide eee ete eae 161 ECS INDUS ers Sects ate sere ace a a ecm atc eel an E A dee eee 161 O VVIFG BV INP 161 LAWS GIN DUES ts nl a 161 LAWS BOGHA osas 162 WIG Gls Pl ice 162 PAIDGI0 SERIES US o ed 162 ZV INE AI O90 2 Series IDU co ali oa a 163 MISS Senes INPUES ai 163 3 4 4 Wire LM35 Series input full temperature range c oocccoccnccccnnccnncncnnoncncnncnnoncnnnnnnos 163 3 and 4 Wire LM35 Series Inputs restricted temperature range ccccooccccccnconcnnoncnnnnonos 163 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 9 EMI SS Senes
127. Table 12 DT80 Resets 119 In this way the D780 is automatically returned to the chosen configuration every time it or more accurately its relevant sub system is re started This saves repeatedly specifying the same settings in every program sent to the DT80 Configuration settings for DT80 sub systems such as the Host RS 232 port host modem Ethernet interface FTP server jobs switches and parameters can all be restored in this way In addition this facility can be used to store information in the DT80 USER INI User Initialization File The default settings are stored in the D780 s user initialization file USER INI which is automatically read and applied upon DT80 startup and sub system initialization If USER INI contains no user default for a particular setting the D780 uses its factory default listed in the table below Use PROFILE commands to build the USER INI file These commands are described in PROFILE Commands 2115 and use information from the table below The table lists the pre defined D780 sub systems called sections for which can be specified startup defaults USER INI is created the first time a PROFILE command is sent to the D 80 It resides in the D780 s battery backed SRAM memory and is maintained through all types of reset It is only lost deleted if both the internal main battery and the internal memory backup battery are removed from the D780 or if a FORMAT B command is sent see the Table
128. The opposite of serial is parallel In parallel data transfer several streams of bits are sent concurrently settling time The time allowed for an input signal to stabilise after the DT80 selects the channel selects the gain and applies excitation if required See channel settling time 17s shared terminal inputs Analog inputs where a common reference is used Also called single ended inputs For example the 1 V 1 V and 1 V commands all measure single ended voltages relative to a common point the 1 terminal See Shared Terminal 216 shield A conductor surrounding input signal wires that is generally connected to a data data Taker s ground The purpose is to shield the input signal from capacitively coupled electrical noise Such a shield provides little protection from magnetically induced noise UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 185 SRAM Static Random Access Memory An extremely fast and reliable type of RAM Static derives from the fact that it doesn t need to be refreshed like other types of RAM See e125 S Record A printable ASCII format consisting of strings of hexadecimal digits used for transferring binary data between computers stand alone Not connected to a host computer The DT80 is designed to operate in stand alone mode once programmed you can disconnect the data Taker from the host computer leaving the data Taker operating totally independently Later to download data or reprogram the dataTak
129. This comma separated list provides details about the DT80 s program In order they are program ID base year time resolution card status and current string followed by schedule fields that identify individual channels their format and their units If there is no program the following is returned 5200071 0 E lt t gt A AA DAA LAA RARA STATUS12 Returns the date time range of logged data that is the time and date of the first and last data points stored in the DT80 s internal memory and inserted USB memory device For example 00 11 33 on 05 11 1992 00 13 00 on 19 01 1993 Data Start End times STATUS14 An extended version of STATUS10 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 123 Part K Hardware and Power Inputs and Outputs Terminals ports connectors and sockets DT80 Front Panel Sampling if d Edit or Confirm mteface indicator adicmor Key Figure 43 DT80 Front Panel 2 Line Display see r90 Directional Keypad see P93 USB Stick Interface see 73 Sampling Indicator see P93 Internal Disk Indicator see r93 Attention Indicator see 293 Edit of Confirm Key see P93 Func or Reject Key see P93 DT80 Wiring Panel Dipa Tipai fame Amg Amig Opa Greend to Wake Croand FA Channel 1 Chian 3 Ground Channels Loge LA H M P ig E m dl l d i ay ae E i MN a J a i 1 Ha i a pa 5 ED Ww s A T oa E j A
130. a records for current job RX schedule Number of logged alarm records for current job RX schedule Number of logged data records for current job RA schedule Number of logged alarm records for current job RA schedule Number of logged data records for current job RB schedule Number of logged alarm records for current job RB schedule y Number of logged data records for current job RK schedule Number of logged alarm records for current job RK schedule Table 2 DT80 System Variables Channel Options In brackets separated by commas no spaces Overview All channel types can be modified in various ways by channel options which define the way in which the input channel is managed when sampled There are channel options that specify the type of sensor excitation the termination of the input channel scaling and linearization of the input signal the format and destination of channel data fixed channel gain values resistance and bridge wiring methods statistical operations on the channel data and so on As shown below channel options are placed in round brackets immediately following the channel ID channel number and type If multiple channel options are specified then they should be separated by a comma no spaces RA2S 1TK 3R 4W 2 V 0 1 GL3V Speed km h FFO In the above example UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 32 e The first channel 1TK has no channel options specified so it will measure the thermocouple using d
131. aa 22 Oround 1400 DSi aare e AA 22 Grounds Ground Loops and Isolation occcocccocccoccconncocncocnnncncnonononnnononononononononanonanos 23 Grounds are Not Always Ground c oocncccccconcconconoconononnncnnnoncnnonononnnnnronornnnnnnnnnnnononrnnornnnnnnranenoness 23 Ground LOOPS APA e RT O a a a a a a ements 23 Avoiding Ground LOODS etiri a e ee eee ae 23 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 3 E A es 23 NOIS PICK UD id cisid 23 SACIN Ol SCNSONS a eo 24 Part B A O O O enawete ween cenwedeeviesaevaeeae 25 ChlalinelD GTiMiGlOWS aria 25 Channel NUMDETS sra aa 25 Channel Number SQQuence ccccceeccecceeceeteeteetaececceeceecseteeteetaeseeeecceeceesantantaeeaes 26 Channel TYDES sento 26 Internal Channel Types in detail ocooccoccconoccncoccconoonocancnnocanoncocanonnnnannononanonos 30 Te Dato caida a aii cis 30 A O 0 icc aie qertaceme inane nie E 30 Internal Malntenan cena cana wisi cma 30 A A PS 31 System VanaDlIeS id il o daa 31 Cale O OOS arrasa tye a a aaa 32 cn A nn aah Ghat eon et A A E ana Aunt EE ENT T 32 A Special Channel Option Channel Factor o occocccccccnconconcocconnocnccnocncancnnonncnnonnnnnnos 33 Muller caos 33 Mutually Exclusive ODIOS os 34 Order or ADIGA OM muii iii iii 34 Default Channel Options raso A aa 34 Enannel Option Tables ia didas 35 PareG lt SCMCCUICS cuidad 39 Schedule ConceptsS essssessnsesnnnunsonsnsennnnesnnnaennnansnnunsennnnnn
132. able modem connection DE 9 to DB 25 dataTaker product code PROMOD 6 plus 9F 25M adaptor DT80 Straight through DB 25 modem DTE parallel cable DCE Figure 74 DT80 to modem RS 232 comms cable DE 9 modem upper diagram and DB 25 modem lower diagram UPGRADING DT80 FIRMWARE Operating system upgrade The DT80 s operating system is stored as firmware e181 in the DT80 s Flash memory see MEMORY 2125 This means that you can easily upgrade your DT80 s operating system from a host computer running DeLogger or DeTransfer An upgrade takes between 2 and 15 minutes depends on the method used and is completely safe In case of a problem occurring during an upgrade the DT80 automatically protects its firmware upgrade bootstrap file which always allows you to restart the process Important Always check the release notes distributed with the new firmware version for any changes to the upgrade procedure documented here Recommended Preparation We recommend that you carry out the following procedure before upgrading the DT80 s firmware to ensure that no compatibility problems arise This procedure returns the DT80 to a completely unprogrammed state Once the upgrade is complete you will have to restore any settings and programs 1 Connect to the DT80 and perform the following operations most of which can be done from the text window interface in DeLogger or from DeTransfer or other terminal softw
133. aces tabs underscores For example is a command line made up of four DT80 commands separated by spaces common mode voltage An unwanted AC and or DC voltage that offsets both inputs to the DT80 s instrumentation amplifier with respect to amplifier ground It is unwanted because it usually originates from nuisance sources such as electrical noise DC offset voltages caused by the sensors or the equipment being measured or from ground loops Typically in industrial measurement the sensor signals you apply to the DT80 s input terminals consist of e the small component you want to measure a few mV to a few tens of mV PLUS e alarge unwanted component a few V to a few tens of V the common mode voltage Instrumentation amplifier 7 precision differential analog input amplifier Wanted Vilewanted L Figure 75 Common mode voltage VCM and Differential voltage VDiff 1 Vout Gain x Voir ideally When the DT80 makes a measurement both of these components are applied to the inputs of the its instrumentation amplifier Then when configured for basic differential use the amplifier does two things e lt rejects most of the common mode voltage the unwanted signal How well the amplifier does this is indicated by its common mode rejection ratio see CMRR 7172 e t amplifies the difference between the signals on its two inputs This is the wanted signal and is called the differential voltag
134. age BEGIN Wind 02 RA10S 1CV W 0 Clear 1CV 1 10V 1CV W Sum 10 voltages into 1CV 1CV 1CV 10 Divide by 10 for average END UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 66 Part F Logging and Retrieving Data Format of Returned Data The DT80 can return the following types of data to the host computer e data returned as it is measured that is real time data e data unloaded from the D780 internal memory or from a USB memory device that is logged data e data returned by the TEST and STATUS commands The format of returned data is controlled globally by the following parameters and switches See CCONFIGURING THE DT80 r109 for full details Data delimiter in free format mode see P22 109 Default 32 space character Scan delimiter in free format mode see P24 7110 Default 13 carriage return character Date format Default 1 DD MM YYYY Defines a fixed field width for output data variable Default 0 off Decimal point locator character for floating point Default 46 full stop character numbers Time format see Time 230 Default O hh mm ss sss Time separator character Default 58 colon character Fixed format mode 221 Default off Include Units text appended to the data Default on Include channel Number and type before data Default on Include dataTaker serial number before scan data Default off Include Channel type C or number only c Default on Include scan Date at beginning of ret
135. age 16 is recognized by the channel definition 1 V Which Analog Input Configuration Should Use e Shared input single ended wiring uses the terminal as a common sense point between multiple sensors Each of the and inputs are measured with respect to the input The main advantage of shared inputs is that the number of measurement points per channel is increased each DT80 analog channel can measure three separate voltages e Unshared differential inputs do not share any measurement wires Unshared inputs allow for easier connection to sensors where there is a common mode voltage an unwanted voltage offset applied to both sensor wires relative to ground Because unshared input pairs are totally independent from one other different sensors can have different common mode voltages without affecting measurement accuracy e Shielded input cable may be helpful when the signal source has a high output impedance or when noise pickup especially from power cables is a problem Ensure the shield is only connected to the ground at one point see 22 usually the logger terminal on the same channel as the sensor Important Unshared differential inputs can effectively remove the unwanted common mode component from the input signals provided that the maximum input voltage for each terminal is not exceeded max 3V 30V for attenuators off on relative to AGND Sensor Excitation Many sensors require excitation electrical
136. age number Alarm record Returned Data record Error record Information record Parameter record Status record Test record PassWord query record Figure 22Typical logged data records returned in fixed format See also Figure 25 276 The parameters and switches listed above are restored to their previous values when the DT80 receives h sets free format mode Not User Definable In fixed format mode returned data and other returned information cannot have the format changed format related parameter and switch commands have no effect Numeric Format To set the numeric format of free format mode returned data for individual channels by the following channel options see Output data format 237 in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 23s table EEN Fixed point format n number of decimal places 0 to 7 DT80 User s Manual UM 0085A0 Page 68 Exponential format n number of significant digits 0 to 7 Mixed FF or FE formats Uses FE format if exponent is less than 4 or greater than n For example 23 456 23 5 2 346e1 23 5 23 46 0 025 0 0 2 542e 2 0 0 0 03 1034 6 1034 6 1 035e3 1e3 1034 64 The default format depends on the channel type returning the data see the Table 1 DT80 Channel Types r29 table especially the Resolution column Formatting options are not applied to the 99999 9 error data code see ERROR MESSAGES p174 Fixed Field Width Parameter 33 10 all
137. alarms for report schedule x Returns alarms for JobName in the order of report Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x These commands are also listed in Summary Retrieval Commands r166 Examples A Unload Command The command A instructs the D780 to unload all of the current job s alarm records from beginning to end for all report schedules A to K UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 86 The command A Boiler G instructs the D780 to unload alarm information for job Boiler report schedule G The A Unload Commands TheA unload commands return subsets of the alarm state records logged in the DT80 You define the subset to be returned by specifying combinations of e jobs and or report schedules and e periods designated by a beginning and end date and time which you must specify in the D780 s current date and time formats as set by P31 and P39 Returns the current job s alarms for report schedule x Ax from Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date Ax from to Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date A JobName x Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x A JobName x from Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date A JobName x from to Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from B
138. ameters P22 and P24 are not used as delimiters while units text is enabled U User Definable In free format mode you can use format related parameter and switch commands to alter the format of returned data and other information to suit your requirements UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 67 Fixed Format Mode H Also known as formatted mode Recommended for those writing drivers to interface host software with the D780 that is advanced users only Logged data is always returned to the host in fixed format mode In fixed format mode enabled by the H switch command the following parameters and switches are forced to the states shown in order to ensure a predictable repeatable comprehensive format for returning data ready to be imported into spreadsheets and other data analysis software P22 44 Each measurement is separated by a comma P24 13 CR and LF is applied to the end of each scan s data P38 46 Decimal point character period e Channel type does not appear in returned data Zu Units text does not appear in returned data n Channel number does not appear in returned data e Echo automatic return of sent commands is turned off r Real time data return is turned off For example when the DT80 is in fixed format mode the schedule command RA5S 3PT385 returns data as shown below D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03 29 10 D 081044 JOB1 2005 03
139. an expressions can also be used in schedules to return a result that is dependent on a condition being true or false For example the expression 7 i E A sets 2CV to a value of 1CV 2 if 1CV is less than 1000 or to value of LCV 4 if 1CV is greater than or equal to 1000 The Boolean expressions 1CV lt 1000 and 1CV gt 1000 evaluate to a value of 1 0 if true or 0 0 if false Conditional expressions such as the example above provide an IF THEN ELSE function See also IF THEN ELSE p51 above Unconditional Processing DO Command The DO command is similar to the IF command except that it has no conditional test This means that its processes are performed each and every time the report schedule containing the DO command is run The general format of the DO command is DO actionText actionProcesses where acEiOnTexe is optional and if included is returned to the host computer each time the DO command tests true The actionText is not logged See DO actionText 251 below actionProcesses can be commands for reading input channels setting output channels performing calculations setting of any global or system parameters and so on actionProcesses is optional Any potential channel output from the actionProcesses are not returned nor logged See DO actionProcesses r52 below The DO command can include either actionText or actionProcesses or both The DO command
140. and a statistical summary returned at longer intervals see Statistical Report Schedules p46 Statistical channels are sampled for the period between report times and the statistical summary is generated and returned at report time Channels that require statistical sampling must include a channel option to indicate the statistical information to generate Here s a summary of the statistical channel options see also the Statistical 7 category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 238 table AV Average Ave SD Standard deviation SD MX Maximum Max MN Minimum Min TMX Time of maximum Tmx TMN Time of minimum Imn DMX Date of maximum Dmx DMN Date of minimum Dmn 1MX Instant of maximum combines DMX and TMX IMN Instant of minimum combines DMN and TMN INT Integral Int HS Va IM Cy Histogram NUM Number of samples The statistical option is defined by including it as a channel option in parentheses after the channel type For example the schedule RAIM 3TT AV returns 3TT 103 7 degC Ave This is the average AV temperature returned every one minute RA1M for the type T thermocouple connected to channel 3 3TT The text Ave is appended to the units to indicate that the data is an average If statistical channels have not been sampled before they are reported these channels report error E53 see the Table 18 DT80 Error Messages 176 table and data is returned as 99999 9 This condition is likely t
141. applicable channel types column lists the different ways in which a physical channel can be measured For example analog channel 1 can be used to measure a voltage specified by entering 1V or a PT385 RTD 1PT385 or a frequency 1F All of these channel types fall into the analog class so when we talk about channel 1 we are talking about analog channel 1 Because each channel type is a member of one class only there is never any confusion about which of the channel 1s is being referred to 1C refers to digital input 1 because from the above table the C counter channel type is in the digital class 1HSC on the other hand refers to counter input 1 because the HSC high speed counter channel type is in the counter class An analog channel number can be suffixed by a modifier character which identifies the pair of terminals between which to measure as shown in the following table none and and and and and AGND normally only used for current measurements Thus the channel ID 3V defines an independent input between the and terminals while 3 V 3 V and 3 V define shared terminal inputs between the or terminals respectively and the terminal Channel Number Sequence A channel ID that contains two channel numbers separated by two decimal points for example 1 3 defines a continuous sequence of channels If the first channel ID indicates a shared channel the remaining channels in the s
142. are Note if you are using DeLogger it may ask if you want to upgrade the DT80 when you connect to the DT80 If this occurs answer No so that you can perform the following steps before the upgrade occurs 8 Save any previously logged data stored in the DT80 s internal memory by unloading it to the host computer or copying to a USB memory device 9 In DeLogger select the Profile option from the dataTaker menu and note any important profile settings such as Ethernet IP Address You must re enter these once the upgrade is complete If you are using DeTransfer or other terminal software you can issue the PROFILE command to return the current profile settings 10 Delete any ONRESET job stored in flash memory using the DELONRESET command 11 Delete any PROFILE settings stored in flash memory using the DELUSERINI command UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 172 12 Format the internal disk using the FORMAT B command Note This will erase all jobs and data stored in the DT80 13 Carry out the firmware upgrade as described below When the upgrade is done you ll need to reconnect to the DT80 and set up your required settings and programs Recommendation Power Before carrying out a firmware upgrade we recommend that you charge the DT80 s main internal battery for 12 hours Furthermore if at all possible power the DT80 from an external source as well during the upgrade These two precautions minimise the possibility of a power failu
143. arm command ALARM and an alarm number 1 2V gt 1000 is the alarm true false test of the input 2V against the condition gt 1000mV If at the moment of testing the voltage on channel 2 is greater than or equal to 1000mV 2V gt 1000 the alarm is true Otherwise the alarm is false 1DSO is the digitalAction lt instructs the D780 to set its digital state output channel 1 ON if the alarm is true and OFF if the alarm is false HighVoltage is actionText The DT80 returns and or logs this message when the alarm becomes true 5CV 1 HA RB1M is the actionProcesses a list of commands that the DT80 executes when the alarm becomes true Alarm Number Shown as n in the alarm command above optional Each of the two alarm types can be given either e anumber in the range 1 to 32767 that is ALARMn or ALARMRn where n is the alarm number for example ALARM37 or e nonumber that is ALARM or ALARMR The following table compares the functionality of alarms with and without numbers Do not have to be entered in numeric sequence Order doesn t matter The alarm number entry time and exit time are logged in the D 80 s No alarm information is logged general data store n see Polling Alarm Data esz returns the current value of the tested n returns an undefined alarm error channel x and ALL see Polling Alarm Data 2s return all current values x and ALL have no effect Alarm Input Part of te
144. as two quadrature phase encoder inputs As with analog channels channel definition commands are used to specify which digital inputs are to be measured and or what digital output states are to be set For example the command 1DS will read the digital state 0 or 1 on channel 1D while 3DSO 0 will set channel 3D low A transition on a digital channel can be used to trigger a schedule This allows a series of measurements to be made or commands executed in response to an incoming digital pulse The DT80 can count the number of pulses received on any digital input The four dedicated counter inputs provide additional capabilities e ahigher maximum count rate e the ability to keep counting even if the logger is in low power sleep mode e optional low level 5mV input threshold levels e optional decoding of phase encoded input signals For more details on the digital channels 2141 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 17 Serial Channel Introduction The DT80 s serial channel allows a wide variety of sensors and devices to be controlled and polled The serial channel e supports RS232 RS422 and RS485 signal levels e supports point to point or multi drop operation e features programmable output poll strings and a variety of options for parsing returned data e can trigger execution of a schedule in response to received data For more details on the serial channel P148 Programming the DT80 When creating a program to send to the
145. asiest option here is to use the supplied USB cable Other options are to use a null modem cross over RS232 cable or to connect the logger to an Ethernet network See Figure 17 Anatomy of a sample DT80 program 253 for more details of the different communications options Very briefly connecting the DT80 via USB involves the following steps 1 Install the required dataTaker software DeLogger and or DeTransfer on the host PC Connect the USB cable between the DT80 and the PC The Windows New Hardware Found wizard will then run automatically if required to install the necessary drivers Launch DeTransfer or DeLogger A SP N In DeTransfer or DeLogger create a connection this involves selecting the port to use when communicating with the DT80 A virtual COM port e g COM5 will have been assigned by the USB driver 6 Press the Connect button in DeTransfer or DeLogger The above is only an brief overview See USB Communications P95 for detailed step by step instructions The remainder of this manual will assume you have successfully established a connection between the host PC and the DT80 Sending Commands The DT80 is programmed by sending it textual commands Commands are executed by the DT80 only after it receives a carriage return character Commands are not case sensitive that is they may be entered using either uppercase or lowercase characters In this manual all commands are shown in UPPERCASE Resp
146. at can be used for accumulating the cycle size counts and other information It has the form RAINFLOW a b c dlV where is the maximum cycle size expressed in the channel type units for example ppm is the minimum cycle size for noise rejection in terms of a percentage of a is the first IV in the sequence to be used for accumulating data is the last IV in the sequence to be used for accumulating data Therefore the range of cycle sizes is from zero to the maximum cycle size defined a and cycle sizes smaller than b of a are rejected and not counted For example the channel option RAINFLOW 1000 5 c dIV sets the cycle size range to 0 1000 units and cycle sizes less than 5 of 1000 50 units are rejected as noise The number of variables allocated for the rainflow analysis must be set to the number of cycle size classes required over the cycle size range plus seven 7 additional variables for summary data For example if you require 10 cycle size classes over the cycle size range then 17 variables will be needed The variables can begin at any number in their range of 1 to 500 c and are used sequentially to the last variable number d The use of variables in the allocated variable range is summarized in the following table The first column shows how variables are used within the allocated range and the last column shows how 20 variables are used The last 7 variables contain various summary data UM 0085A
147. ate of minimum Integral for channel using time in seconds Number of samples in statistical calculation Histogram Assign channel reading to 1 to 500 channel variable nCV reading Add channel reading to 1 to 500 channel variable nCV nCV reading Subtract channel reading 1 to 500 from channel variable nCV nCV reading Multiply channel variable by channel reading nCV nCV reading Divide channel variable by 1 to 500 channel reading nCV nCV reading 1 to 500 No return x y 1e18 m n 1 500 See Rainflow Cycle Counting 252 Only for use with DeTransfer version 3 00 or later DDE or OLE tags can also be added to a schedule ID date or time see P45 2111 in the Table 9 D780 Parameters 2112 These channel options link the channel to the statistical sub schedule RS The channel is sampled at times determined by the RS trigger which defaults to 1S At the report time as determined by the report schedules the statistical summary is reported If insufficient samples have been taken before the reporting time an error is reported 9e9 Divide data range x to y into discrete buckets and accumulate in CVs the number of samples in each bucket See Histogram Hx y m nCV P57 Channel variables are like memory registers in a calculator They can be assigned directly e g LCV 2 5 or assigned a channel reading at scan time e g 1V 7CV The contents of a variable
148. ation on terminal Supply 2 5mA current excitation on terminal Supply approx 4 5V voltage excitation on terminal Connect external excitation source EXT terminal to channel s terminal No excitation by DT80 assumes externally applied excitation Disconnect internal 100R shunt between terminal and AGND Measure relative to 2 5V rather than OV Perform n additional samples and average them After selecting channel delay for n ms before starting measurement Reset channel after reading Linearise scale the measured value 0 to 65535 0 to 65535 depends on chan type DT80 User s Manual Provides input bias current path to ground to prevent inputs floating particularly when independent differential inputs are used Attenuators default ON for HV L channel types OFF for other types Attenuators cannot be used if the DT80 is supplying excitation Specifies the number of wires run between the DT80 and the resistance or bridge More wires generally mean better accuracy Selects between 3V 300mV 30mV ranges if input attenuators disabled Selects between 30V 3V 300mV ranges if input attenuators enabled Valid only if input attenuators are enabled Valid only if input attenuators are disabled Precision current source Low excitation current minimises self heating in resistive temperature sensors Precision current source Higher excitation current extends measurement range whe
149. basic measurement tasks are easy For example sending the command line RA5S 1 4TJ LOGON declares a report schedule RA that reports every five seconds 5S the temperatures on four type J thermocouples connected to the DT80 s analog input channels 1 to 4 1 4TJ and stores the results in memory LOGON Recovering the logged data is even easier For example sending the single character command U the UNLOAD command to the D780 returns time stamped data to your computer in a format ready to be imported into the preferred program The connection between the DT80 and the host computer could be via Ethernet USB RS232 or modem Alternatively you could insert a USB memory stick and select the COPYDATA option using the built in keypad and LCD display The DT80 can be programmed to carry out extremely powerful tasks To do this it will be necessary to be familiar with more of the set of data Taker commands Explore the features that are available DT80 Friendly Software Although any terminal software can be used to communicate with the D780 data Taker DT80 friendly software packages incorporate so many productivity features specific to data acquisition data logging and the DT 80 that make it pointless to use anything else For example DeLogger has a totally graphical interface which means that knowledge of the dataT aker programming language is not required Instead supervise the D780 just by clicking on icons and making selections
150. bble Output simultaneously sets the state of four consecutive digital outputs starting at nD For example 5DN 5 binary 0101 sets 5D high 6D low 7D high and 8D low nDBO x Digital Byte Output simultaneously sets the state of all eight digital outputs as an 8 bit number 0 255 For this channel type n must always be 1 1RELAY x Relay Output sets the state of the latching RELAY output O closed 1 open 1IWARN x LED output sets the state of the Attn LED O off 1 on Channel Options The following channel options are applicable to digital output channel types DSO RELAY channel factor Delay ms The DT80 waits for the specified number of WARN milliseconds after setting the output state Default is 0 ie no delay If the R option is specified then the default and minimum delay setting is 10ms DNO DBO channel factor Bitmask This specifies which output channels to set For example 1DNO 14 1CV 2 bitmask 1110 binary will output bits O Isb 1 and 2 of 1CV on outputs 2D 3D and 4D respectively For digital channel 1D the mask bit is O so its state will not be affected by this command The default values for DNO and DBO are 15 and 255 respectively setas II DSO DNO DBO R Reset After setting the output bit s to the specified state s and RELAY WARN waiting for the delay time the output s will be set to the opposite state In other words a pulse will be generated Digital Output Operation All digital output cha
151. be caused by e connecting a sensor to a ground point that has a different potential to the ground of another sensor a sensor to sensor ground loop is likely to flow through the return wires of the two sensors e connecting the data Takerto a ground point that has a different potential to the ground of one or more of the sensors or instruments connected to the data Taker inputs a sensor to equipment ground loop e connecting the dataTakerto a ground point that has a different potential to the ground of the host computer an equipment to computer ground loop In these situations conduction paths can occur from one ground point to another through the sensor and or equipment and or computer making measurement errors inevitable particularly if sensor wires are part of the conduction path Data acquisition logging Host computer equipment Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Equipment to computer ground loop Sensor to sensor ground loop See eee ee ee es ae Pew eee 2s 2 Sensor to equipment ground loop BEE A A A A A He A A tdo E AAA ALL ce tota Ce ee ee ee ee A MO A A A A A A A A HES Sensor 1 Sensor 2 Equipment Computer ground ground ground ground The DT80 s analog isolation means that this loop cannot occur Figure 5 Some of the possible ground loops in a measurement system Avoiding Ground Loops Generally avoidance is better than cure so break the ground loop There are several strategies
152. ber There is only one way to do this You use PROFILE commands to include these settings in the DT80 s USER INI file which the DT80 automatically reads and applies after a firm reset but not after a hard reset see Resetting the DT80 1 19 This is covered later in this section Ethernet LEDs The two LEDs on the DT80 s Ethernet port 7125 indicate the following e Green LED Link OK should come on and stay on as soon as you connect the Ethernet cable e Amber LED Activity blinks every time a packet is received Ethernet Concepts IP Address Every device a computer or a DT80 for example on an Ethernet network using one of the TCP IP protocols must have UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 104 its own unique address called its IP address No two devices in the same network can have the same IP address a device s IP address uniquely identifies it to all other devices on the network The IP address you assign to the DT80 is constructed from e your network s network number and e an available unused node number see later for your DT80 The topic DT80 Ethernet Setup 2106 explains how to construct a suitable that is valid and unused IP address Important Do not connect your DT80 to the network until you ve configured the DT80 with a suitable IP address Connecting a device with an invalid or used IP address may generate incorrect address information in other devices on the network The DT80 is
153. ble The number of setpoints depends on the logical operator The IF condition is tested each time that the schedule it belongs to is run and the text and processes are executed every UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 50 time the condition tests true Examples IF Command When run in a schedule the IF command IF 1CV gt 3 57 2CV 12 6 specifies that if the current value of 1CV exceeds 3 57 1CV gt 3 57 assign the value 12 6 to 2CV 2CV 12 6 If 1CV is less than 3 57 when the condition is tested no assignment is made When run in a schedule the IF command IF 10CV gt lt 10 100 5CV W 1 RA1M specifies that if the value of 10CV is between 10 and 100 LOCV gt lt 10 100 seta flag SCV W 1 and change the trigger for the RA schedule to 1 minute RA1M Working Channels Hide CV Data r64 explains the W channel option used in the example above IF THEN ELSE The IF command has no ELSE alternative as in the BASIC language s IF THEN ELSE construct But where an IF THEN ELSE test and function is required this can be achieved by using two IF commands For example for any pass of a schedule containing the two IF commands IF LOCV lt 100 5CV W 0 IF LOCV gt 100 5CV W 1 only one of the tests will be true and so the flag will be set appropriately See also Conditional Processing Boolean Expressions 51 below Conditional Processing Boolean Expressions Boole
154. ble Turn on or activate Ethernet A standard method for connecting a network of computers so that they can share information The DT80 supports 10 Base T Ethernet that is it operates at a data rate of 10Mbps and uses Twisted pair cable See DT80 ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 7125 firmware The operating system software stored inside the DT80 The DT80 s firmware is semi permanent and you can upgrade it with a simple file transfer Flash A special type of EEPROM that can be erased and reprogrammed in blocks instead of one byte at a time compare with EEPROM 181 above Flash memory is therefore much faster to erase and re write Retains its contents even when power is unavailable The DT80 s firmware is stored in Flash memory See also MEMORY r125 and UPGRADING DT80 FIRMWARE 2172 flow control The process of controlling the flow of information between communications devices For example if data is being sent too quickly from a DT80 to its host computer the computer tells the DT80 to temporarily stop sending data then when the computer has caught up it tells the DT80 to resume sending data See Flow Control r98 Hardware handshaking hardware flow control RTS CTS and software handshaking software flow control XON XOFF are alternative mechanisms of flow control folder Another name for directory format A specific way of organising related information For example the DT80 s internal data memory is for
155. briefly Acquire LED dataTaker 80 Version 4 00 resumes heartbeat flash and if externally powered In3tializing Done Charge LED on dataTaker 80 Version 4 00 IMLELALLZLOO DONDE dataTaker 80 Version 4 00 INMIELALLIZING Done oset All LEDs flash rapidly four times then Acquire LEDdataTaker 80 Version 4 00 resumes heartbeat flash IMItIali21M is DONE SAFE MODE Now using factory default settings Reset will enable user settings No change FORMAT Bs Formatting drive B Please wait Format of drive B successful Heartbeat flash see step 3 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 120 TEST Commands DT80 The TEST commands force the D780 to autozero itself check the functionality of its hardware and return a test report TET Bre Taw y Test results that are out of range are flagged with a FAIL message A typical test report returned when the D780 is in free format mode is shown in the first column of the following table When the DT80 is in fixed format mode less verbose comma separated results are returned Test Report DT80 Health TEST report generated at 2005 09 19 11 49 56 dataTaker 80 Version 5 02 0040 2005 09 15 15 51 36 Serial Number 082005 VEAT Lis V VBAT 6V 6 88 V PASS IBAT 19 mA PASS Volo 1 20 V PASS YLITA 5 87 em y PASS VOD 3227 Su V PASS VANA 3 8V 3 98 V PASS VRELAY 4 5V 4 65 V PASS VREF 2 5V 504 04 mY PASS Lee 1 4 2303 mA PASS Les Ti 2
156. calendar internal channels system variables and so on The decision is a true or false result of an alarm condition test The true false result is also known as the alarm state Instruct the D780 to carry out actions when an alarm tests true These actions can be setting the DT80 s digital state outputs issuing messages or executing commands to change the D780 s operation There are two types of alarm commands P77 e the ALARM command acts once on the transition of the alarm test from false to true single shot alarm e the ALARMR command acts Repeatedly at the schedule interval while the alarm tests true repeating alarm Single shot alarm RA3S ALARM Alarm actions occur once when the alarm becomes true Alarm actions rT rt ft a t f f t F PT Alarm is tested every 3 seconds Repeating alarm RA3S ALARMR Alarm actions occur every 3 seconds while the alarm is true k k k k k k k Alarm actions E E Alarm is tested every 3 seconds Figure 26 Comparing single shot and repeating alarms 3 second schedule example Alarm commands can be included in any report schedule and are processed in sequence with other schedule processes such as reading input channels and performing calculations If an alarm tests true the alarm s actions are executed before control passes to the next process in the schedule The general format of the single shot alarm command is AL
157. can provide sensor excitation current for example for resistance measurement e The Plus and Minus terminals are voltage inputs e The Return terminal is normally used as a common or return terminal It can also be used as a Current input using the DT80 s internal shunt resistor Multiplexers The DT80 s analog input channels are multiplexed The required input terminals are first connected to the input of the DT80 s instrumentation amplifier and analog to digital converter then a measurement is taken The next channel to be UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 15 sampled is then switched through to the amplifier and ADC and so on Channel definition commands in the DT80 program determine which terminals are used for a particular measurement For example the channel definition 1 V measures the voltage between the and terminals on channel 1 Gain Ranges and Attenuators The DT80 s instrumentation amplifier has three switchable gain settings These give three basic voltage measurement ranges 3V 300mV and 30mV full scale The DT80 s default is for its instrumentation amplifier to automatically change gain range to suit the input signal applied to it by the multiplexers If the amplitude of your input signals are known then the gain can be set manually Do this by applying the GLx gain lock channel option which disables autoranging for that channel and sets the gain to a fixed range The analog inputs also in
158. channel AHSC 3 will count in the sequence 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 so after 8 pulses the value 2 will be returned Default value is O do not reset HSC PE R Reset counter is cleared to O after returning its current value 1 2HSC LT Low Threshold select low level input thresholds low threshold 1PE 2mV and high threshold 7mV Not applicable to inputs 3C 4C Connecting to Counter Inputs Warning The DT80 s counter inputs are NOT reverse polarity protected Therefore ensure signal polarity is correct positive to numbered terminals negative to DGND terminals before connecting signals to the DT80 s counter inputs Warning Do not apply more than 30V to inputs 1C 4C Counter input channels 1C 2C and 3C 4C have different electrical characteristics In particular UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 146 e Inputs 1C 2C include selectable TTL or low level input thresholds Low thresholds selected by using the LT channel option allow direct connection to sensors whose output is only a few mV eg inductive pickup flow sensors e Inputs 3C 4C use a standard TTL level Schmitt trigger input Voltage free relay or switch contact closures can be counted on channels 1C 4C by wiring the relay contacts between the input terminal and DGND All inputs include low pass filtering to assist in debouncing mechanical switch or relay inputs For voltage free contact inputs this limits the maximum count rate to approximately 500Hz For ac
159. clude switchable 10 1 attenuators which effectively provide a fourth range 30V Note however that the autoranging process does not affect the attenuator setting Each channel definition command specifies either implicitly or explicitly wnether the attenuators should be on or off Warning Knowledge of the output signal type and magnitude for each sensor is essential Make sure that the input signal to the DT80 does not exceed the input voltage rating As a general rule the voltage on any analog input terminal should be within 30V or 3V depending on whether the channel s attenuators are on or off relative to the AGND terminal Analog Input Configurations The basic quantity that the DT80 measures is voltage Voltages can be measured using two different input configurations e independent analog inputs e shared terminal analog inputs Independent Analog Inputs Sensors and signals connected using the independent configuration are often simply called inputs sometimes also known as basic default unshared differential or double ended inputs An independent input is one that connects to its own terminals and does not share any of those terminals with any other inputs For example in Figure 3 sensor A is connected to channel 1 s and terminals and sensor B is connected to the other two terminals of the channel In other words each sensor s terminals are independent of the other s no t
160. couples Frequently thermocouple measurement junctions are electrically connected by welding brazing soldering or by contact to the object being measured This is only possible if the object is grounded to the DT80 s analog ground terminal AGND See also Ground Loops r22 Accuracy Thermocouple Techniques The accuracy of temperature measurement with thermocouples depends on e the reference junction isothermal characteristics e the reference temperature sensor accuracy e induced electrical noise e the quality of the thermocouple wire e drift in the wire characteristics especially at high temperatures e the basic measurement accuracy of the DT80 e the linearization accuracy of the DT80 The accuracy of temperature measurement with thermocouples is a function of the accuracy of the thermocouple and not of the DT80 Reference Junction Error The most significant source of error is the reference junction The DT80 must not be exposed to non uniform heating because a single reference temperature sensor is used to measure the temperature of the terminals of all channels If a temperature gradient occurs along the terminals errors of the magnitude of the temperature difference occur The DT80 s reference temperature sensor is positioned behind analog channels 2 and 4 Therefore when precise temperature measurements are required attach thermocouples here for the least temperature differential from the data Taker s reference temperature
161. ct of Command Action COMMUNICATIONS PROGRAM JOB Logged Data ONRESET DXC ENVIRONMENT ENVIRONMENT and Logged Startup Job Current Comms Comms Parameters Current Alarms Job Program CVs IVs s Spans and Polynomials Command sent Maintained Maintained Cleared Maintained Not run to the DT80 Connections Soft reset simply clears your current work the program job environment SINGLEPUSH Disconnected Uses Cleared Maintained Run to the DT80 unless for Host PROFILE see Startu RS 232 comms p Hardware Reset One push of the only the DT80 s defaults Job e116 hardware hardware reset Rs 939 see data y button see connection logging singlepush Manual Reset settings matchits system Button 2220 factory defaults below TCP IP is always MN Power Up oes Remove hen disconnected replace all main power external supply and internal main battery Maintained unless internal backup battery is also removed 1 Firm resets like soft reset but DT80 restarts with user defaults and user startup job Three methods of achieving the same result Triple Push Reset Three pushes Disconnected Uses Cleared Maintained Not run unless for Host of the O canine factory hardware reset only the DT80 s defaults button within RS 232 see 10 seconds Tela Factory settings match its see Manual Baa de Ult Defaults Reset Button TCP IP is always P120 P120 di
162. ctively names the function This label will be displayed on the LCD when the user scrolls through the function list It can be no more that 16 characters long If this option is not supplied then up to 13 characters of command text will become the label text as displayed on the LCD commands This can be a list of any white space separated DT80 commands enclosed in braces These commands will be executed when the user selects the associated function from the function list Examples ANA eee se This function would dipslay Start and when selected would issue the G or go command to the the logger which woulds start all schedules cada il This funtion would display Stop and when selected would issue the H or halt command to the logger to stop all schedules yee eee ee e This would display Init and when selected would store the currrent vale of 1V scaled to channel variable 10CV FONT eee A This function would display Clear and would set channel variables 1 20 back to zero Selecting Functions Pressing the Cancel Func key will cause the function list to be shown on the display Once function is shown at a time and only those functions which have been defined are shown The up and down direction keys can be pressed to scroll through the list of functions Once the desired function is visible on the display it can be executed by pressing the OK Edit key If you wish to exit the function list without executing any function then press th
163. curs the DT80 will wake run an event triggered schedule see Trigger on External Event 43 then go back to sleep The count value for a digital input channel can be preset using an expression eg RAIM 8C 1000 RB2S 8C If a 1Hz signal is now applied to input 8D you would expect the values returned every 2s for channel 8C to follow a sequence similar to 1000 1002 1004 1056 1058 1000 1002 Note that a counter s wrap value channel factor is applied when the channel is defined ie when the job is entered not when it is evaluated Also setting the wrap value has the side effect of resetting the count value to zero This implies that e a particular counter s wrap value need only be specified once in the job It does not need to be specified every time the counter is evaluated e f querying a counter using the immediate schedule eg by periodically typing 1C do not specify a wrap value each time Each time you evaluate an immediate channel you are also defining it so the counter value will always be returned as zero if you specify a wrap value each time Using Digital Outputs Channel Types Digital outputs can be used to control external devices using the following channel types In each case n represents the channel number 1 8 x can be either a number CV or expression nDSO x Digital State Output sets the state of digital output nD O low 1 high For example 2DSO 0 sets output 2D low nDNO x Digital Ny
164. d by P14 default is 300 seconds the ports time out and close Are the Ports Protected Simply send the command PASSWORD to determine if a comms port password has been set If the D780 responds with e PASSWORD 0 no password has been set e PASSWORD 1 a password has been set Regardless of the password state the D780 responds to the DEL character with lt lt CR LF This response can be used to determine the baud rate setting of the D780 even when a comms port password is active USB Communications The DT80 s USB interface operates as a virtual COM port With the appropriate drivers installed on the PC the USB link will when connected appear to the PC as an additional COM port 1 The USB port is not yet operational see DT80 USB Communications UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 95 Installing the USB Driver When the DT8O0 is first connected to a PC via USB Windows will search for a suitable driver If no driver is installed on the PC the Windows new hardware wizard will run The exact sequence of events that follows varies somewhat depending on the version of Windows Normally Windows will ask where it should look for a driver Insert the dataTaker resource CD and select the CDROM drive as the driver location when prompted The New Hardware wizard should then be allowed to run to completion You should now have an additional COM port available on the PC We now need to determine what COM port number has bee
165. d is sent to the connected DT80 as a single backslash command that is command and is not interpreted and executed by DeTransfer Coincidentally a number of the Serial Channel commands also have a leading backslash character and if entered into DeTransfer as such are not sent to the connected DT80 Therefore the Serial Channel commands that have a leading backslash character must be entered into the Send window of DeTransfer with a double backslash For example e To send the Serial Channel command le enter We into DeTransfer e Tosend the Serial Channel command r1 enter Wr1 into DeTransfer e Tosend the Serial Channel command w 1000 enter w 1000 into DeTransfer e To send the Serial Channel command 1013 enter 1013 into De Transfer Note that this rule only applies to DeTransfer Although other terminal programs can be used to supervise the DT80 most do not interpret the 1 backslash character and so the Serial Channel backslash commands must be entered as single backslash commands Consult the terminal program s documentation for details Serial Channel Operation The Control String The control string is always enclosed by quotation marks It can be broken into two parts e Output actions commands prompts or text strings that are to be sent from the DT80 to the device connected to the serial channel The various output actions available are detailed in the section All output actions are enclosed by
166. d mode The h switch command selects free format mode which is the default H selects fixed format mode Free Format Mode h In free format mode data is returned as human readable ASCII text Various settings are available to control how the data is presented By default each channel is printed on a separate line prefixed by its name either a standard DT80 channel name e g 3TK or a user specified name e g Inlet temp and followed by appropriate units Thus the following program RA30S 1V Pressure kPa 2TK 5DS Valve state would result in text similar to the following text being sent to the active communications port Pressure 102 3 kPa 2TK 98 0 degC Valve state 1 State Pressure 107 3 kPa ZTR 58 2 degC Valve state 1 State and so on By applying various formatting settings you can get different results One possible example would be n c u T P33 10 RA30S 1V Pressure kPa FF2 2TK FF2 5DS Valve state which would format the data thus 12246300 029 ILER 07 30 1 1234620017 107 34 98 22 il In this example n c u are switch commands 2112 that have been used to switch off output of channel numbers channel names and units The T switch causes each data record to be prefixed by a timestamp P33 10 is a parameter setting 109 that sets each data value to a fixed width 10 characters Finally the FF2 channel option specifies that the channel value is to be rounded to 2 decimal places For more d
167. d start it again by sending the GS command Important Because statistical sampling of channels stops the moment the HS command is sent be aware that the reported statistical summaries do not include data from this halt period This is most significant for the integral summary See also Halting amp Resuming Schedules r49 P49 Multiple Statistical Information for a Channel If more than one type of statistical information is required for a channel then each statistical option must be placed in a separate channel option list see 33 e33 For example the channel list 1TT AV SD MX results in periodic average standard deviation and maximum data for the LTT channel Insufficient Statistical Samples If no statistical data has been scanned before being reported then the reported data value will be set to 9 0e9 a special value that indicates not yet set This will also occur if insufficient samples have been taken for example the standard deviation SD option requires at least two samples to be able to return a value This condition may occur when e the statistical sub schedule is event triggered e the statistical sub schedule has been halted e a Statistical sub schedule scan interval is longer than its statistical report scan interval Example Statistical Report Schedule The command RS10S RA1H 1TT 2TT AV MX sets the statistical sub schedule s scan rate to 10 seconds RS10S and includes statistical samp
168. data can be returned in two different formats e native format e fixed format records Native Format When the DT80 logs data to its internal memory it stores it in fixed size data files one for each schedule These files have a DBD file extension e g DATA_A DBD One way of getting data out of a DT80 therefore is to transfer relevant DBD files to the host computer These files can then be opened using tools such as De View which provides plotting facilities and can export the data in a form that can be loaded into spreadsheets Native format DT80 data files can be transferred to the host by e copying to a USB memory device The simplest way to do this is to send the COPYDATA command or select the Copy Logged Data option from the LCD function menu This will take a snapshot of the stored data from all schedules in the current job and copy it to appropriate directories on the USB memory device e using FTP File Transfer Protocol This would involve taking a snapshot of the data using the ARCHIVE command then using an FTP client program to copy the snapshot files The snapshot or archive files created by COPYDATA or ARCHIVE are compressed versions of the live data files and have names like 2005 04 01T12 42 09 DBD Fixed Format The other way to retrieve logged data is to send an unload command This causes the DT80 to read the data file and output the data in the form of fixed format records as described above For exa
169. datalaher m L z E M DT80 User s Manual Copyright 2005 Datataker P L UM 0085 A0 Warranty Datataker Pty Ltd warrants the instruments it manufactures against defects in either the materials or the workmanship for a period of three years from the date of delivery to the original customer This warranty is limited to the replacement or repair of such defects without charge when the instrument is returned to dataTaker or to one of its authorized dealers This warranty excludes all other warranties either express or implied and is limited to a value not exceeding the purchase price of the instrument Datataker P L shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential loss or damages resulting from the use of the instrument or for damage to the instrument resulting from accident abuse improper implementation lack of reasonable care or loss of parts Where Datataker P L supplies to the customer equipment or items manufactured by a third party then the warranty provided by the third party manufacturer remains Trademarks dataTaker is a registered trademark of Datataker Pty Ltd All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Related Software Products DeLogger DeLogger Pro DeTransfer DeLoad DeView dataTaker ActiveX dataTaker LabVIEW instrument driver DT80 Firmware Covered in This Manual This version of the DT80 dataTaker User s Manual UM 0085 A0
170. ddress a ica 106 EMNENE COMMON AAA ai 106 DTSO EMmermet SCD nds didas 106 DT80 FTP Communications occoccoccconcnnccnccnnccnncnncnnnonnconcnnrnnncnnrnnrnnnrnnrnannrnnrnnrennrnnanas 108 DT80 PPP COMMUNICA MON Scania 108 Part J CONNEC AE OE octets Sale wee a eaa 109 CONTIGUEING the DUG iaa 109 Parameters sca O ERE are E a N 109 Reading Raramelers nina tnt a a e 109 Seting Parameters lo tiaras 109 SWIECIE A O A A O E edaieaktgs 112 VIEWING SWIC Setting S iveco led 112 User startup Detalla AAA 113 User Startup Prode a de a a laches alee 113 USER INI User Initialization Fl Sle es ee 113 PROFILE COMnand Ss muss idos 115 SARUPA ODi ees a ee RIO eee ee tres oem er ee ener ee ee 116 ONRESETD Gap e lO La 116 ONINSER T DXG uscar ta in e 116 Protecting Stanup FIGS as iecesasetee idee na ce a A a o a 117 Setting the DT80 s COCK Calendar ica ius 118 Setting tne DTSO S TIMES os 118 Setind me DTS0S Date nina dis 118 Setting Date and Time Together DT cocoooncccconcccconococonoconcnconanoconanononanononnnnnnnnncenannonas 118 Resetting the DTO uni dis 119 o A E E oR E 119 ManttallRese BUIN da 120 SN A A OR ee 120 LEDs and Messages After a Reset occcocnccccnccncnccocnncocnocancnnancononcnnnnnnnnnonannnnannonannnnnnonanos 120 TEST Commands DT80 ran 121 TesSsCRepOr OTSO eat a gent aeceithasractetioeetesesssmuadeuees 121 EVENTO sase a e 121 Unloading Ne Event LOG iii iS E E 121 Cleaning Me Event LOO rrean a is a 122
171. different electrical characteristics In particular e Inputs 1D 4D include a 47k pull up resistor The default state if nothing is connected is therefore HIGH This in turn means that channels 1 4DS will return 1 if the inputs are not connected e Inputs 5D 8D include a 200k pull down resistor Their default state is therefore LOW 0 So if all 8 inputs are disconnected then 1DB will return 15 000011171 Voltage free relay contact closures can easily be detected on channels 1D 4D by wiring the relay contacts between the input pin and DGND nDS 0 indicates contacts closed nDS 1 indicates contacts open Channels 5D 8D are less suitable for relay contact inputs but they can still be used for example if the contacts are wired between the input pin and an external 3 20V dc supply Actively driven logic signals can be directly connected to input channels 1D 8D subject to the input voltage level specifications detailed below 1D 4D Maximum continuous terminal voltage 30Vdc Minimum continuous terminal voltage 0 6Vdc Note Voltages outside this range can permanently damage the channel Minimum input high voltage Polled input 3 0V Maximum input low voltage Polled input 0 75V 5D 8D Maximum continuous terminal voltage 30Vdc Minimum continuous terminal voltage 0 6Vdc Note Voltages outside this range can permanently damage the channel Minimum input high voltage Polled input 3 0V Maximum input low voltage Polled input 0 75V see WIRIN
172. directory by default The firmware upgrade file is named according to its firmware version number and has a DXF extension for example DT80 5080002 dxf The size of a typical DXF file is 1 to 2MB If you have a choice of upgrade files always use the latest the one with the highest number unless you ve been directed to do otherwise 14 Power the DT80 as described in Recommendation Power above 15 Connect the host computer to the DT80 using USB or RS232 16 Start DeLogger and check that you re using version 2 revision 16 or later from DeLogger s Help menu choose About DeLogger Alternatively start DeTransfer and check that you have version 3 18 or later 17 In DeLogger choose Upgrade Firmware from the dataTaker menu In DeTransfer choose Upgrade Firmware DT80 800 from the File menu 18 In the dialog box that opens select the serial port that will be used to access the DT80 during the upgrade and then click OK 19 In the navigation dialog box that opens locate the firmware upgrade file DT80 5080002 dxf for example highlight it one click and click Open DeLogger looks in the directory C Program Files datataker DeLogger Firmware dt80 by default You can select files in other directories using this dialog box if necessary 20 The upgrade process will now proceed automatically The DT80 s LEDs will flash and the LCD display should indicate that the upgrade is progressing You will notice that the upgrade
173. e see differential voltage r180 Common mode voltage is calculated as the average of the voltages between the measurement system s ground and the two input terminals UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 179 Vin V2 D V1 Vout Vi V2 Figure 76 Common mode voltage VCM and Differential voltage VDiff 2 CR See carriage return r178 crest factor The peak to RMS voltage ratio of an AC signal Crest factor P180 A pure sine wave has a crest factor of 1 414 If the crest factor is less than 1 4 the waveform is flattened if the crest factor is greater than 1 4 the waveform is peaked value value Peak value Crest factor RMS value Figure 77 Crest factor DAC Digital to Analog Converter data acquisition system A measurement system that scans a range of analog and digital channels converts the readings to digital format and forwards the data to a host The host does any storage or data manipulation required See also logging e122 data logging system A data acquisition system with its own on board data storage and manipulation facilities See also logging r182 dataTaker The name of the family of stand alone data logging acquisition and associated equipment manufactured by data Taker Aust Pty Ltd dataTaker releases 1983 dataTakerDT100 1987 dataTaker DT200 199
174. e See Startup Job r116 RUNJOBONRESET JobName Table 4 DT80 Job Commands Pre Job and Post Job Commands See Table 4 DT80 Job Commands r55 These are not stored in the DT80 along with the job The Pre Job and Post Job Commands are run once when the job is sent to the D780 then discarded Only the job is kept in the D780 for re use later Deleting Jobs To delete a job from the D780 firstly unlock the job if it s locked then delete the job s alarms and data Therefore the sequence for deleting a job from the DT80 is e use the appropriate UNLOCKJOB command if the job is locked then e use the appropriate DELALARMS command if the job has logged alarms in the DT80 then e use the appropriate DELDATA command if the job has logged data in the DT80 then e use the appropriate DELJOB command to finally delete the job These commands are presented in Table 4 DT80 Job Commands 255 and Table 14 DT80 Delete Commands Summary 7166 DIRJOBS report indicates locked job indicates current job Logging status On or Of f Number of data records stored Data records storage capacity Alarm record storage capacity Number of alarm records stored DIRJOB JobName report DIR JOB report DIRJOB report Figure 18 Sample DIRJOB reports UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 55 Part E Manipulating Data Channel Options Statistical Useful for reducing data Channels can be sampled frequently
175. e its service life will be significantly reduced Main Battery Life The life of the DT80 s internal main battery depends on e the scan interval e the number of analog channels being scanned e the number of digital channels being scanned e the number of alarms e excitation power drawn by sensors e the complexity of any calculations e communications activity See Always Trying to Sleep e131 and Extending Battery Life e132 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 129 External Power Solar Charging The DT80 s internal main battery can be charged from a 12V solar panel connected to the data Taker data logger s standard power inputs The DT80 provides current and voltage limiting to protect both the panel and battery The size of the solar panel required depends on the hours of full sunlight that can be expected As a general rule only one day in seven should be regarded as a charge day and the charge must be able to fully replenish the batteries on that one day The solar panel rating is calculated as follows lw Panel rating Amps in full sunlight Ty x where I is the Ah per week consumed by the dataTaker T 1s the hours per week of full sunlight n is the efficiency a combination of battery charge absorption and the cosine effect typical value 0 65 Sending P15 1 ensures that the DT80 sleeps whenever possible to conserve power Internal Memory Backup Battery In addition to the internal main battery the
176. e which instructs the D780 to return data in the form Solvent temp 356 21 K Solvent temp 356 35 K y See also Thermistors 7136 Channel Variables nCV Channel variables are memory locations registers for holding floating point data such as channel readings and the result of expressions The D780 has 500 channel variables identified as 1CV to 500CV They can be used e to receive e the data from input channels at the time of scanning e the results of calculations e to pass input channel data and results of calculations to e the host computer e the DT80 s internal memory and USB memory devices e to pass input channel data to expressions See CALCULATIONS EXPRESSIONS 65 e as the test data or as the setpoints in alarms e for temporary storage of date and time and for time based calculations such as elapsed time down time and rates e to trigger report schedules Assigning Readings to Channel Variables A channel variable receives is assigned the current value of any input channel by including the channel variable in a channel option list see Variables 237 Table 3 DT80 Channel Options r38 table For example 1V 2CV returns the voltage for channel 1 and assigns overwrites the voltage value to channel variable 2CV Channel variable assignments are made at the report time of the embracing report schedule They are not made at the statistical sub schedule scan time UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 63
177. e Cancel Func key to cancel the function selection process After selecting the function to execute the display will indicate that the function selected has been initiated Default Functions Following reset the DT80 automatically defines two commonly used functions FUNCTION9 Remove USB REMOVEMEDIA FUNCTION10 Copy logged data COPYDATA These can be redefined or removed if desired UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 92 Keypad operation Direction Keys The up and down direction keys allow scrolling through the available channels alarms and status screens on the display When the function list is shown then the up and down direction keys allows scrolling through the list of available of functions The left and right direction keys are not presently used They will be used in a later version of the firmware that supports editing of values OK Edit Key The OK Edit key is used to select a function to execute when the function list is displayed The edit function will be used in a later firmware version that supports editing of values Cancel Function Key The Cancel Func key is used to enter the function list display It can be pressed again to exit the function list without selecting a function Special Key Sequences Entering Bootstrap Mode Holding down the OK Edit key during the logger reset or power up sequence will force the logger into bootstrap mode This would only be required if there is a corru
178. e Ethernet settings you specify using PROFILE commands IP address IP subnet mask IP gateway and protocol are preserved through resets and full power downs because they re stored in the DT80 s USER INI file which the DT80 maintains in its internal flash memory IP Port Number The DT80 uses IP port number 8 for TCP IP protocol communications Therefore when setting up an Ethernet software connection between the DT80 and say DeTransfer or DeLogger be sure to enter the correct IP port number in the software s port number field Network Adapter Address The DT80 s network adapter address is the physical hardware address of the DT80 s Ethernet port This address is unique for each DT80 and cannot be changed If you need a particular DT80 s adapter address use the EAA command in the table below Don t confuse the DT80 s network adapter address with its IP address they are not the same Ethernet Commands The current Ethernet parameters can be queried using the following commands IP Returns the DT80 s current IP address IPSN Returns the DT80 s current IP subnet mask IPGW Returns the DT80 s current IP gateway EAA Returns the DT80 s Ethernet network adapter address Set at factory read only DT80 Ethernet Setup To configure your DT80 for use on an Ethernet network even for a simple network of one computer and one DT80 using Ethernet carry out the following steps in the order they re presented
179. e LWARN channel type which works in the same way as a digital output channel may be used For example RA1S ALARM1 3TT gt 500 Meltdown SATTN will cause the LED to come on and stay on if the alarm is triggered and RAIS 1CV 1CV 1 10 IF 1CV lt 5 1WARN R 200 1 will give a 200ms flash every tenth time the schedule is scanned UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 94 Part Communications Commands can be sent to and data returned from the DT80 via a number of alternative communications channels e Direct RS232 see DT80 RS 232 Basics 297 DT80 Direct Local RS 232 Connection 2100 e RS232 via modem see DI80 Modem Remote RS 232 Connection r100 e USB see USB COMMUNICATIONS 295 e Ethernet TCP IP see DT80 ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS 2104 e PPP TCP IP over RS232 see DT80 PPP COMMUNICATIONS 2108 In addition the DT80 includes an FTP File Transfer Protocol server so files can be transferred to and from the DT80 using one of the TCP IP communications channels eg Ethernet see DT80 FTP COMMUNICATIONS 2108 Automatic Comms Port Arbitration The DT80 can have more than one type of communications link connected at the same time In this situation the DT80 automatically switches between each link as required responding back through the link from which the most recent communication was received A simple CR carriage return character or LF line feed character received from a l
180. e a data_a dbd The store file at the specified path is moved Where X A K Archive the specified schedule Otherwise all lt Schedule gt schedules are archived Where All store files for the current job are archived lt Job s gt JobName All store files for the named job are archived b jobs jobname a data_a dbd The store file at the specified path is archived MOVE or COPY If this option is not specified then the default is for records to be moved That is records are deleted from the source store file Supplying the MOVE argument is redundant but it does allow the user to be explicit about his intent If the COPY option is supplied then records in the source store file are not deleted when the archive is created For Example COPYDATA Fred Copies all data files from the job Fred including any archived files to the USB memory device ARCHIVE B MOVE Archives Schedule B from each job in the logger and clear the data file The DT80 File System The DT80 uses a DOS style file system for storing logged information data and alarms and system information The file system is transparent to the user and it s not necessary to know about it for general use of the DT80 including when logging data to USB memory devices and unloading data using the DT80 If you intend retrieving data from the USB memory devices see Retrieving Logged Data USB memory device Transfer P73 some knowledge of the DT80 file system
181. e action text is enclosed in single quotes instead of double quotes then the actionText is sent exclusively to the RS232 Host Port on the logger This is useful for communicating with modems when they are in command mode and when the host port is used for other purposes Up to 200 characters of action text can be included in each alarm A total text space of 16384 characters is reserved for all alarms shared with expressions text Note There is no garbage collection in this text space That is new text is appended to existing text in the text space and superseded text is only removed by a system reset The action text is listed in quotes as follows ALARMn test actionText Setting the alarm message switch to z stops the return of the action text to the host see the Table 10 DT80 Switches 113 table This is useful when the action text is only required for a display if fitted The format of the action text returned by an alarm differs for the default free format mode h and fixed format mode H See the examples below Substitution Characters Special substitution characters can be placed into actionText These instruct the D780 to dynamically insert the following information when the alarm returns and or logs its action text Substitutes DT80 serial number followed by a colon and 080035 8 the alarm number UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 80 2C Or c Substitutes channel ID 2PT385 2N Or n Substitutes user c
182. e also Figure 10 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 84 Logging Alarm States Alarm States and Tags The DT80 recognizes these four alarm states transitions e continuing false e false to true e continuing true e true to false When the D780 tests an alarm and logs the alarm record it includes the state transition of the alarm in the form of a numeric tag Continuing false 0 Not used False to true 1 Universal Continuing true 2 Only used by ALARMRn repeating numbered alarms True to false 3 Universal For examples of alarm records containing these tags see the What s Logged column in Logging Alarm States What s Logged What s Returned ees Which States are Logged Choose which alarm states are logged This is controlled by P9 0 None 1 False to true only the DT80 s default 2 True to false only 3 Both The default setting is P9 1 which causes the D780 to only log the false to true transitions For a repeating alarm the alarm state is also logged each time the alarm is tested and is true that is at the alarm s report schedule interval Numbered Alarms Only Alarm states can only be logged for numbered alarms The alarm number identifies these alarms in retrieved alarm data See Alarm Number 27s Where are Alarm States Stored Alarm states are logged in the DT80 s general data storage memory along with data from other sources such as input channels calculations and processes Although
183. e initialised e DSR is active at the time the D780 powers up or is reset When this occurs the DT80 assumes that the attached modem may not have been powered up or reset at the same time as the D780 and therefore needs to be initialised e DSR is active but CD has been inactive for a specified period of time When this occurs the DT80 assumes that the attached modem may be in an error state or locked up and therefore needs to be initialised Even if the modem is not in this state the initialization does no harm Set this period using the MAX _CD_IDLE profile key see MAX _CD_ IDLE r115 the D 80 s default is 12 hours The DT80 initialises the modem by automatically sending the commands and settings specified in the HOST_MODEM 7112 section of the Table 11 D780 PROFILE Details 2115 INIT 114 to the modem when any of the above situations occur Modem Initialization Settings The DT80 s modem is to be initialised with the following settings e Auto answer incoming calls after a specified number of rings default is 4 rings The DT80 does not issue any commands to the modem to answer a call Therefore if dial in functionality is required the modem must be set to auto answer incoming calls The modem command ATS0 4 instructs the modem to automatically answer after four rings e Don t echo commands UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 101 Echo of commands is not required and only serves to confuse the D780 if it attemp
184. e often enough to ensure that the hardware counters can be read before they overflow For example if the average counter input frequency is 100Hz then the DT80 must be programmed to wake at least every 65536 100 seconds about every 10 minutes This can be done by including a 10 minute schedule eg RA1 0M in the job Most of the other comments made above regarding digital input counter channels apply equally to the high speed counter channels For example HSC channels can be preset to a particular starting value eg 2HSC 1CV 10 HSC channels can trigger a schedule when their wrap value is exceeded and so on Examples Pulse Train Output The schedule command RA2S 6DS0 500 R 1 produces a pulse train from channel 6D which is HIGH for 0 5s and LOW for 1 5s Sensor Power Control In the schedule command RA20M D T 4DSO 1000 0 1 4V 4DSO 1 digital state output 4 controls a relay that switches the power supply to a group of sensors Every 20 minutes the sensors are powered up the system waits one second while the sensors settle the sensors are scanned and the sensor power supply is turned off again Manual Control The polled schedule see Trigger on Schedule Specific Poll Command 222 can also be used to switch digital state output channels For example the command RBX 3DSO 5500 R 0 turns a load connected to channel 3D ON for 5 5 seconds when an XB poll command is received Frequency Measurement The R channel option can b
185. e specific to the serial channel channel factor Maximum time to wait for serial data to be received Default is 10s This value is a floating point number so a value of 0 1 will set the timeout to 100ms RS232 or Specifies the communication standard Default is RS232 RS422 or These options are mutually exclusive RS485 e All serial channel commands within a job must select the same communications standard RS232 RS422 or RS485 e Ifthe standard UserName UserUnits channel option Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 232 is specified it must come after the control string in the list of serial channel options DeTransfer Use a Double Backslash Important The DeTransfer program which is often used to supervise the DT80 has a number of commands that have a leading backslash character see the DeTransfer Help The backslash character indicates to DeTransfer that the following command is to be interpreted and executed by DeTransfer For example e w3 instructs DeTransfer to wait 3 seconds before communicating again with the dataTaker e t instructs DeTransfer to read the computer clock and format a current time string e 013 instructs DeTransfer to send the single character carriage return to the connected dataTaker The DeTransfer backslash commands are not sent to the connected data Taker However DeTransfer has an escape mechanism to do this if a command is preceeded by a double backslash that is command the comman
186. e used to measure the frequency of an input signal eg RA1S 1HSC R RS will return the frequency in Hz of an input signal on channel 1C while RA10S 1HSC R RS will do the same thing but resolve down to 0 1Hz This technique can also be used for the digital input channels 1D 8D eg RA1S 7C R RS will return the frequency in Hz of an input signal on channel 7D in the range 1 30Hz UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 147 SERIAL CHANNEL The DT80 s Serial Channel see Figure 52 e142 can be used to connect to serial input and or output devices such as a serial sensor GPS terminal printer barcode reader display panel PLC or even to another data Taker The Serial Chamnel e can transmit programmable prompt or poll messages to serial devices and interpret their replies e can respond to asynchronous incoming serial messages Incoming data can wake the logger from sleep mode e canbe configured for either the RS 232 RS 422 or RS 485 comms standard RS 232 supports a single point to point connection the other standards support multiple devices in a multi drop configuration e has a differential transmitter and receiver that provide for the different serial standards e has RTS CTS handshake lines RS232 only e supports baud rates of 50 to 115200 baud Connecting to the Serial Channel The DT80 serial channel terminals have different functions depending upon the configured serial standard RS232 RS422 or RS4
187. ead for conversion For example with the above example s input data LSERIAL S2d 1CV will result in 1CV 12 3 456 left in receive buffer The default for most of the conversions except c and b is to keep reading characters until an invalid character is read That s why the integer conversions in the above example stop when the character is seen UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 153 The default width value for c and b is 1 with this setting the two conversions behave identically However if width is specified then e for Sc only the last character is read preceding characters are skipped e for Sb the specified number of characters are treated as a multi byte binary word in big endian most significant byte first format Note that due to the limited precision of CVs the maximum practical width value is 3 24 bits For example with 123 456 input data 1SERIAL 1c 1CV gt 1CV 49 23 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL 2c 1CV gt 1CV 50 3 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL 3c 1CV gt 1CV 51 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL 1b 1CV gt 1CV 49 23 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL 2b 1CV gt 1CV 12594 49 256 50 3 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL 3b 1CV gt 1CV 3223859 49 65536 50 256 51 456 left in receive buffer Important If width is not specified then the incoming data must be terminated by a non matching character otherwise the serial channel will continue
188. ectory Structure of USB memory devices The same directory structure is used in DT80 USB memory devices except that it s all contained in a higher order directory folder named SNxxxxxx where xxxxxx is the serial number of the DT80 see Figure 25 73 If the USB memory device has been inserted into more than one DT80 the card contains a serial number directory for each DT80 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 72 DTS8O0 serial number folders One for each DT80 that the USB memory device has visited 5N010062 ea i JOBS a lU ex6_3 A a SNo10075 Individual Schedule Folder a a JOBS Individual Job folder El Ey TEMPI DBD files containing the i 5 2005 09 13T12 20 09 DBD results of a single download 5 B 2005 09 13T12 23 19 DBD This includes all E TEMP measurement data and alarm Ga data These files can be O B opened using dataTaker software applications a E TEMP3 includining DeView Figure 24 Typical structure DT80 USB memory device Explorer style view To retrieve data USB memory devices can be read directly by a Windows computer with a USB interface Size of Data Files To see the size of logged data and logged alarms files send the DIRTREE B command internal memory or DIRTREE A command USB memory device to the DT80 or by inserting the USB memory device into PC and looking at the file size in Windows Explorer Alternatively Storage Status 270 explains how to get similar information
189. eep the D780 only wakes for example when e ascheduled scan becomes due e animmediate scan is sent e aUSB drive is inserted or removed e the wake terminal is pulled to logic low see e communication arrives at the Host RS 232 port see Comms Wakes the DT80 r100 e communication arrives at the Serial Sensor Port see Comms Wakes the DT80 100 e the CT line is asserted on the Serial Sensor Port see Comms Wakes the DT80 100 Exceptions If the DT80 is externally powered or connected to an Ethernet network it never sleeps There are also other exceptions See No Sleep Conditions 2131 below Always Trying to Sleep Sleep Conditions For maximum life when the D780 is powered only by its internal main battery the D780 goes to sleep when ALL of the following conditions exist e No external channel measurement is scheduled for the next four seconds e No communication has arrived at the D780 s Host RS 232 port within the last 30 seconds e The DT80 s Host RS 232 port RI Ring Indicator Pin 9 has not been asserted within the last 30 seconds e No communication has arrived at the DT80 s serial sensor port or CTS changes to active within the last 30 seconds e No reset of the D780 has occurred within the last 30 seconds e To override the default operation listed above e setting P15 2 see Controlling Sleep 2132 below e rapid scanning see Extending Battery Life e132 below e setting P55 so that specific sc
190. ees a small amount of DT80 memory USER string DATATAKER FTP username for read write access PASSWORD string DATATAKER FTP password for read write access Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details Important Characters used within strings ARE case sensitive Therefore ALL settings should be in case shown usually uppercase Deleting USER INI Delete the working copy of USER INI from the DT80 s internal memory by sending DELUSERINI A new USER INI will be created the next time you send a PROFILE command See also Deleting the Backup Files from Flash 117 to remove the copy of USER INI that was automatically created by the DT80 PROFILE Commands The following PROFILE commands are available for reading and modifying the contents of the USER INI file PROFILE section key string Sets the value of section s key in USER INI to string UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 115 PROFILE section key Returns the current value of section s key in USER INI TYPE B INI USER INI Displays the entire USER INI file PROFILE section key Removes sections key PROFILE section key Sets the value of section s key to the empty string PROFILE Returns the The currently active currently active profile settings may be settings different from the PROFILE section Returns section s settings in USER INI currently active settings where section is the DT80 sub system See the Table key is the sub category of the 11 DT80 sectio
191. efault settings e The second channel 3R includes the 4W channel option which specifies that a 4 wire resistance measurement should be taken e Finally the 2 V channel is in this case used to read a speed sensor which outputs a voltage that is directly proportional to speed 10mV per km h The O 1 channel option is the channel factor which for a voltage channel is interpreted as a simple scaling factor mV 0 1 km h The GL3V gain lock option tells the DT80 to select the 3V measurement range rather than auto ranging The last two options concern the presentation of the data on the LCD display and in returned real time data when in free format h mode In particular they define the channel name and units and specify that no decimal places be displayed FFO The channel s data will therefore be returned displayed as Speed 72 km h instead of the default LY T213 MV Only certain channel options can be applied to each channel type If an inappropriate channel option is applied or an incompatible combination of options the D780 notifies by returning an E3 Channel option error message The same channel can be put in the list more than once with the same or different channel options The D780 treats each occurrence as a separate measurement A Special Channel Option Channel Factor The DT80 s channel factor channel option is simply a floating point number This number is interpreted in different ways depending on the cha
192. equence follow the order then where valid for the channel type For example Sequence is equuivalentto gt gt 1 4V 1V 2V 3V 4V i A I 1 I 1 I 1 I 2 I 2 I 2 I 2 I 3 I 3 I 3 I 1 3 R 3W 1 R 3W 1 R 3W 2 R 3W 2 R 3W 3 R 3W 3 R 3W Channel Types The following table lists all of the channel types supported by the DT80 For each channel type the table shows e the channel type mnemonic eg HV Remember that in most cases this will be prefixed by a channel number Refer to Channel Numbers 225 for details of the allowable range of channel numbers for each channel type e whether the channel type is writable shown in the Channel Type column Writable channel types can be assigned a value eg 2C 200 e the default channel options for this channel type These override the standard default values shown in the channel option table See also Channel Options P32 e what the channel factor does for this channel type e the units in which data will be returned By default the indicated units string will be shown on the display and appended to free format returned data although it can be overridden if required e references to typical wiring configuration diagrams for the channel type Voltage Voltage V T scaling mV Figure 54 V1 Wiring for input ranges are 3V Note 1 factor shared terminal voltage 300mV amp 30mV input P158 amp Figure 55 V2 Higher Voltage HV A scaling V Wiring for independent
193. er you reconnect the host computer state Of an alarm the true false result of an alarm test The actual states or transitions recognized by the DT80 are e continuing false e false to true e continuing true e true to false See Alarm States and Tags e5 SWFC Software flow control XON XOFF Also known as software handshaking See flow control 2181 A device using software flow control will stop transmitting if an XOFF character is received and will resume when an XON character is received switch Full name switch command A software control A two state ON or OFF command that changes a DT80 internal setting For example sending the switch command R to the DT80 turns ON the return of data to the host computer switch and sending r turns it OFF See Switches 21 2 for a complete listing syntax error An error in the order arrangement or spelling of the components of a command TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol A commonly used family of communication protocols TCP IP protocols are used on the DT80 s Ethernet interface and can also be used on an RS232 link if PPP is enabled All TCP IP protocols allow data to be transported across a local area network or the Internet TCP Transmission Control Protocol TCP is the default TCP IP protocol used by the DT80 to communicate over an Ethernet or PPP link TCP provides e flow control prevents data being sent faster than it can be received
194. erage maximum and minimum into channel variables 1CV 2CV and 3CV respectively Results of Expressions Channel variables can also be assigned the results of expressions see CALCULATIONS EXPRESSIONS 265 For example the command 3CV 1 COS 2CV 1 141 evaluates the expression and assigns the result to 3CV Channel Variables as Triggers Channel variables can be used as report schedule triggers See Trigger on Internal Event 223 Using Channel Variables Channel variables are used in the same way as channels within schedules and alarms Channel options can be used to modify the function and data format of channel variables For example the commands RAIM 3CV H 1 10 100 122CV SQRT 6CV 7CV RB1H 100 119CV instruct the D780 to evaluate the SORT expression and apply the result to the histogram H every minute RA1M and return the accumulated histogram data to the host every hour RB1H Channel variables are not normally returned with units text however units can be defined using polynomials Polynomials Yn e62 or UserName UserUnits channel options name unit 38 For example Y20 0 1 0 kPa 11CV Y20 SQORT 4CV 6CV AT AT Channel variables can be used in Channel variables are useful when comparing an input channel against several thresholds For example IF 1V 1CV gt 0 5 Over 0 5 Volts IF 1CV gt 0 6 Over 0 6 Volts IF 1CV gt 0 7 Over 0 7 Volts where channel 1V is sampled once
195. erence between the two sensors is the wet bulb depression The choice of temperature sensors is critical if reasonable accuracy is required at high relative humidity where the wet bulb depression is small If platinum RTDs are used as in Example Humidity Measurement e120 above they should have good accuracy or matching 0 2 C Good accuracy can also be achieved by use of a temperature difference sensor such as a thermocouple or thermopile Measure the dry bulb with a standard grade temperature sensor and subtract the difference sensor reading to obtain the wet bulb temperature The sensors are normally placed within a radiation screen to prevent radiant heat affecting the readings This is particularly important for outdoor applications Example Humidity Measurement The following program reads two RTDs and calculates the relative humidity with an accuracy of a few percent for temperature above 5 C and over most of the relative humidity range the algorithm assumes that the sensors are ventilated but not aspirated Y1 6 1 0 44 0 014 2 71E 4 2 73E 6 2 75E 8 SVP polynomial BEGIN RA5S 1PT385 Dry bulb 4W 1CV 2PT385 Wet bulb 4W 2CV 3CV Y1 W 1CV 4CV Y1 W 2CV 5CV RH FF1 4CV 0 8 1CV 2CV 3CV END Analog Logic State Inputs The nAS channel type configures analog channel n to detect an input voltage relative to a threshold e When the input is above the threshold a 1 is returned e Whe
196. eriods designated by a beginning and end date and time which you must specify in the DT80 s fixed format style YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 0 ssssss ISO date format which overrides the DT80 s current P31 and P39 settings Ax Returns the current job s alarms for report schedule x Ax from Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting from date or date time Ax from to Returns the current job s alarms for schedule x starting from date or date time and ending with date or date time A JobName x Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x A JobName x from Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from date or date time A JobName x from to Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from date or date time and ending with date or date time Table 7 Alarm Unload Commands AT where from can be Note Type time and date in date start from first alarm logged at or after this date fixed format ISO style see date time start from first alarm logged at or after this examples below date and time to can be date end with last alarm logged on this date date time end with last alarm logged on this date prior to this time These commands are also listed in Summary Retrieval Commands r166 Examples A Unload Command Here s the A from command showing valid forms of the fixed format style date and time A 2000 07 26 12 30 00 0 250366 A 2000 07
197. erminal is used by both sensors Figure 3 Wiring one or two independent inputs to a single channel voltage inputs used as example For an independent input the signal voltage is measured between a pair of terminals and neither terminal is necessarily at ground potential Note that each analog input channel can support two independent voltage inputs In the above example the channel definition 1V will read sensor A while 1 V will read sensor B The channel definition syntax is fully described in Channels PE Shared Terminal Analog Inputs Sometimes called single ended inputs a shared terminal input is one that shares one or more of its terminals with another input For example in Figure 4 16 the three sensors share channel 1 s terminal Each of the three inputs is a shared terminal input Figure 4 Shared terminal voltage inputs sharing a channel s 4 terminal voltage inputs used as example In a shared terminal configuration a sensor s return or negative wire is usually connected to the channel s terminal The remaining sensor wire the positive or signal is connected to any of the channel s other three terminals For shared terminal inputs the channel number is given a suffix indicating the terminal to which the positive wire is connected For example a shared terminal Voltage input applied to channel 1 between the and terminals Figure 4 r162 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual P
198. ery and programming using removable USB memory devices The method of deployment influences the fine tuning of the D 80 s programming As a general rule it is better to recover data as often as reasonably possible so that sensor failures program faults and so on are detected earlier Fundamental Inputs and Ranges The DT80 can directly measure the following fundamental inputs e voltage e current e resistance e frequency e digital input state e pulse count e phase encoder position Many other quantities can be measured by connecting appropriate sensors which convert a physical quantity into something that the DT80 can measure The DT80 directly supports e 4 20mA current loop sensors 0 to 100 e temperature sensors thermocouples RTDs thermistors IC sensors e bridges and strain gauges This list can be extended by means of user specified scaling calculations Fundamental Input Ranges The following table lists the available measurement ranges and resolutions for the fundamental input types DC Voltage 30 mV 0 25 uV 300 mV 2 5 uV 3000 mV 25 uV 30 V 250 uV DC Current 0 3 mA 2 5 nA Internal Shunts 100Q 3 mA 25 nA 30 mA 250 nA External Shunts typically 20 200 any range depends on shunt Resistance 100 O 1 5 MQ 1000 O 15 mQ 10 000 Q 150 mQ Frequency 0 1 to 20 000 Hz 0 0002 Digital Bit 0 or 1 1 Counter 2 147 483 648 to 1 count UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 14 2 147 483 647 counts Phase Encoder 2 147 483
199. es for storing alarmsfor this schedule nR Allocate space for n alarm records for this schedule Note 1 These are only valid for time triggered schedules not for polled or event triggered schedules Furthermore if the schedule rate is changed after the job has started running then the storefile may no longer contain data for the indicated time span Default Schedule Options All schedule options are optional Default settings are e Destination is B internal flash drive e New data and alarms overwrite earlier data alarms once the store file fills UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 40 e Space allocated for data is 1MB e Space allocated for alarms is 100KB Examples RA F red DATA NOV 15D 15M Schedule A is given the name Fred Data and alarms are stored on the internal drive and sufficient space is allocated for 15 days worth of readings based on a 15 minute scan rate In this case earlier data is considered more valuable than later data so no overwrite mode is selected If any alarms are defined in this schedule they will use the default storage parameters 100KB overwrite enabled Schedule Trigger Schedule Trigger All schedules have a trigger which defines when the schedule is to execute the processes assigned to it Here are the DT80 s schedule triggers An interval of time See Trigger on Time Interval 42 Triggers can also be conditional porn arn external or internal state An external event See Trigger on E
200. etails on the various options for controlling the presentation of free format data P38 Fixed Format Mode H Fixed format mode is designed for use with data Taker host software Data is still returned in ASCII form but the record format is fixed to allow it to be easily parsed by a computer If H is specified then both of the above examples will return data as D 081044 JOB1 2003 03 29 2145200 0 029368 17Ay 0 102 3220 97 97991 1200717 065F D 051044 J081 2005 03 29 14146230 0 0170S2 17570 107 3411 95 22000 17 00717 JBEB In fixed format mode e all formatting commands e g FF2 n channel names are ignored fixed settings are used e all records are prefixed by a header which specifies that this is a data record D from DT80 serial number 081044 running a job called JOB1 This is followed a timestamp date time and sub second time The 1 indicates that this is real time data the A identifies the schedule and the 0 is the index within the schedule of the first data value e floating point data values are always specified to 7 significant digits e each record includes an error detection code CRC on the end This allows host software to reject corrupted records Data records such as the above are only one of several types of fixed format message A comprehensive description of all fixed format message types is beyond the scope of this manual UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 21 Logged Data Logged
201. events Another schedule RX can only be polled by the host computer or by a command from the logger itself DT80 Job Channel List A wide range of channel type provides support for most sensors Options allow custom configurations Channel lists sent to the DT80 without a schedule header return data immediately they are not logged Post Job commands Not kept in the DT80 with the job Schedule Header The schedule ID RC plus file information including the size of the data file 365D i e 365 Days of data and the overright OV or non overright NOV of memory the schedule trigger 15M Alarms P133 detect out of range conditions Can also be used to alter D780 function reschedule timing and control D780 outputs and event annunciation Logging Global data logging is enabled by the LOGON Scan control commands Schedules can be globally or individually started G GA GB or halted H HA HB All commands Uppercase and lowercase characters are accepted except for switches Must be separated by one or more spaces or carriage returns Not processed until the carriage return is received Figure 17 Anatomy of a sample DT80 program Multiple Jobs in one program When two or more jobs are sent in a program that is all at once they can work like subroutines For example if an out of range measurement triggers an alarm in the current job it can call load and run another job that has been written
202. f gt When Xw command is executed show contents of receive buffer before and after the wait period WaitBefore contents of receive buffer lt EndofBuf gt WaitAfter contents of receive buffer lt EndOfBuf gt P56 4 Show contents of transmit buffer before and after transmission Transmit b contents of transmit buffer lt EndOfBuf gt Transmit a contents of transmit buffer lt EndOfBuf gt P56 8 Returns type of parsing scan effected each time data is parsed d Scan Integer ScanControl f Scan Real ScanControl s Scan String ScanControl P56 16Indicates where a 1SERIAL control_string command failed P56 32 Shows the contents of the receive buffer after a trigger NullTrig contents of receive buffer lt EndofBuf gt CharTrig contents of receive buffer lt EndOfBuf gt Combinations of debug information can be returned by combining those required in the P56 setting For example setting P56 17 shows contents of the receive buffer P56 1 when each character is read and where the 1SERIAL control_ string was in error if an error occurred P56 16 Error Messages If the DT80 is in free format mode h any syntax error message for the serial command string will include a reference to the error s position in the command string Serial Loopback A useful technique for testing your parsing commands is to implement a serial loopback in the RS 232 mode Simply connect the Rx and Tx terminals together and then send strings out
203. fix is required for most channel types This specifies which channel to measure In the above example we are measuring digital channel 2 analog channel 3 analog channel 2 and internal variable 9 e channel options are enclosed in round brackets after the channel type and further specify how the channel is to be measured and processed In the above example the 3R 2 V and 9CV channels have user specified options the 2DS channel does not e some channel types are writable eg internal variables and digital output channels and therefore allow a value to be assigned using an expression In the above example the 9CV channel definition contains an expression Channel Numbers A DT80 channel number identifies a particular channel within a certain class of channels The following table lists the various classes of DT80 channels As can be seen each class has its own range of channel numbers analog 1 4 1 4 V HV I L R BGI BGV AS F Tx AD5xx CU NI LMx35 plus optional LMxx PT3xx TMPxx Ysxx modifier digital 1D 8D 1 8 C DB DBO DN DNO DS DSO counter 1C 4C 1 4 HSC 1 2 PE 1PE uses terminals 1C 2C 2PE uses 3C 4C relay RELAY 1 RELAY LED Attn 1 WARN serial 1 SERIAL channel variable internal 1 500 CV system variable internal 1 53 SV string internal 1 10 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 25 timer internal 1 4 ST special internal no number D T DELAY CMRR IBAT R100 REFT VANA VBAT VC VDD VEXT VLITH VREF VRELAY VSYS VZERO The
204. g Schedules Sometimes the serial device connected to the Serial Channel returns data unsolicited and so the program must be capable of responding to the device at any time Any schedule Ra can be defined to trigger on the receipt of specified characters at the Serial Channel as follows RalSERIAL 1SERIAL This will trigger the schedule when the specific text string text is received The text string may contain control characters in char or nnn notation The text string may also be blank Ra1SERIAL 1SERIAL m in which case any character receiv ed into the Serial Channel produces a trigger Whenever the Serial Channel produces a trigger by either of these methods the receive buffer will contain the string that caused the trigger ready to be processed by a 1ISERIAL command Serial Sensor Power Control If the current job contains no 1SERIAL commands then the serial channel interface is automatically switched off to conserve power If the current job does contain LSERIAL commands then serial channel will be continuously powered The LSSPORT command allows you to turn power to the interface on and off under program control e g AATF 1 AAPAN T ara AT 1Wf xrr10 w PA NTT WS e COAT KAD MT A RA1H 1SSPORT 1 1SERIAL X 3d 1CV ISSPORT 0 will once an hour switch on the serial channel poll and read an integer from a serial device then switch off the serial channel Serial Channel State As ment
205. g errors due to a drift in the input offset of a measuring system Also called zero correction base date and time The DT80 s base date is 0 00 00 on 01 01 1989 All timestamps are stored as offsets from this point in time bit The smallest unit of information in a computer A bit has a single value either O or 1 Computers generally store information and execute instructions in bit multiples called bytes brackets and braces Delimiters bps bits per second a measure of data transfer rate bridge A sensitive and stable means of measuring small changes in resistances They are particularly useful when applied to strain gauges as found in pressure sensors and load cells See Bridges 132 buffer An area of memory where data is held temporarily until the system is ready for it or in case it is needed in the future byte A unit of information that is eight bits long carriage return Also known as a return usually abbreviated to CR The DT80 s default is to suffix each scan s data with a carriage return see P24 110 Symbol In the ASCII character set a carriage return has a decimal value of 13 channel definition A channel s ID followed by any channel options in round brackets See Figure 6 P39 channel ID A channel s number and type eg 3TK See Components of a typical schedule command P39 channel list A list of channel definitions within one report schedule channel settling time The time a
206. ger decimal hex octal integer 1SERIAL S 1CV gt 1CV 123 456 nothing left in receive buffer 1SERIAL d 1CV gt 1CV 123 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL x 1CV gt 1CV 291 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL o 1CV gt 1CV 73 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL i 1CV gt 1CV 123 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL c 1CV gt 1CV 49 23 456 left in receive buffer 1SERIAL b 1CV gt 1CV 49 23 456 left in receive buffer character OC Q PO X Q Hm binary no conversion s string 1SERIAL s 1 gt 1 aaba cxyab nothing left in receive buffer terminated S string whitespace 1SERIAL S 1 gt 1 aaba cxyab left in receive buffer terminated chars string containing 1SERIAL abc 1 gt 1 aaba c xyab J left in receive buffer only specified chars chars string not 1SERIAL bc 1 gt 1 aa ba cxyab left in receive buffer containing specified chars e The i conversion assumes that the value is hexadecimal if it starts with Ox or 0X octal if it starts with 0 zero otherwise decimal e The conversion will accept numbers in standard eg 12 39904 or exponential eg 1 239904e01 format e The c and b conversions treat the characters as 8 bit binary values So the character 1 ASCII 49 will result in the value 49 being stored in the CV Width The optional width value specifies the maximum number of characters to r
207. greater than n Show value as a bargraph on the display Allows channel name and or units to be overridden for display and free format h real time data Max 16 characters for user specified channel name 8 characters for units Page 38 Part C Schedules schedule Concepts Tell the D780 what to do and when to do it What are Schedules Schedules full name schedule commands are the workhorses of the DT80 They are the underlying structures that you use to manage the repetitive processes of the D780 such as e scanning input channels e evaluating calculations e processing alarms e managing output channels e returning data to a host computer e logging data The DT80 supports the following schedules e 11 general purpose schedules A K which can be triggered by a variety of different events e apolled schedule X which is normally triggered by a poll command from the host computer although most of the other triggers can also be applied to it making it effectively a q2 general purpose schedule e the immediate schedule which executes once immediately after being entered e the statistical schedule which collects and accumulates data to be returned as statistical summaries by the other schedules Schedule Syntax A typical schedule definition is shown below Schedule Schedule Schedule Options Schedule Channel List ID Name Trigger Figure 6 Components of a typical schedule command A schedule consists of a
208. h number between 1 and 254 the node number we recommend you start with 1 as the fourth number vii At the flashing DOS prompt type PING then a space then the network number found in iii above then a period then the number 1 PING 192 168 30 1 for example then press the Enter key on your keyboard 1 Ifa Destination host unreachable message appears the IP address 192 168 30 1 is not in use on the network and you may use it for the DT80 2 Ifa Reply from message appears the address is currently in use on the network and you can t use it for the DT80 In this case type the PING command again at the DOS prompt but with a different last digit UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 106 PING 192 168 30 2 for example and press Enter Repeat this procedure changing the last digit each time until the Destination host unreachable message appears to indicate that you ve found an unused IP address viii When you ve identified an unused IP address write it down and go to step 2 2 Communicate with the DT80 using RS 232 4 RS 232 gt Figure 37 Ethernet setup RS 232 communication first a _ Using the DT80 s Host RS 232 port not Ethernet connect the DT80 to a computer and establish Host RS 232 communication using say DeTransfer software Do not connect the DT80 to the Ethernet network yet 3 Add the IP address to the DT80 s initialization file Send PROFILE commands
209. hannel name Boiler U Or u Substitutes user channel units Deg C 2V Or v or Substitutes the data value when the alarm tested true Lhe Substitutes the time that the action text was returned 122 Loc 14 034 in P39 and P40 format Substitutes the date that the action text was returned E ce eA O in P31 format R Or r Substitutes relation gt 50 0 2 2 Substitutes question mark Substitutes exclamation mark ee Substitutes symbol HH Substitutes symbol ncv Substitutes the current value of the specified channel variable where ncv is the number of the channel variable 1 to 500 For example 3 instructs the D780 to substitute the contents of 3CV into the alarm action text You can also specify the format and number of decimal places see Output Format 237 For example 3F inserts the value of 3CV in fixed point format 3E inserts the value of 3CV in exponential format 3M1 inserts the value of 3CV in mixed format with 1 decimal place Some of these characters are especially useful with SMS messaging Any of the ASCII control characters A to Z can also be included in action text Some useful control characters are G Bell M Carriage return J Line feed b Quotation mark Example Action Text in Free Format Mode h When the D780 is in free format mode P21 the action text in the alarm command ALARM8 test Boiler Pressure is V U at Q M J instructs the D780 to return an alarm record of t
210. he D780 the CV and DSO assignments lines 2 3 and 4 are made exactly as if the three lines were sent as separate immediate schedules Time Triggers Synchronizing to Midnight Time triggers for report schedules function in two different ways depending on the setting of the synchronize to midnight switch s or S see 7113 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 48 Synchronize To Midnight Switch Enabled If the synchronize to midnight switch is enabled S the DT80 s default the intervals of all schedules with time triggers are synchronized to the previous midnight When a time triggered schedule is entered the schedules first run on the next multiple of the interval since last midnight and subsequently run on every multiple of the interval thereafter If the interval is not an even multiple of 24 hours the D780 inserts a short interval between the last run of the schedule prior to midnight and the next run of the schedule at midnight For example if you send the schedule RA10H to the DT80 at 06 00 00 it first runs at 10 00 00 4 hours since entry but 10 hours since midnight and then at 20 00 00 that day then at 00 00 00 10 00 00 and 20 00 00 the next day and so on Synchronize To Midnight Switch Disabled If the synchronize to midnight switch is disabled s the schedules run at intervals relative to the time that the schedule is entered For example if the schedule RA10H is sent to the D780 at 09 30 00 it fir
211. he DT80 to log an alarm record when the alarm occurs and another alarm record when the alarm recovers because P9 is set for both transitions The action text Warning v u is logged for the false to true transition and ALARMn FALSE is logged for the true to false transition The two records have the form A BUALO 2001 01 12 07 020 40 0 1882 l2 Cr Warning 53 det 0066 15Cc4 and 2 20416 2001 04 12 07120102 0 216922 o pa ALARMS FALSE 00677 BSDC Logging Alarm States What s Logged What s Returned For the four types of alarm commands the following table summarises the alarm information that is included in the logged alarm state records and returned in realtime to the host computer Alarm Command ALARM test actionText ALARMn test actionText ALARMR test actionText ALARMRn test actionText State Transition Continuing low False to true Continuing high True to false Continuing low False to true Continuing high True to false Continuing low False to true Continuing high True to false Continuing low False to true Continuing high True to false Parameter 9 P9 1 or 3 P9 2 or 3 P9 1 or 3 P9 2 or 3 What s Logged Timestamp n 1 action Text Timestamp n 3 ALARMn FALSE Timestamp n 1 action Text Timestamp n 2 action Text Timestamp n 3 action Text FALSE What s Returned See Example actionText Action Text in Free Format Mode h 281 and E
212. he USB port V volt a unit of electrical potential voltage version number The version number of the DT80 s firmware consists of a major number a minor number and a build number see Figure 79 P187 Major number Minor number Build number 4 03 0001 ee Version number Figure 79 Version number components XON XOFF Transmitter on transmitter off Control characters used for software flow control SWFC instructing a device to start transmission XON and end transmission XOFF YSI Yellow Springs Instruments YSI Incorporated 1725 Brannum Lane Yellow Springs Ohio 45387 800 765 4974 937 767 7241 Fax 937 767 9353 www ysi com zero correction See autozeroing Index iF ce 4 wire BGV input 162 Boolean Expressions 51 if eee 4 wire LM135 series 164 brackets and braces 178 IK iiz inputs Bridges 27 35 IR 20 113 6 wire BGV input 161 108 103 113 6 Wire BGV Inputs 139 161 138 138 IS PSE A Unload 88 168 161 161 IZ 113 Command 178 25SV 32 103 Adaptive Scheduling 82 Buffer 178 2SV m Alarm Logging States 85 Byte 178 e Alarm Unload 88 Calculations 61 63 64 mpat ne Alarms 77 77 84 Expressions a e 4 Wire 35 84 86 86 Cautions 46 110 4 20mA Current ee Analog Channels 15 16 157 St i a Schedule 48 49 rigger Loops Analog Sub System 141 182 99 AW 35 ASCII Channel Factor f f 61 4 Wire BGI Input 139 162 Bit 178 Chane tists UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual
213. he form Boiler Pressure is 1 563MPa at L4 32501 23964 on each false to true transition of the alarm includes current value units text and time that alarm occurred No action text is issued on the true to false transition Example Action Text in Fixed Format Mode H When the DT80 is in fixed format mode P21 the action text in the same alarm command structs the DT80 to return an alarm record of the form A 080035 Boll r 1 2001 04 16 14 32701 2540 0 78 1 Boiler Pressure is 1 563MPa at 14 3 01 23964 M JI 0102 3D095 on each false to true transition of the alarm includes current value units text and time that alarm occurred where A signifies that this is an Alarm record 080035 is the DT80 s serial number Boller l is the name of the job containing the alarm 2000 04 16 14 32 01 25487 is the date and time of the alarm record 8 is the alarm number P78 is the name of the schedule containing the alarm 1 is the alarm state 1 false to true 2 continuing true 3 true to false see Alarm States and Tags r85 Boller Pressure if 1 gt 63KPa aL is the action text basse Uae ood Ti o See also Figure 10 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 81 0102 3D95 are communications error checks record character count checksum No action text is issued on the true to false transition Alarm Action Processes Shown as actionProcesses in the alarm command ALARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProce
214. he state of a relay or logic signal or e adigital output for driving a relay or other control device Warning Beware of conflicts when using the DT80 s bi directional digital channels 1D to 8D For example if a device such as a PLC is actively driving one of these channels and you program the DT80 to also drive the same channel as an output for example 1DSO 0 then a conflict exists This has the potential to damage the digital channel or the driving source We recommend placing a series resistor between the digital channel and the signal source to limit the current that can be driven into the channel When choosing the resistor s value and power rating be sure to consider the source s output voltage drive current and operating frequency Using Digital Inputs Channel Types Digital inputs can be monitored using the following channel types In each case n represents the channel number 1 8 nDS Digital State returns the state of digital input nD O low 1 high nDN Digital Nybble returns the state of four consecutive digital inputs starting at nD as a 4 bit number 0 15 For example if channel 3DN returns the value 13 binary 1101 then this indicates that input 3D is high 4D is low 5D is high and 6D is high nDB Digital Byte returns the state of all eight digital inputs as an 8 bit number 0 255 For this channel type n must always be 1 nc Counter returns the number of positive going edges seen on digital input nD Counter value
215. hedules do not wake the D780 see P55 2111 No Sleep Conditions The DT80 is designed to not go to sleep when any of the following conditions exist 2 Four seconds is the DT80 s default see P3 3 30 seconds is the DT80 s default see P17 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 131 e When the D780 is externally powered That is when power is provided to either of the standard power inputs To override this see Controlling Sleep 32 next When externally powered the D780 draws 50mA to 400mA depends on the state of charge of the internal main battery from the external supply in addition to the 150mA typical or 400mA maximum required for normal operation This occurs even if the DT80 is forced to sleep by setting P15 1 e When the DT80 s Ethernet port is connected to an Ethernet network or directly to a computer s Ethernet port But connecting Ethernet to a sleeping DT80 does not wake it e When the D780 is unloading data e When a modem connected to the DT80 s Host RS 232 port is in the process of establishing a call or has a call in progress Controlling Sleep Use parameter 15 P15 110 to control the DT80 s sleep 0 Auto sleep See P17 P110 Sleep when not busy only if powered from internal main and P55 battery P111 Never sleep if externally powered P15 0 is the DT80 s default 1 Force sleep that is sleep when not busy regardless of how powered 2 Force normal operation that
216. hese are restored on leaving fixed format mode h Parameters P11 P46 P57 and P60 are sampled and stored at the time a schedule is defined You should always set these parameters prior to defining the schedule The DO command can also be used for for executing parameter commands from within schedules See Unconditional Processing DO Command 251 Minimum sleep period Seconds 4 1 to Sleep only if sleep duration can be 30000 for at least this period of time D780 assesses when next schedule is due to expire Sleep to wake settling Seconds 3 1 to Time required by DT80 to resume latency 30000 normal operation after leaving sleep mode Maximum sleep period Minutes 60 1 to 30000 Logging of alarm state Mode 1 Oto 3 P9 Transition Logged 0 None 1 False to True only Default 2 True to False only 3 Both Logging of TEST results to Mode 0 O to 1 Send P10 0 for disable P10 1 event log for enable Mains frequency Hz 50 25 to Sets ADC sample duration to 1 Hz Set P11 to local mains 30000 seconds Must be set before a frequency for best noise schedule is defined rejection Minimum measurement ms 20 1 to See Frequency 7134 period for frequency 30000 measurement UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 109 Comms ports password protection timeout Low power operation Delay to low power mode Data delimiter character Scan delimiter character XOFF timeout before XON Date format Number of significant digits
217. hey can also be specified as an asterisk in which case the value of a CV is used instead type nCV wCV output the value of nCV in the specified numeric format with the width parameter set to the value of wCV flag precision opt eg S d 1CV 4CV or 5 2f 1CV 3CV flag nCV wCV pCV as above but also set the precision parameter to the value of pCV eg g 1CV 4CV 5CV Finally the flag character allows some further options Flag Applicable conversion types Description d x X o e E f g G s left justify if spaces need to be added to make up the minimum field width add them after the number rather than before d x X o e E f g G if the value is positive prefix it with character space d x X 0 e E f g G if the value is positive prefix it with space character O zero e E f g G pad the field with leading zero characters rather than spaces if required to make up the minimum field width x X O prefix value with Ox OX or 0 respectively e E f always include a decimal point it g G do not truncate any trailing zeroes after the decimal point Examples Examples assume 1CV 12345 67 1 pumpkin 1SERIAL 1CV 19948 67 1SERIAL 10f 1CV TE 1SERIAL 10 1 1CV gt 12345 7 1SERIAL 10 1 1CV gt 12345 7 1SERIAL 010 1 1CV gt 00012345 7 1SERIAL 10 10d 1CV gt 0000012345 1SERIAL 10 4g 1CV gt 1 235e04 1SER
218. ied out actionText is optional and if included is returned to the host computer each time the IF command tests true The actionText is not logged actionProcesses can be reading input channels setting output channels performing calculations setting of any global or system parameters and so on Ifthe actionProcesses produce data this can be returned to the host computer but is not logged For example IF 1V gt 100 2V will sample 2V when 1V is greater than 100mV however the value will not be returned nor logged This is because the channel is sampled in the same schedule as the alarm is defined in and as such cannot be returned conditionally as variable length records are not supported by the logger A technique to solve this problem would involve using an immediate schedule see immediate schedules For example RA1S IF 1V gt 100 XB RBX 2V Schedule A would run and measure 1V When 1V exceeds 100mV then schedule B is run The 2V measurement is made and recorded in the B schedule Condition Tests The condition works in the same way as the condition for alarms Normally channel variables are tested in the condition and the tests can be as follows lt Less than setpoint 1 Greater than or equal to setpoint 1 ba Less than first setpoint OR greater than or equal to second setpoint 2 os Greater than or equal to first setpoint AND less than second setpoint 2 The setpoints can be a floating point constant or a channel varia
219. in the DT80 s SRAM and are therefore retained through a soft reset RESET After a hard reset SINGLEPUSB the settings are reset to their defaults PS 1200 N 8 1 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 148 Serial Channel Commands Channel Type Data flow into and out of the Serial Channel is controlled by the Serial Channel commands These commands provide for e formatting and management of output strings and prompts to be sent to the connected serial device e interpretation and parsing of input strings received from the connected device into data Taker variables e general management of the Serial Channel The general form of a Serial Channel command is nSERIAL control string options where n is the Serial Channel number For a DT80 this is always 1 control string isa string of commands that specify the required output and input actions of the Serial Channel See The Control String 2150 options is a list of channel options that can be used to modify general features of the Serial Channel The options can be placed either before or after the control string in the Serial Channel command Note that SERIAL is actually a channel type in the same way that V voltage is a channel type It can appear in schedules and it has channel options like any other channel type The control string is a special channel option which applies only to the SERIAL channel type Channel Options As wellas control string the following channel options ar
220. ink is sufficient to switch the DT80 s connection to that link Before switching the D780 notifies the host on the current link that it is about to change connection The only exception to this is where a single quote is used on alarm statements instead of the usual double quote see Alarm Action Text p80 Alarm text enclosed in single quotes is always sent to the Host serial port Password Protection Comms Ports Protect the DT80 s communications ports the Host RS 232 port the Ethernet port and the USB port with a user defined password so that communication through these ports is only possible after the password is entered Setting and Removing a Comms Port Password Seta password by sending to the DT80 password can be any text string except command keywords of up to 10 case sensitive characters Remove a password by sending PASSWORD two characters no space character between them Note The password is lost removed if the D780 performs a power up reset triple push reset or SINGLEPUSH reset see the Table 12 DT80 Resets 1109 Accessing Password Protected Comms Ports To establish communication at anytime simply send the password followed by a carriage return If the password is correct the DT80 responds with Accepted and opens the comms ports The ports stay open until you send the SIGNOFF command or while there is comms activity If there is no communication for a period of time define
221. internal RAM has been cleared probably due to the internal Lithium memory backup battery being flat Programs and logged data will not be affected but you will need to reset the DT80 s time date DT80 restarted All mem cleared Logging Suspended If data for one or more schedules cannot be logged for some reason then the DT80 will continue to run the job but it will flash the Attn LED and display a message such as the following Pressing a key will clear the message from the display but the Attn LED will keep flshing until space is made available eg by deleting other jobs data or the job is stopped Cannot log There is insufficient space on the specified logging drive internal or USB device to allow a No Space data file of the requested size to be created Cannot Log One or more schedules have ben set to no overwrite mode NOV schedule option and Data full the allocated space is now full Cannot Log The A schedule option log directly to USB device has been specified but no USB No USB device device is inserted The DT80 lost power and all internal RAM has been cleared probably due to the internal Lithium memory backup battery being flat Programs and logged data will not be affected but you will need to reset the DT80 s time date DT80 restarted All mem cleared C T D O 5 e o You can also turn the Attn LED on or off using the SATTN Set Attention and CATTN Clear Attention commands Alternatively th
222. introduces this wiring configuration Maximum number of independent voltage inputs to a DT80 4 one per analog channel Wiring gauge length and environment is non critical Figure 55 V2 Wiring for independent voltage input 1V 2AS 3V ATK Current Inputs Independent Current Input with External Shunt You MUST adhere to the DT80 s common mode voltage limits default is 30V relative to analog common for this configuration to operate correctly UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 158 24V Figure 56 C1 wiring for independent current input using external shunt 11 2l 3L 4 Independent Current Input using the internal shunt You MUST adhere to the DT80 s common mode voltage limits default is 30V relative to analog common for this configuration to operate correctly Figure 57 C2 Wiring for Independent current input using internal shunt 1 l 2 l 3 L AH Shared Terminal Current Inputs with External Shunts To avoid cross channel coupling connect the bottom of the shunts with the minimum of shared resistance to the sense point Figure 58 C3 Wiring for shared terminal current input using external shunt Stl 4 1 l 2 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 159 Independent current using internal shunt and external excitation Figure 59 C4 Wiring for independent current using internal shunt and external excitation 3 I E A I E 1 I E 2 I E Resistance In
223. ion P160 Internal 1000 shunt is between and AGND terminals Other inputs require an external current shunt typically 100Q but higher for small currents Figure 60 R1 Wiring for 4 wire resistance input P160 Figure 61 R2 Wiring for 3 wire resistance input P160 Figure 62 R3 Wiring for 2 wire resistance input Figure 63 B1 Wiring for 6 wire bridge using external voltage excitation P161 Figure 64 B2 Wiring for 4 wire bridge input using internal excitation P162 Figure 66 B3 Wiring for 3 wire bridge input using internal current excitation Pitas External completion required for 1 2 amp 1 4 bridges For BGV must measure reference voltage using another channel with BR option otherwise defaults to 5 0 V Figure 54 V1 Wiring for shared terminal voltage input 158 amp Figure 55 V2 Wiring for independent voltage input P158 Threshold is OV Use 2V option to set threshold to 2 5V Specified in current time date format Increment every sec 1ST min 2ST hour 3ST day 4ST Note 6 Returns See System Variables 231 Use channel options Variables 37 to assign data to a CV Read the CV as for a normal channel Page 27 See Rainflow Cycle factor Counting P58 Text General purpose text for Assign by sending headings etc ten writable n my text 80 character channels See Text 230 Serial Transmit to and receive SERIAL P
224. ioned above whenever a Serial Channel command is executed it will return a state value that indicates success or otherwise of the execution If the execution is successful then 0 State is returned If there has been a problem n State is returned where n is the error state code relating to the problem Here are the DT80 s Serial Channel error state codes 0 OK z CTS detect timeout Time out waiting for CTS while executing cO or c1 input action UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 155 20 Receive timeout Time out while waiting for data in an input action 29 Scan Error Received data cannot be converted according to input action Return of the Serial Channel state can be disabled by the W channel option 2155 Serial Channel Debugging Tools P56 Debugging The DT80 has some useful debugging modes available for the Serial Channel These allow the user to send information about the progressive operation of the Serial Channel from the host communications port for viewing in DeTransfer or other terminal software These debugging modes are activated by setting Parameter56 as follows P56 0 No debugging information default P56 1 Show contents of the receive buffer when each character is read as ReadByte contents of receive buffer lt EndofBuf gt P56 2 When e command is executed show contents of receive buffer before and after erasure EraseBefore contents of receive buffer lt EndofBuf gt EraseAfter contents of receive buffer lt EndOfBu
225. ions from these sources being inserted into the unload data stream The D 80 automatically sets these switches to their previous state on completion of the unload Note Logged data is not cleared from the D780 when this command method comms interface unload commands is used for retrieving data The same logged data can be unload using one of the DT80 s communications interfaces as many times as required until it is deleted on purpose see Deleting Logged Data 70 Conversely logged data is cleared from the DT80 when the temporarily insert a USB memory device method of retrieving data is used discussed earlier UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 73 Always Fixed Format Mode When logged data is unloaded it s always returned to the host computer in fixed format mode see Figure 25 Real time data can be returned in either free or fixed format mode P76 Order of Unload Logged data is always unloaded schedule by schedule in the order A B C K unless you specify a particular schedule see Unload Commands 272 below Unload Commands To retrieve logged data from the D780 by means of one of its comms interfaces use the unload commands below There are three formats of unload commands U commands Unload all data from beginning to end of data store See The U Unload Commands 272 below U commands round Unload data for a period defined by a beginning and See The U Unload Commands brackets paren
226. is inserted Once a destination medium has been selected for a schedule it cannot be altered UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 69 Inserting and Removing a USB memory device Appending a Job s Data Data Storage Issues e If the user indicates that a schedule should be logged to a USB memory device and the device is not present any schedules that are to be logging to USB memory device will have logging switch off When a USB memory device with the required amount of space is inserted logging will commence for all schedules set to log to card e When a USB memory device is removed logging will be switched off for all schedules for which data is logged Logging will resume for these schedules when a USB memory device is inserted e When there is insufficient space to create a log file of the size requested or there is insufficient space for only some of the job s scheduled data logging will be turned on for the schedules for which space is available For the rest logging will be switched off until storage space becomes available a new USB memory device is inserted or data is deleted e Also the user will be informed by error message of the schedules for which logging will be disabled e When a different job is entered that has the same name as the one already in the logger that has data records the new job is rejected The existing data must be removed before the job can be accepted Storage Status The amount of data stored and
227. its common practice to use thermocouple extension wire to cover long distances where temperatures are within the normal environmental range Such wire can be used for measurement junctions but only over a restricted temperature range of typically 20 C to 120 C Making the Measurement Junction The measurement junction can be made by welding brazing soldering or crimping the two wires together Take care to ensure that the wire material is not contaminated where the temperature gradient is to occur The junction can be insulated or left bare for a more rapid response If left bare ensure that the junction does not make intermittent contact with metal objects This can introduce electrical noise see Grounded Thermocouples 7 36 Using Thermocouples with the DT80 Thermocouples are wired to the DT80 as for any voltage signal see Figure 55 15s and Figure 54 15s The channel type is a Tt where t is the thermocouple type TB TC TT Using the thermocouple channel type reads the channel as a voltage and automatically applies cold junction compensation and linearization Reference Junction Compensation Conventionally the reference junction is held at 0 C and thermocouple responses are determined with a 0 C reference This is inconvenient in most situations and so in practice the reference junction is allowed to follow to ambient temperature Then this non zero reference junction temperature must be compensated for by measuring
228. l 4 Get the software to communicate by means of the computer comms port that is connected to the DT80 DT80 Modem Remote RS 232 Connection Another common way of communicating with the D780 is to connect its Host RS 232 port to a wired or wireless modem which communicates with another modem connected to the host computer at the other end of the comms link 2101 This way the D780 can be across town or across the world from the host computer and the link can use PSTN landline radio GSM cellular or satellite communication This is known as a modem connection to a remote D780 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 100 P po COM port Host RS 232 port A ee uu amp Host computer s ne NG 9 Y See Saale lt gt P e L A d N Figure 33 Modem remote connections The information in DT80 RS 232 Basics 297 applies to a modem connection The DT80 can power the modem directly or control the modem s power supply If this facility is used the D780 can automatically reset the modem if it determines that this is necessary See Powering the DI80 s Modem 7102 DT80 to Modem Cable For the DT80 to recognise that it s connected to a modem and operates accordingly the D780 must see the signal at the DSR terminal as active discussed in Automatic Device Detection 297 There are two ways to ensure this e Connect the DT80 s Host RS 232 port a DTE device to a m
229. l The test component of the alarm command can be extended by adding a delay period If this is done the alarm s test must remain true for the delay period before any of the actions can be performed The format is NS Seconds NM Minutes NH Hours ND Days where Nis an integer in the range 1 to 255 If the alarm tests false again during the delay period the delay counter is reset and does not begin counting again until the next true test The result is a filtering action that ensures input noise does not cause unwanted or rapid output actions Example Delay Period The alarm command UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 79 ALARMn 3V gt 100 0 30S actions specifies that the voltage on channel 3 3V must equal or exceed 100 0mV gt 100 0 for 30 seconds before the actions are performed 30S Alarm Digital Action Channels Shown as digitalAction in the alarm command ALARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses e77 optional One or two comma separated digital state output channels nDSO can be declared for each alarm to mimic the state of the alarm That is these outputs are set to their default state if the alarm tests false and are set to there non default state if the alarm tests true False OFF default state 1 4DSO 1 DSO is set high 5 8DSO 0 DSO is set low True ON non default state 1 4DSO 1 DSO is set low 5 8DSO 0 DSO is set high Typically use the digital state
230. l are evaluated by a least square regression Various statistical programs are available for this purpose Some nonlinear sensors are supplied with their calibration polynomial A single polynomial may be applied to any number of channels in any schedules or alarms Example Polynomial The commands Y18 25 5 0 345 0 0452 Deg C RA5M 1V Y18 define the polynomial Y18 then use it in a schedule which instructs the D780 to return data in the form 1V 44 35 degC 1V 43 89 degC Thermistor Scaling Tn The DT80 has channel types for many 2 wire YSI thermistors Yellow Springs Instruments www ysi com For other thermistor types the DT80 supports thermistor scaling the conversion of a resistance reading to a temperature The DT80 does the conversion from resistance to temperature using 1 AO OO a bLn R cln R To apply thermistor scaling firstly obtain the constant terms a b and c from the thermistor manufacturer then define a thermistor conversion by sending a thermistor command Tn a b c Temperature units n is the thermistor conversion number 1 to 20 Finally apply the conversion by including a resistance channel ID with the thermistor channel option mR Tn in a schedule where mis the number of the channel to which the thermistor is attached Example Thermistor Scaling The commands T1 26 5 1 034 0 0085 K RA5M 3R T1 Solvent temp define the thermistor conversion T1 and its use in a schedul
231. l devices RS 422 uses differential signalling a pair of wires for each signal no signal ground connection which provides improved noise immunity and allows operation over longer distances than RS 232 RS 485 Yet another communications interface standard Like RS 422 RS 485 uses differential signalling RS 485 is designed for multi drop operation over a single shared pair of wires RTD Resistance Temperature Detector A resistive sensor that changes resistance with changes in temperature See RTDs P137 sampling speed The maximum rate at which analog to digital conversions can be done This includes any channel selection time settling time for the signal to stabilise and processing time if required SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA systems are used to monitor and control plant status and provide data logging facilities schedule Full name scan schedule command A scan that automatically triggers whenever specified condition s and or event s occur For example whenever 5 seconds have elapsed repeating every 5 seconds whenever a door closes scan on digital event or whenever an alarm occurs This is the command you ll send to the DT80 most often There are several flavours of schedule command schedule header The schedule s ID and trigger eg RA1S see Figure 6 233 serial One by one In serial data transfer data is sent in a single stream of bits one bit at a time one after the other
232. l power sources including the main internal battery and dry the DT80 in a warm place If the unit comes into contact with salt water rinse it thoroughly in fresh water then in distilled water then dry it salt must NOT be allowed to remain on the circuit boards The DT80 operates over a wide temperature range 45 C to 70 C but its accuracy can be reduced at extremes While the electrical zero is stable with temperature the scale factor can drift slightly Try to minimize the D7T80 s exposure to temperature extremes The lead Acid battery in the logger best operates between 15 C to 20 C When operating outside this range consideration must be given to an alternative power source for the logger Power can be supplied to the D780 from internal and external sources Internal 6V lead acid gel cell battery supplied with the data Taker See Internal Power Main Battery e129 below External Standard supply A DC mains adapter plug pack or other unlimited DC See Main Battery Life 2129 below 11 28Vdc inputs power source that is a source with no special energy conservation or optimization requirements Low drain supply External batteries solar panels vehicle power supplies and Ext Bat terminals other sources for which energy conservation may be critical 12Vdc that is applications requiring minimum battery drain by the data lakerso that the longest possible life is obtained from the power source I
233. le software connection for a DT80 on an Ethernet network DeTransfer software shown d Send the TEST command and check that the DT80 returns a test report see Test Report DT80 Health 21217 If there s more than one DT80 on the network verify that the report is from the correct DT80 by checking that the reported serial number is that of the DT80 you re testing DT80 FTP Communications The DT80 can function as an FTP server You can use this mechanism and third party FTP software to transfer data and program files to and from the DT80 The FTP server supports two types of access e an anonymous login username ANONYMOUS password can be anything provides read only access to the DT80 s file system e a full login using the username and password configured in the profile provides read write access Using an FTP client such as Microsoft Internet Explorer you should be able to browse the DT80 s file system by entering the URL ftp ip address drive where ip address is the DT80 s IP address and drive is the DT80 drive to browse A or B DT80 PPP Communications Point to Point Protocol PPP allows TCP IP based protocols to be run over the Host RS 232 port of the DT80 To initiate a PPP session with the DT80 clients must send the word CLIENT to the DT80 by means of its Host RS 232 port The DT80 responds with CLIENTSERVER and from then on expects PPP packets Note that Microsoft Windows PPP client software issues CLIENT a
234. ling It returns three temperature readings a spot reading of channel 1 each hour RA1H 1TT and the average and maximum over the hour from 10 second samplings of channel 2 RS10S 2TT AV MX UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 47 Working with Schedules Entering Schedules into the DT80 BEGIN END Report schedules must be entered into that is sent to the D780 as a group Since the schedules and processes that comprise a job or program often extend over more than one line you embrace them between the keywords BEGIN and END to designate the beginning and end of the group to the D780 Here s an example BEGIN RA10S ATT Oven Temp 5TT Flue Temp RB1S 2C Water Flow END Note Additional channels cannot be appended to a schedule once it has been sent to the D780 Instead it is necessary to re send the full set of schedules including the additional channels But it is possible to alter an individual schedule s trigger see Changing a Schedule Trigger r49 e49 BEGIN END Rules Note the following rules e Each line can be up to 254 characters long e Processes on lines without a schedule header are included in the schedule immediately above In the example above 4TT Oven Temp and 5TT Flue Temp are included in schedule RA and 2C Water Flow is included in schedule RB e A carriage return must terminate each line e Always place the END statement on a separate line by itself If a syntax err
235. llowed for the input signal to the ADC to stabilise before it is measured This can be controlled using the measurement delay MDn channel option channel table An internal DT80 data structure that stores details of all defined channels The channel table is limited to a maximum of 800 entries UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 178 A channel table entry is used each time a channel IS referenced in the current job For example the job RA10S T 4V 1i N 1CV 1 ALARM2 1CV gt 10 boo f1D uses 5 channel table entries for T 4V 1CV 1CV and 1DSO clock The DT80 a real time clock calendar which you can set to your actual time CMRR Common Mode Rejection Ratio A measure of the influence of common mode voltage unwanted on the output of the DT80 s instrumentation amplifier see common mode voltage r179 below More precisely CMRR is the ratio of the common mode voltage at the amplifier s input to the common mode voltage at the amplifiers output expressed in dB It indicates the quality of a measuring system s input electronics Relevant to basic differential inputs only CMRR 20 ogl 4 Vout X Ay where Vem is an applied common mode voltage Vout is the resulting output voltage Ay is the amplifier s voltage gain command line One or more DT80 commands typed one after the other separated by tab or space characters and ending with a return character Limited to a maximum of 250 characters including sp
236. m noise Unwanted voltage or current generally with an AC component superimposed on the wanted signal null modem cable A communications cable for connecting two DTE devices together for example a PC to another PC or a DT80 to a PC p171 Also known as a crossover cable nybble Half a byte four bits parse To identify components of a command string PC A personal computer of the IBM or IBM compatible type Although the Macintosh is technically a PC it is not referred to as such PCB Printed Circuit Board peak to peak The value of an alternating quantity measured from its negative peak to its positive peak UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 183 Peak to peak p p Figure 78 Peak to peak measurement period The time taken for a cyclic event to repeat itself Reciprocal of frequency 1 Period Frequency PID Proportional Integral Derivative A three mode control algorithm commonly used in industrial control A PID control loop automatically adjusts its response according to how close the measured value is to the target value Deals with system hysteresis more effectively than simple on off controls A PID loop with two state output can be programmed on the DT80 using the difference integration and calculation facilities PLC Programmable Logic Controller Used to au
237. m whose input is an external shunt current type level sensor mounted in a tank and connected to the D7T80 s analog channel 1 2I see I channel type on I 25 If the tank level falls below the setpoint 2I lt 12 54 the alarm tests TRUE which causes the D780 to e return and or log the alarm message Pump ON e set its digital state output 3 to 0 OFF high active to turn a pump on 3DSO W 0 2144 This can also be achieved using an alarm digital action see Alarm Digital Action Channels s0 instead of an alarm action process ALARM 11 lt 12 54 1DSO Example Alarm Action Processes Controlling a System Alarm action processes can also be used to control a system or process Although this method uses simple bang bang actuator control it is often adequate The schedule RA1S ALARM 1TK lt 74 75 Heater ON 1DSO W 0 ALARM 1TK gt 75 25 Heater OFF 1DSO W 1 is a simple heater control for a water bath It assumes that the thermal inertia of the system is sufficient to prevent hunting about the control point The two alarms work to hold the temperature at 75 C 0 25 C Examples Alarm Action Processes Adaptive Scheduling Adaptive scheduling is the dynamic adjustment of the acquisition of data about a system or process as the system or process changes As the examples below show adaptive scheduling can reduce total data volume while giving greater time resolution when required The schedule RA
238. m default settings where possible and therefore supports the majority of modems Modem Automatic Baud Rate Selection Modems compatible with the AT command set that is most modems automatically set their local baud rate to match that of the host when the first AT command is received Therefor when the D780 sends the initialization string to the modem it automatically sets the modem s local baud rate to that of the D780 in addition to initializing the modem In other words the modem s local baud rate does not have to be set manually Modem Communications Protocol It is recommended that an error correcting protocol eg LAPM or MNP2 4 is used between the modems along with local flow control To enable an error correcting protocol error control in DeTransfer or DeLogger ensure that this option is enabled in the host computer s modem settings Do this by means of Windows Modems control panel in the modem s Advanced Connection Settings dialog box Powering the DT80 s Modem When using a modem connection between the DT80 and its host computer e use the DT80 s RELAY connection to control an external power supply to the DT80 s modem e use one of the DT80 s digital output channels to control an external power supply to the DT80 s modem DT80 controls the Power DT80 controls the modem s power modem s power Supply supply by means of the RELAY supply by means of connected the DT80 The modem the R
239. matted as a DOS Windows compatible file system FTP File Transfer Protocol A TCP IP protocol for copying files from one computer to another ground A common return path that is the zero voltage reference level for the equipment or system It may not necessarily be connected to earth UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 181 ground loops More often that not grounds in a measurement system are not at the same electrical potential differences may be from microvolts to many volts Then if signal wires happen to connect different grounds together currents can flow and result in unpredictable measurement errors These unintended conduction paths are referred to as ground loops The DT80 has been designed for maximum immunity to ground loops see DT80 Analog Sub System e141 guard An actively driven shield around input signal conductors that is maintained at the common mode voltage of the input signal Signal guarding is used when a sensor has a high output impedance and the cable s capacitance and insulation leakage are significant host computer The computer you use for supervising the DT80 host software The software you run on the host computer to supervise the DT80 See DT80 Friendly Software r117 hunting An undesirable oscillation HWFC Hardware flow control RTS CTS Also known as hardware handshaking See flow control 2181 A device using hardware flow control monitors its Clear To Send CTS input and will
240. mber The DT80 s default is data logging disabled LOGON Enables logging data and alarms for all schedules LOGOFF Disables logging data and alarms for all schedules LOGONx Enables logging for schedule x data and alarms LOGOFF x Disables logging for schedule x data and alarms Disabling Data Logging for Specific Channels Data from all of the input channels and calculations from all of the report schedules RA RB RC RK schedules is logged after the general LOGON command is sent to the DT80 Data from all of the input channels and calculations from a particular report schedule is logged if the schedule specific LOGONx command is sent to the DT80 Data logging for specific channels can also be disabled and calculations within report schedules by including the NL No Log channel option in their channel lists see NL 237 Data is still returned to the host computer for channels with the NL channel option See also the Destination P37 Working channel option Logging issues How media is selected By default the internal memory will be used The user may also specify the storage media to use on a per schedule basis An addition to the schedule definition syntax will facilitate this On USB memory device removal When the USB memory device is removed from the DT80 any schedules that were logging data to the USB device will keep running but new records will not be logged until a USB memory device with the necessary free space
241. me As it happens The DT80 can return data directly to the host computer in real time that is as each scan is made its resulting data is returned to the host computer straight away and displayed on screen immediately resolution The smallest detectable increment of measurement that is the smallest change in input that produces a detectable change in output In the field of data acquisition resolution is the number of bits that the ADC uses to represent the analog signal the greater the resolution the smaller the changes in input signal that can be resolved detected retrieve To unload or return data and other information from the DT80 to the host computer either by UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 184 e Unloading through one of the DT80 s communications interfaces e Unloading by temporarily inserting a USB memory device into the DT80 See RETRIEVING LOGGED DATA 273 return See carriage return r178 ROM Read Only Memory Memory that can be randomly read from but not normally written to The DT80 uses flash ROM RS 232 A common communications and interface standard for connecting serial devices RS232 uses a negative voltage typically 5V to represent a logic 0 and a positive voltage typically 5V to represent a logic 1 These signals are with respect to a common ground terminal hence RS232 is said to use single ended signalling RS 422 Another communications interface standard for connecting seria
242. mple the command U will unload all data from all schedules in the current job For more details on unload commands 272 Guidelines for Successful Data Gathering The Procedure Data acquisition and data logging are orderly processes and should be undertaken in a systematic way In order to obtain effective information efficiently do the following e Identify the quantities to be measured e Select the sensors considering measurement range accuracy stability ruggedness and cost e Select the wiring configuration For example resistive sensors can be connected in 2 3 or 4 wire configuration e Determine sensor output scaling that is the relationship between sensor output voltage current resistance etc and the actual quantity For many sensor types this calculation is performed automatically by the DT80 all you need to do is specify the appropriate channel type e Determine how data is to be processed for example statistical functions such as max min or histograms may be required e Decide on the sample frequency don t sample faster than you need to e Calculate the volume of data to be collected e Decide on the method of data recovery and archiving real time data return or logging or both Will logged data be unloaded via a comms port or collected using a USB memory device How often e Consider the power consumption If power resources are limited low power sleep mode can be enabled Having defined the task con
243. mprehensive set of drivers combined with the appropriate documentation to allow the logger to be implemented in a LabVIEW application dataTaker recommends starting with DeLogger It s included on the CD provided with your data Taker data logger A Getting Started video is also provided on the disk Then graduate to DeLogger Pro if extra capabilities are required If you are comfortable with the idea of programming the logger using its command language then you may prefer to create DT80 programs directly using DeTransfer About This Manual This manual is intended for all users of the DT80 It describes e how to connect sensors and other devices to the DT80 s input and output channels e how to program the DT80 to collect and return data as required e how to manage the data that the DT80 collects The main focus of this manual will be on directly programming the DT80 using its command language However most of the concepts discussed here also apply when building programs using tools such as DeLogger A Tour of the DT80 s Interfaces The DT80 s interfaces with the outside world are grouped into three main areas User Interface On the top panel of the DT80 you will find controls which allow the user to interact with the unit during operation without requiring a host computer e A2 line LCD display shows status messages measured values and a menu of pre defined functions e Six keypad buttons allow the user to navigate between the
244. mputer either directly or by means of a pair of modems Figure 29 297 This DTE interface labelled Host RS 232 is the primary means by which you e program configure and supervise the D780 from the host computer e retrieve stored data from the DT80 to the host computer Host RS 232 Port Pinout The pinout of the D780 s Host RS 232 connector is shown in Figure 29 The signal functions are defined in the Table 17 RS 232 Pinouts 2171 9 RI 8 CTS 7 RIS 6 DSR Figure 28 DT80 Host RS 232 port connector pinout DTE Automatic Device Detection A DT80 uses the state of its Host RS 232 port s DSR terminal Figure 29 P97 to determine the type of device connected to the port as follows If the DT80 s DSR terminal is NOT held active by the connected device the DT80 assumes that it s connected directly to the host computer Figure 30 P97 and operates accordingly DT80 assumes a direct connection if its DSR terminal is NOT held active by the connected device Host RS 232 port Pa eel Figure 29 DSR inactive low If the DT80 s DSR terminal IS held active by the connected device the DT80 assumes that it s connected to a modem Figure 30 P97 and operates accordingly initialising the modem monitoring other Host RS 232 lines to determine when a modem connection to the host computer has been established and so on DT80 assumes a modem connection if its DSR terminal is held active by the connec
245. n measuring large resistances Voltage source is not regulated Excite terminal may be used as a shared terminal input channel Allows terminal to be used for shared input voltage measurements Used with F channel type to set threshold to 2 5V suitable for TTL level input signals rather than the default of OV Can reduce noise Total measurement time is n 1 mains periods Specifies the settling time required before a sensor can be measured Default is 10ms Valid for C HSC ST and CV channel types which are reset to 0 after returning their current value Also valid for digital output channel types DSO DNO DBO which invert the state of each bit after returning its value A scale factor or other parameter specific to channel type see the channel factor column in Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 229 Page 35 Scaling Data Manipulation Digital Manipulation Reference Channel Serial Channel Comms Type UM 0085A0 DF DT RC RS IB TRR TRF TFR TFF TOR TOF TR TZ BR RS232 default RS422 RS485 Apply span n 1 to 50 poly amp span index is shared Apply polynomial n Apply intrinsic function n 1 to 7 Apply thermistor scaling 1 to 20 correction n Difference Ax Time difference At Rate of change Ax At Reading time difference x At Integrate x Ax 2 At Time from rising edge to rising edge Time from rising edge to falling edge
246. n PROFILE string isthe value to which the key is toDetalls e115 be set table No Checking Note that section key and string contain free text that is not validated in any way So if an entry is misspelled or uses an illegal value there is no warning The DT80 simply ignores that line in the USER INI file and instead starts up using the factory default for that setting For example if accidentally a PROFILE command is sent to set the baud rate to 9a00 or 9601 instead of 9600 the D780 ignores the value and uses its factory default instead Examples PROFILE Commands Set Ethernet user defaults PROFILE ETHERNET IP_ADDRESS 192 168 1 168 PROFILE ETHERNET UDP_SUPPORTED YES Set Host RS 232 port user defaults PROFILE HOST PORT BPS 115200 Set modem user defaults PROFILE HOST MODEM DIAL ATDP PROFILE HOST MODEM COMMAND DELAY 1 Startup Job The DT80 can automatically run a user defined job e every time it is restarted by a firm reset see ONRESET DXC e116 below or e every time a USB memory device containing a special version of the job is inserted into the D780 see ONINSERT DXC 2116 below ONRESET DXC To make the D780 automatically run a job as the DT80 s startup job send the command RUNJOBONRESET JobName to the DT80 This places the contents of the job named JobName must already exist in the D780 into a file named ONRESET DXC in the root directory of the DT80 s B drive Then
247. n assigned When we use DeLogger the particular COM port in the Connection dialog drop down list can be identified by the FTDI manufacturers tag COM1 Communications Port COM1 Standard port types COMS USB Serial Port COMES FTOI Both DeLogger and DeTransfer only show active COM ports in their connection dialogs so it should not be too difficult to work out which one corresponds to the USB connection One possible source of confusion might be if you also use a USB to RS232 converter such as that supplied with other dataTaker logger models it may also be identified as an FTDI device By removing the adapter or the DT80 connection and observing the COM port lists in DeLogger and DeTransfer it should be possible to work out which COM port has been assined to which device Note The assigned COM port is associated with the particular PC USB port that you are using If you subsequently connect the DT80 to a different USB port then it will be assigned a different COM port number You can also check the assigned COM port number in the Windows Device Manager as follows Click Start Select the Control Panel eg Control Panel k When the control panel is open select System This will open the System Properties dialog box System Select the Hardware Tab Click Device Manager__ This will open the Device Manager dialog box Click the Ports COM amp LPT There should be one identified as USB F Ports
248. n the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 23s table e Voltage Excitation BGV r139 Figure 63 B1 Wiring for 6 wire bridge using external voltage excitation 3BGV 6W 4 Wire BGV Inputs 5BGV 6W 7BGV 6W 11BGV 6W Use voltage excited bridge BGV configurations only when the bridge is close to the DT80 BGI configurations are usually preferred See also e the Bridge 27 category in the Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 222 table e the Resistance and Bridge 235 category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 23s table e Voltage Excitation BGV 139 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 161 Figure 64 B2 Wiring for 4 wire bridge input using internal excitation 1BGV 4W 2BGV 4W 3BGV 4W 4BGV 4W 4 Wire BGI Inputs We recommend the current excited bridge BGI method for 4 wire bridge measurement especially for bridges that are distant from the DT80 See also e the Bridge 227 category in the Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 222 table e the Resistance and Bridge 235 category in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 23s table e Bridges 2139 Figure 65 B2 Wiring for 4 wire bridge input using internal excitation 1BGI 4W 2BGI 4W 3BGI 4W ABGI 4W 3 Wire BGI Input Bridge voltage calculated Ra Rc Figure 66 B3 Wiring for 3 wire bridge input using internal current excitation 3BGI 4BGI 1BGI 2BG1 120 AD590 Series Inputs IC temperature sensors for long cables
249. n the input is below the threshold a 0 is returned The default threshold is 2500mV but can be set to any value in mV see Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 29 table Example Analog State Input The channel list 1AS 1750 configures analog channel 1 as an analog state input with a threshold of 1750mV UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 140 DT80 Analog Sub System Two important sub sections of the DT80 are completely isolated e the DT80 analog section is electrically isolated from the rest of the DT80 see Figure 49 4 e the DT80 Ethernet interface is transformer isolated from the outside world Isolation Barrier 3V 5V Bt BS 63 1 43 II 1KQ ae E Gaya 2 MUX_ HO 6 I a ST I I 054 Soo to Imxi noc 3E cru S I I I I I I I gt x1 A at x10 x100 AQDDGI _ Figure 48 DT80 Analog Sub System Isolated Analog Section Because the analog section is electrically isolated from the rest of the DT80 sensor to equipment ground loops see Some of the possible ground loops in a measurement system are unlikely to arise DT80 Ground Terminals The DT80 has two ground systems digital ground and analog ground Figure 49 4 Dilu D z D E A al 1D 2D 3D 4D ano WK GND 5D 6D 7D BD ano ae cal a E GND ONO GND GND 1G ZC3C 40 p RELAY T fx RTSCTS o mie a A EXT II B Z A Y BGD K g oos a A CK _ _
250. nST x mod range Thus 2ST 62 will actually set 2ST to 2 Examples Assume the time is now 12 34 56 Then 2ST LOT 24 0 34 minutes past the hour counter resets on the hour 2ST 0 25T 154 0 754 minutes since midnight counter resets at midnight only 2ST 22 yer 6 0 754 mod 22 counter resets at midnight and every 22 minutes thereafter 2ST 1 2ST 1 0 counter is no longer synchronised to midnight 2ST 22 29T 6 0 setting range value resyncronises timer to current time 2ST will now increment every minute resetting back to O each time it reaches 22 When midnight comes around it will again be reset to 0 System Variables System variables provide various pieces of information about the state of the DT80 and its current job All system variables are read only except where indicated as writable in the table below 1SV Returns kB free in internal memory 2SV Returns kB stored in internal memory 3SV Returns kB free in USB memory device 0 if no memory device inserted ASV Returns kB free in USB memory device 0 if no memory device inserted 6SV Returns build number of the DT800 s firmware see also 14SV and version number 7SV Returns job presence 0 if no current job 1 if a job is loaded UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 31 8sv 9SV 10SV 11SV 12SV 13SV 14SV 15SV 16SV 17SV 18SV 19SV 25SV 30SV 31SV 32SV 33SV 34SV 35SV 52SV 53SV Returns current mains frequency
251. nal wiring by capacitive coupling and by magnetic induction There are different counter measures for each UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 23 Shield signal wiring to minimize capacitive noise pick up Signal wiring that is close to line voltage cable should always be shielded Magnetic induction of noise from current carrying cables or from electrical machines especially motors and transformers is a greater problem Shielded cable is not an effective counter measure The only practical measures are to e avoid magnetic fields e use close twisted conductors for the signal wiring Shielding in steel pipe can be effective but is generally not economic or convenient Noise Rejection The DT80 is designed to reject mains noise For best noise rejection set the DT80 s parameter 11 to your local mains frequency 50Hz or 60Hz see P11 2109 To force the DT80 to load this parameter setting every time it restarts by using a PROFILE command see Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details e115 and the PARAMETERS r114 section of the Table 9 DT80 Parameters 2112 table Self Heating of Sensors Sensors that need excitation power to be read are heated by power dissipation This can be particularly acute with temperature sensors and some sensitive bridges Minimize error by minimising the excitation power UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 24 Part B Channels Define channels using channel number channel type and channel options
252. nd a backslash character to the DT80 it is necessary to escape the backslash so that De Transfer treats it as a regular character To do this the backslash must be entered twice which will cause a single backslash to be sent Thus if the above example was to be sent to the DT80 using DeTransfer you would enter it as follows into the Send window in DeTransfer 1SERIAL e WN 013 d 1CVv 2CV C 013 w 2000 Note that this rule only applies to DeTransfer Other terminal programs eg HyperTerminal and DeLogger do not interpret the backslash character so for these packages the Serial Channel backslash commands must be entered using single backslashes Schedules Executing Serial Channel Commands in Schedules Like any other channel type Serial Channel commands can be placed into scan schedules For example BEGIN RAIM 1SERIAL RS485 lMe READ1 M 56f 1CV W RB2 E 1SERIAL RS485 e READ2 M 12s 1 W END will once a minute request then read a floating point value from device 1 on the multi drop RS485 link connected to the serial channel Also every time digital input 2D goes low the serial channel will request then read a string value from device 2 Serial commands can also be used in the immediate schedule ie executed immediately after they are entered For example sending AA Fa TPT NW de PI ma RARA will immediately transmit the indicated string on the serial channel Triggerin
253. nd expects the CLIENTSERVER response by default To close a PPP session with the DT80 clients can simply close the PPP session from their end Alternately you can send the command CLOSEDIRECTPPP to the DT80 and it will close the PPP session UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 108 Part J Configuration Configuring the DT80 Parameters Internal settings DT80 parameters are internal system settings They are global in their effect and allow a variety of options to be set As a general rule set the parameters that require changing before programming schedules and alarms You can e setorread parameters from the host computer from a USB memory device program or from alarm actions e pre set parameters using a PROFILE command see the PARAMETERS 114 row in the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 2115 table Reading Parameters To read the current setting of a parameter simply send the parameter s ID For example send P22 to read the current setting of parameter 22 Setting Parameters Parameters can be set at any time and new settings generally take effect immediately For example send P22 44 to set parameter 22 to the value 44 Parameters are not the same as channels or variables If you include a parameter in a schedule it does not become part of the schedule Instead it is processed immediately In fixed format mode H three parameters are forced P22 44 P24 13 and P38 46 The previous values for t
254. nect sensors and program the D780 Ground Loops Experience has shown that ground loops sometimes called earth loops are the most common cause of measurement difficulties Excessive electrical noise unexpected offset voltages and erratic behaviour can all be caused by one or more ground loops in a measurement system UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 22 Grounds Ground Loops and Isolation Grounds are Not Always Ground Electrical grounds in a measuring system can be an elusive cause of errors In the real world points in a system that one could reasonably consider at ground potential are often at different and fluctuating AC or DC potentials This is mainly due to earthed neutral returns in power systems cathodic corrosion protection systems thermocouple effects in metal structures lightning strikes and solar storms Whatever the cause the result can be loss of measurement integrity Ground Loops If grounds of different potential are connected by cabling used in the measuring system ground currents flows this is the infamous ground loop The magnitude of the currents can be from milliamperes to tens of amperes and in the case of a lightning strike can be as high as five thousand amperes Frequently voltage drops along cables caused by these current flows are superimposed on the desired signal voltage A ground loop can arise when a measurement system has more than one path to ground As Figure 5 23 shows this can
255. network needs to communicate with a node on another network through a gateway each node also requires an IP Gateway address The DT80 is shipped with its IP gateway set to 0 0 0 0 that is no gateways In summary all devices on a subnet must have e the same network number that is the portion of the IP address that represents the network number must be the same for all devices on the same network e unique node numbers the node number is what distinguishes one device from another e the same subnet mask determines how the IP address is subdivided into network portion and node portion External or Local Networks e External Network If you want your networked DT80 to communicate with other networks or subnets that is across one or more gateways you must specify the IP Subnet Mask for the DT80 s subnet and possibly an IP Gateway to access other networks Do this by sending the appropriate PROFILE command to the DT80 PROFILE ETHERNET SUBNET_MASK s t u v UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 105 and or PROFILE ETHERNET GATEWAY 0 p q r See Ethernet Commands r106 below e Local Network If you only want your networked DT80 to communicate locally that is only within the network or subnet to which it is connected then you don t need to specify an IP Subnet Mask The DT80 automatically applies a default IP subnet mask 255 255 255 0 that indicates no subnets no gateways Ethernet Settings are Preserved Th
256. nnel type as indicated by the following table V HV Tx LMx35 CV Scaling factor for example 1V 5 5 means multiply the reading by 5 5 voltage variable I L AD59x TMP17 current Resistance ohms of the external current shunt the D780 uses this value and the voltage it measures across the shunt to calculate current flow BGI current excited bridge Bridge arm resistance ohms BGV voltage excited bridge Offset adjusment ppm PT3xx NI CU RTD Resistance of the RTD element at 0 C ohms YSxx thermistor Value of connected parallel resistance ohms R resistance Offset adjustment ohms AS state Logic threshold value mV F frequency Sample Period ms C HSC STx counter timer Count modulo value reset after every n counts DN DB DNO DBO digital Bitmask only channels with 1 in bitmask are read output multiple DSO WARN RELAY SSPORT Delay time ms digital output SERIAL Timeout sec For example the three channel definitions in the schedule command RA30S 1V 10 1 4PT385 200 0 2DSO 100 R 0 contain channel factor channel options that instruct the D780 to do the following e scale multiply the voltage measured on input channel 1 by 10 1 e use 200 0Q instead of the default 100 0Q at 0 C when calculating the temperature represented by the signal from the RTD on channel 4 e output a 100ms pulse on digital channel 2 Multiple Reports The DT80 samples each channel in the channel li
257. nnels e Voltage Inputs P157 e 4 20mA Current Loops P158 e Resistance Inputs P160 e Bridge Inputs P161 e AD590 Series Inputs P162 e LM35 Series Inputs P163 e LM135 Series Inputs P163 Wiring configurations digital channels e Digital Input Wiring configurations P164 e Digital output wiring configurations P165 Analog Channels Analog Sensors and Measurement 4 20mA Current Loops WIRING DIAGRAMS P158 The DT80 supports current loop measurements The DT80 has an internal 1000hm shunt resistor that can be used with one 4 20mA sensor per DT80 analog channel External shunt resistors can be used to expand the number of 4 20mA sensors that can be used per DT80 analog channel see Figure 56 7159 The channel type for 4 20mA current loop measurement is L shuntResistance where shuntResistance is the channel factor the value of the shunt resistor you re using in the loop default is 1000 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 133 The DT80 assumes a shunt resistance of 100Q the default If you use a different shunt resistance you must specify this using the L channel type s channel factor see I 25 for example 3L 50 0 Current loop measurement is essentially the same as voltage measurement the DT80 measures the voltage across the internal or external shunt resistor and knowing the shunt resistance calculates the loop current Examples Current Loop Measurement The schedule R
258. nnels are initialised to their default states on initial power up firm reset SINGLEPUSH or soft reset RESET Entering a new job does not initialise the digital outputs The default states are summarised below 1 4DSO 1 output pulled up high controlled load OFF UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 144 5 8DSO 0 output driver disabled pulled down low 1RELAY contacts open 1WARN 0 LED off A digital output command eg 1DSO 20 R 1 is processed as follows 1 First the output or outputs for DNO DBO is set to the specified state if no state is specified then nothing is done 5 Then the DT80 waits for the specified delay if any If a state was specified and the R option was also specified then the default delay is 10ms otherwise Oms 6 Then if Ris specified the output s is are inverted 7 Finally the output value as at Step 2 is returned The current state of any digital output is thus returned when a digital output command is evaluated For example typing 2DSO will return the state to which the output was last set This will not necessarily reflect the actual state of the 2D terminal use 2DS to read the actual state And if 2DSO R is entered then the state of 2D will be inverted and the original state will be returned Connecting to Digital Outputs As noted above digital channels 1D 4D and 5D 8D have different electrical characteristics In particular e Outputs 1D 4D use an open drain FET output driver
259. nnnnnnnninonons 101 Modem Initialization Settings cee cee eee ee ee 101 AT COMManG Selasa A ide 102 Modem Automatic Baud Rate Selection ccooocccococnncconconocononcnnanonoconcnnononononnronononcnnonananess 102 Modem Communications Protocol cccoocccocnccccnccncnccnnnnonnnnonnnonononnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrinnnnns 102 Powering the DT80 s MON aia 102 Modem Communications OperatiON ooccccccncoccncccnnncnnnoncnonncnnonnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnonaronnncnonnncnnnns 103 DIO s a a a Meee tad aetee et benteeneta eae vente 103 Bele I eee ames meme trae ie eee A CRE hry Te cee Nee Senne CRE Mee eens enn eek 103 Modent Sta Us see enemies aE 2 eet Prat oe eon ir nen er ne ee ee ee 103 Setting Up a Remote Connection ccccccesccceeeccneeceececeuseceueeceeesueeseueessueesueesseeseaeeseas 103 Installing the Host Computers Modem cccccccecccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeseueeseeeesanes 104 Using the Modem Connection ccccsccccececececeeecceeeceuceceusecsueesseeseeessueesueeseeeseueessaeess 104 VISIS TONO Maa con 104 DT80 Ethernet COMMUNICATIONS occcocconccccconcnnccnnconccancnnrnnncnnnonrnnncnnrnanennrnnrnnncnnnnns 104 EINernet Concepts uses dad 104 o O ted ance AE EE A EAT 104 IP Subnet Mask IP Gateway iii aa 105 Ethernet Settings are Preserved occooocccoccccocnccocnoconncnonccnnnononnonannonanonnnnonannnnannnnnnnonnnenaness 106 EPA e A era 106 Network Adapter A
260. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnoncnnnnnns 130 Battery Guidelines for Long Term Storage coocooccccncoccocncococonconononcnnnnnnconcnnonanononnnnnos 130 Internal Main Battery During DT80 Storage oocccocccocccocncocnconococnnocnnonnnonncnononononononanonanos 130 Internal Memory Backup Battery During DT80 Storage ooccccccnccccnccccnnoncncncnccncnconcnonars 131 LOW POWER OPERATION ccsscesccnscenccnccnsensonscnscnscnsecnscnscnseensonscnsecnscusecssensenssensenssnness 131 e 131 Always Trying to Sleep ooocccocccoocnoconnoconnononccnnncnnnnonnnnnannnnnnnnnnnonannnnannonannnnnnnnnnnenaninanes 131 Controlling Seep carnosas 132 Extending Battery Life ooccoconccconccccnccocncconnocannonancnnonconnnonnnonnnnnnannonannnnannonnnnnnnnnnaness 132 Low Power PrOGaMS cistitis nin a oanietaslcisuaoniioneatieanllad onal 132 Part L Sensors and Channels 0 csccccsececseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeseeess 133 Analog CHANNELS ciao aa 133 Analog Sensors and MeasureMelt ocooccccccccnncncoccccncncnnnncononononcnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnonannnnos 133 4 20MA Current LOODS rota pata cocoa 133 O A o Se A E oak dredagmmeeaedae anda 134 Mco EN ESE za 134 Using Thermocouples with the DT80O oooccocccccocccccccnconcnnonccncnocnconcncnncnnonacononcnnoncnconnnnonrncnnrnnnnass 135 ci oa TYDES eee ee ene eee ee EE ee ee ee ene 135 Grounded Thermocouples c ccccccesccceececeececeececeececseeeseecesecessacesseeeeseee
261. nnnnonnnrnnonnnnnnonnnrnrnnnnrinonnns 56 IAS Cra ON APP E 57 PUN SOG ANA A AE sii oia 57 Rainflow Cycle Counting spas ars 58 Channel Options ScaliNg occcoccconnocanocononcconccnnconanonanonnnnnnnnnrnnarennrnnnrnanennnenanenanos 61 Channel Factor Mia ida 61 taste Funcions F masesei dolida 61 PS IN ea E E E A 62 Polynomials YI seccoriiisesn inr a a E N e E a T 62 Thermistor Scaling nto icias 63 Channel Variables NCV cccccsccccssseccccesseeeceeseeeceeececceseeeseueesseeeeesegseeeseuseeessseeessageees 63 Calculations EXPEESSIONS sensacion ine 65 Conditional Calculations sous cantina ls canal 65 Combining MethodS AAA nnmnnn 65 Part F Logging and Retrieving Data o coccccocconcocnonconcococnonronnannnos 67 Format of Returned Data csc ees ace EEEE 67 Character Pairs Carriage Return Line Feed oc ooccccccccccnccccnccocnconcncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnnos 67 Two Format Modes for Returned Data coocooccccccccnccncocnconcocnnoncncnnononnonanonnnnanonnnnanons 67 Free Format Mode isso alli odas 67 FIXed Format Mode H isis dai wanedelesndinmenssadeaded 68 Eo AA E 69 LOGON and LOGOFF Commands c occcoccncnccnnncncnccnnncnnnncncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnors 69 ESOC A 69 Bci ISSU CS xis see doeececc tas steecdesecesteussvghdtenedustsdhadesdcenateetausenctdicecdesSkasecensesareb dreeatenases 70 io PP ee ee eee een eee eee ere 70 Data Storage Capacity Reading
262. nnocnnnnannnnannnnnnonnnnnnannonaninnaninos 145 Other Considerations 0 0 Ai 145 righ speed Counter Channels atinada dd dali 146 Usina Counter INPUIS uapnsci ls lo E 146 Channel TV OCS E A A 146 Channel ODUONS o O LO 146 Connecting to Counter abs ta ee elton ert hie a a etch cece 146 Phase ENCOU Sut da 147 Oiher CONSIDCTATLIONS E o 147 EAN Oe Soria ea oa ei linia 147 SERIAL C HANNE Conicet 148 Connecting to the Serial Chamnel cooccoccconccccconiccnnonocannnnocononnocanonnonanonnonaninnnnanons 148 Setting Serial Channel Parameters ooccooccoccconcocnconiccnnonoconcononanonconnnnorocanonnonanennnnanons 148 senal Channel Commands west ot ica 149 Serial Channel OperatiON oocoocconcoccoccoccccnconconcnnonconcnonnonncononnnnnonnonrnnnnonncnnonnnnnennnnnenoss 150 THE CORTO SIMIO A A A E A A AI me eee 150 Serial Data Transmission and ReceptiON cccoccccccnccccnconcncnonocncnnoncnonanonnnnnnnnnnnncnonannnnnninos 150 COTO Sting OMpUEA CUNA Si o EA 151 Control String INPUT ACTIONS cvostii di 152 Control Stina EXamMplE oi de ias 154 A a N 155 Seal SNS POWE onto liar e icons 155 A heat a behead ee R 155 Serial Channel Debugging ToOOIS ccooccoccconcocnconoccnconoconnnnononcnconannnnonononnonanennnnanons 156 senal Channel Examples ata a 156 Configuring the Serial Channel cccccccccsccceseeceeeeceeeceeeeceueeceueeseeesueecsusessueesseeeseessaas 157 WIRING CONFIGURATIONS ANALOG CHANNEL
263. not send data until the signal is active Conversely a device indicates that it can receive data by driving its RTS output active which is then connected to the other device s CTS input Hz Hertz a unit of frequency instrumentation amplifier A precision differential amplifier for amplifying the DT80 s analog input signals wanted and rejecting any common mode voltage unwanted See Figure 47 e141 IP address A device s address on a TCP IP Ethernet network Every device connected to an Ethernet network must be assigned its own unique IP Number An IP address is written as four decimal numbers eg 192 168 1 209 ISO International Organization for Standardisation job A logical hold all for a group of schedules and other commands and related data and alarms Each job has a name and a directory structure that organizes this information See Jobs r19 kB kilobyte 1024 bytes kbps kilobits per second 1024 bps kelvin sense point A particular point in a measurement circuit where a measurement should be made to ensure the best possible accuracy by ensuring that unwanted voltage drops due to current flows are minimized Symbol gt LED indicator Light emitting diode indicator The DT80 has three LEDs on the front panel which light to indicate Sampling Internal Disk Activity and Attention Required See 290 for more details logging Recording or storing data The DT80 logs data to its internal memory and o
264. nough to take sufficient readings during a cycle to adequately characterise the loop closures For example the schedule RA50T 3BGI RAINFLOW a b c dIV W measures the input every 50mSec 50T 20 times sec and counts loop closures The W channel option declares this as a working channel does not return or log the individual samples of strain stress see W r379 The fastest sampling rate is obtained by the schedule trigger RA FAST options 3BGI RAINFLOW a b c dIV W See WORKING WITH SCHEDULES P48 Reporting Rainflow Data The Rainflow Report Rainflow data is collected over long periods of time using the RAINF LOW channel option Then periodically the rainflow cycle histogram can be retrieved by a computer using the RAINF LOW command To report the rainflow cycle histogram send the original rainflow channel option exactly as originally defined for the channel but as a command That is send the command RAINFLOW a b c div to the DT80 The DT80 returns a tabular report as illustrated below which is normally viewed and saved in the Receive upper window of DeTransfer DeLogger software does not support the Rainflow Report Rainflow 5 rejection 01 01 2000 Usd niVRangeMeanCycles 110 00 0 223 011 427 E Stew 6 4410 812 46 5514 411 96 OGL UL fial EA cz 20 DU 9928 80 00 101032 40 00 111386 018 0L Lels 9 00 00 LALA 20 UU 141446 80 00 121350 40 00 161654 00 00 Lo Lio sO Leleol 20 00
265. ns alarms for JobName starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x DT80 User s Manual are not the same as the BEGIN and END keywords used to indicate the start and end of a DT80 job Type date and time inthe DT80 s fixed format style ISO format see Examples U Commands 276 If a schedule isn t specified data is always unloaded schedule by sche dule Type date and time in formats that match your DT80 s current setup P31 and P39 If a schedule isn t specified alarms are always unloaded schedule by sche dule Note BEGIN and END used here are not the same as the BEGIN and END keywords used to indicate the start and end of a DT80 job Page 167 A JobName x from A JobName x from to Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date Returns alarms for JobName report schedule x starting from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END time or time date Alarms A Returns the current job s alarms in the order of report Type date and A schedule A to K time inthe A from Returns the current job s alarms starting from time or DT80 s date time fixed format style A rom to Returns the current job s alarms starting from time or Le Ja ne date time and ending with time or date time poa a Ax Returns the current job s alarms for report schedule x ee Ax from
266. nt is not mechanically stressed and is not contaminated by impurities the devices are stable reliable and accurate The DT80 supports four RTD types Platinum a 0 003850 DIN43760 PT385 Platinum a 0 003916 JIS PT392 C1604 Nickel Ni a 0 005001 Copper Cu a 0 00390 The alpha is defined by Rigo Fo Q 0 C 100R where R isthe resistance at 0 C Rio is the resistance at 100 C The RTD channel types see PT385 e28 PT392 p28 NI 28 and CU 2s are connected as for a resistance The 0 C resistance is assumed to be 100Q for platinum and 1000Q for nickel types Other values can be specified as a channel option The default connection is for a 3 wire measurement but 4 wire can be specified as a channel option for greater accuracy For example PT385 4W 50 0 reads a 4 wire 50Q at 0 C device IC Temperature Sensors IC Integrated Circuit temperature sensors are devices that are constructed on small silicon chips These are linear sensitive and available in both voltage and current output configurations Sometimes called monolithic sensors Their disadvantages are e limited temperature range generally 40 C to 150 C like thermistors e self heating from power dissipation caused by the excitation current needed to read the sensor The DT80 supports the following commonly available IC temperature sensors Semiconductor current AD590 1p A K Figure 70 source
267. nternal Power Main Battery The DT80 is fitted with an internal 6V 1 2Ah sealed lead acid gel cell battery It s known as the DT80 s main battery to distinguish it from the DT80 s other internal battery the memory backup battery The main battery is completely maintenance free and rechargeable being automatically charged by the dataTaker data logger s inbuilt battery charger whenever an external power supply is connected to either of the DT80 s 11 28Vdc inputs Figure 45 The battery is fitted with spade terminals Main Battery is Disconnected for Shipping The DT80 is shipped with its main battery disconnected Therefore e if you intend to use the internal main battery as the data logger s power source connect the main battery as described in INSIDE THE DT80 2126 if an external source is to be used to power the DT80 there is no need to connect its internal main battery HOWEVER Recommendation Regardless of how DT80 is powered it is recommended internal main battery is connected By doing this it guarantees uninterrupted data acquisition and logging because the internal main battery is then always available to continue powering the dataTaker data logger if the primary external supply is accidentally disconnected or fails The topic INSIDE THE DT80 r126 explains how to connect the internal main battery In addition the main internal battery is a gel cell type if a gel cell battery remains flat for any length of tim
268. ntiate schedules on the basis of function or purpose some collect primary data others perform intermediate calculations others process alarms and yet others are responsible for returning and logging data or choose to assign a schedule to a single channel such as the DT80 s Serial Channel See also Jobs r19 Types of Schedules General Purpose Report Schedules RA RB RK The DT80 supports eleven general purpose report schedules which you use to carry out the repetitive processes of scanning input channels evaluating calculations handling alarms managing output channels returning and logging data and so on These report schedules have the identifiers RA RB RC RD RE RF RG RH RI RJ and RK A report schedule executes the processes assigned to it whenever it is triggered A schedule trigger can be e an interval of time e an external event e an internal event e a poll request from a host computer Trigger on Time Interval CL TERNE LLL ny Figure 7 Typical interval triggered schedule Report schedules can be triggered at regular intervals of time determined by the DT80 s realtime clock Intervals can be an integer number of seconds minutes hours or days nD Days 1 lt n lt 65535 nH Hours 1 lt n lt 65535 nM Minutes 1 lt n lt 65535 nS Seconds 1 lt n lt 65535 nT Milliseconds Thousandths of seconds 5 lt n lt 65535 none Continuous Note The schedule first runs on the next multiple of the in
269. number of parts Firstly the Schedule ID next the schedule options and finally the schedule trigger There are no spaces between the different parts Schedule ID Schedule ID The Schedule ID consists of the letter R Report schedule followed by a letter identifying the schedule Each schedule has a unique identifier these are summarized in the following table Polled schedule RX 1 available See Polled Report Schedule RX P45 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 39 Immediate report schedule No schedule ID You may create any number but See Immediate Report Schedules only one can be sent to the DT80 at a Se time Statistical sub schedule RS 1 available but is applied to one or See Statistical Report Schedules more of the other report schedules P46 Schedule Name Schedule Name The schedule name is optional and consists of text max 8 characters enclosed in double quotes This name is used in reports and is normally used to document the purpose of a given schedule Schedule Options Schedule Options Schedule options are enclosed in brackets and define where to log the information generated by the schedule This includes e the size of the DATA file and whether data records are to be overwritten when it is full e the size of the ALARM file and if the alarm records are to be overwritten when it is full The schedule option syntax is as follows lt Dest gt DATA lt DataOverwrite gt lt DataSize gt
270. o occur when the RS trigger is an event the statistical sub schedule has been halted or a statistical scan interval RS is longer than the reporting time interval Statistical Channel Options and Multiple Reports If statistical options are part of a multiple report schedule 233 each option list must contain a statistical option for example 4PT385 I 500 AV MX TMX MN TMN Note that the first channel option list I 500 AV must include all of the options required for managing and sampling the channel This rule applies to any options above the configuration line in the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options 232 table because the channel is sampled and scaled according to the first option list Statistical Channel Options and Alarms Statistical results are tested in alarms by first assigning them to channel variables see Channel Variables NCV 632 Average AV The average or mean is the sum of all the channel readings divided by the number of readings It is very useful in reducing sensor noise See the Statistical r37 category Standard Deviation SD Standard deviation is a measure of the variability of the data about the average or mean The variation may be due to electrical noise or process changes The units of standard deviation are the same as the channel reading See the Statistical P37 Category Maximum and Minimum MX and MN The maximum and minimum of a set of channel readings can be reported with the
271. ob s set of commands file Returns JobName s set of commands file Returns all currently defined jobs sets of command files Protects the current job from deletion its command file from modification and its data from deletion Protects JobName from deletion its command file from modification and its data from deletion Protects all jobs from deletion their command file from modification and their data from deletion Allows the current job to be deleted its command file to be modified and its data to be deleted Allows JobName to be deleted its command file to be modified and its data to be deleted Allows all jobs to be deleted their command files to be modified and their data to be deleted Deletes the current job from the DT80 Deletes only JobName from the DT80 Deletes all jobs from the DT80 Deletes the current job s data from the DT80 Deletes only JobName s data from the DT80 Deletes all jobs data from the D780 Deletes the current job s alarms from the DT80 Deletes only JobName s alarms from the DT80 Deletes all jobs alarms from the DT80 See Unload Commands 274 See Retrieving Logged Alarm States es Returns the current job s name DT80 User s Manual Page 54 RUNJOB JobName Makes JobName the DT80 s current job Of course JobName must already exist in the DT80 see Table 4 DT80 Job Commands 255 New data created is appended to any existing data for that job RUNJOBONINSERT JobNam
272. odem a DCE device using a straight through full parallel comms cable as shown in Figure 74 2172 When this is done because the DSR line is connected in these cables and since most modems drive DSR active when on the D780 automatically assumes it is connected by modem to the host computer and operates accordingly This is the preferred method e Ifa modem is being used that does not drive its DSR line active when turned on it is recommended that you hardwire DSR to DTR at the DT80 end of the modem cable This simulates an active DSR terminal convincing the D780 that it s connected to a modem Modem Initialization The DT80 monitors its modem and manages it automatically as follows 1 When the DT80 detects that a certain initialization condition exists see Modem Initialization Conditions e101 2 the D780 resets the modem by turning its power off and then on again must use the EXT_POWER_SWITCH profile key to specify to the DT80 how the modem power is controlled see Figure 33 101 3 then sends initialising commands to the modem see Modem Initialization Settings 0 Modem Initialization Conditions The DT80 automatically attempts to initialise the device attached to its Host RS 232 port whenever it detects any of the following conditions e The state of the DT80 s DSR terminal changes from inactive to active When this occurs the DT80 assumes that a modem has just been connected and therefore needs to b
273. olume_label gt lt cc gt lt cs gt where is the logger s serial number is 1 if the file system entry is a directory 0 if it is not is 1 if the file system entry is read only 0 if it is not is only present for files It is the file s size in bytes is the file system entry s creation date in yyyy mm dd form is the file system entry s creation time in hh mm ss form is the file system entry s long name and absolute path is the number of file system entries listed is the number of bytes free on the medium that was just listed is the volume s medium s label is the character count of the record up to and including the just before lt cc gt is a 16 CRC of the characters of the record up to and including the just before lt cs gt The data log files are stored in an HFS hierarchical file structure as follows e within the root directory there is a JOBS subdirectory see Figure 23 P72 e within the JOBS subdirectory there is a subdirectory for each of the jobnames entered into the logger JOB1 JOB2 Figure 23 P72 e within each job subdirectory there is a subdirectory for each of the report schedules in the job A B C see Figure 23 P72 e within each schedule subdirectory there is e alogged data and alarms file DATA_S DBD where S is the schedule letter A B K and DBD is the data file extension Other directories and files are explained in Figure 23 r72 and Figure 25 P73 Dir
274. on diagrams Other Considerations The states of all digital outputs are maintained while the DT80 is asleep Note also that the RELAY output uses a latching relay so no extra current is required to hold it in the closed state One or two digital outputs can be configured to follow the state of an alarm That is when the alarm is inactive the output s are in their default state 1 for 1 4DSO Ofor 5 8DSO 1IRELAY and 1WARN and when the alarm is active the output s will be in their non default state Alarm Digital Action Channels r80 for more information The actual pulse width generated by the Delay option for DSO will not necessarily be exactly as specified For delays of 20ms or less it will be close within 1ms For longer delays the resolution is 16ms however it is guaranteed that the duration will be at least the specified time Note also that like the DELAY channel type Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 729 high values for the DSO Delay option are not recommended as they can prevent the timely evaluation of other schedules The Attention LED may also be flashed by the DT80 to indicate an internal fault or warning condition Attn Indicator 93 This will override the state set using the 1WARN output channel UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 145 High Speed Counter Channels 3V Threshold omparator Counter 1 Clock 47KO 22nF Quad 1 Clock U Y Quad 1 Clock Down Threshold 47KO Comparator 47KQ
275. onses from the DT80 are shown like this The general categories of commands are e channel definitions e g 2TK Kiln temp FF4 these define what measurements are to be taken how they are to be acquired and how the measured values are to be presented e schedule definitions 25 e g RA DATA 2MB 10S these define when a set of measurements are to be taken and where the results are to be stored e job management commands 712 e g BEGIN END SHOWPROG these allow a set of schedule and channel definitions to be grouped into a single program or job which can then be treated as a unit e data management commands 2 e g U unload COPYDATA DELALARMS these allow logged data points and alarms to be retrieved displayed or deleted e configuration commands 5 e g PROFILE Pn parameter char switch these allow various aspects of the DT80 s operation to be adjusted to suit particular requirements Jobs sets of commands are stored in the DT80 s internal file system along with the data they generate Different jobs can be loaded under manual or program control In addition the D780 can automatically run a particular job every time it is reset or powered up See Startup Job r116 Localisation Many different aspects of the DT80 s operation can be customised Some of these relate to the locale in which it is operating in particular the local mains frequency and date time forma
276. option on channel 2 Schedule Commands Program the DT80 by sending individual commands to it by sending several commands all on the one line or by sending a program Program the DT80 by sending schedules and other commands to it from any of the following e ahost computer e aUSB memory device any program present on the USB memory device can be automatically downloaded to the DT80 when the card is inserted e analarm the DT80 can re program itself if an alarm occurs Sent commands are not processed by the D780 until it receives a carriage return dataTaker supervision software inserts this character automatically it is not necessary to type it every time Note the following e The input buffer is 254 characters so command lines must not exceed this length e Each command must be separated by one or more spaces tabs or carriage returns e All schedules must be entered on one line or placed between the BEGIN and END keywords Schedules in More Detail A schedule is a list of channels preceded by a scan trigger specification see Figure 61239 As a general rule when creating schedules don t instruct the D780 to read channels more frequently than is really necessary For example temperatures generally change slowly so rapid reading does not provide extra useful information Up to eleven different schedules can be declared each with a different trigger based on a time interval or a digital input event The schedule s trigge
277. or event trigger the poll trigger X can be applied to a report schedule Then the schedule can be polled that is information requested at any time by the appropriate schedule specific poll command Xa where a is the schedule letter The poll command can be issued e by a host computer or e by an alarm action see Example Alarm Action Processes Using an Alarm to Poll a Schedule s See also Using Digital Outputs P144 Example Trigger on Schedule Specific Poll Command The schedule RDX 1 3TK samples analog channels 1 to 3 as type K thermocouples 1 3TK whenever the D780 receives an XD poll command that is whenever it receives the character sequence XD either from a connected computer or by means of an alarm action from within the DT80 Using Poll Commands with Standard Report Schedules ddit Figure 11 A time triggered or event triggered schedule can also be triggered by its poll command onal scan triggered by XA poll and rom host computer or alarm A report schedule defined with a time or event trigger can also be polled by its appropriate poll command at any time For example the report schedule RC5M 1V 2V 3V normally runs every 5 minutes 5M but it can also be run at any time by an XC poll command from the host computer or an alarm For schedules that have a long interval this is useful for checking that a sensor is functioning Trigger While While condition
278. or exists in a line the DT80 ignores the remainder of that line Therefore if such a line contains an END statement the D780 never sees the END statement which can leave the DT80 in an indeterminate command processing state How BEGIN END Works When the DT80 receives the BEGIN keyword the D780 halts all currently executing schedules and deletes them ready to receive the new program UNLESS e the schedules are locked see F in Switches 2112 e112 Or e the current program contains data or e the current program contains alarms or e the current program is locked The BEGIN END construct can contain blank lines and any other DT80 commands these are executed on entry When END is received the original Halt Go state is restored See Jobs 719 219 for additional important BEGIN END information Using Immediate Schedules in Programs Immediate schedules are often included in D780 programs for tasks such as assigning initial values to channel variables setting output channels to initial states taking tare readings for input channels and so on In these cases enter the immediate schedule processes after the BEGIN keyword and before the first report schedule For example here s a program containing three immediate schedules lines 2 3 and 4 BEGIN 10CV W 10 22CV W 125 ADSO 1 RAIM 1TK Oven Temp 1CV IF LCV gt 22CV 10CV 10CV 1 IF 10CV lt 1 4DSO 0 END When the above program is sent to t
279. ore a frequency schedule is defined Internal measurement check Sec 3 0 to Send P61 0 to disable interval 30000 Gain set to use 1 Oto 1 Send P63 0 for default gain set P63 1 for characterized gain set Table 9 DT80 Parameters Switches UPPERCASE ON lowercase off DT80 switches are analogous to electrical switches and are turned on by uppercase and off by lowercase Like parameters switches are internal system settings and generally global in effect unlike parameters switches can only have two values on or off Switch commands can be issued at any time and most take effect immediately Delay in effect may occur if data is buffered in the DT80 or in the host computer Use a PROFILE command to pre set switches see the SWITCHES 114 row in the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details p115 table The DO command can also used for executing switch commands from within schedules See Unconditional Processing DO Command 251 Viewing Switch Settings The STATUS9 command returns the current switch settings to the host For example BPROJOJE E O 1 K T M N 5 S U v N 2 N A Not used Include Channel type C Channel type is included with channel number in returned data for example 5PT392 instead of 5 See FORMAT OF RETURNED DATA P21 Add date to returned d Equivalent to a D at beginning of a schedule s channel list data Echo E Enables echo of commands to host if not unloading data and not
280. ory Internal Memory Backup Battery Internal Power Main Battery Intrinsic Functions Fn Isolation Issues Job Commands Jobs Keys Labelling the End of Unloaded Data LED LED indicator LEDs and Messages After a Reset LM135 LM137 LM138 LM35 series Locking Schedules Logging Logging Alarm States Logging and Retrieving Alarms LOGON and LOGOFF Commands Main Battery Manual Reset Button MAX_CD_IDLE Maximum Memory Memory backup battery Modem Modem remote connections Modem Remote RS 232 Connection Modem and logger configuration Modem Automatic Baud Rate Selection Modem Cable UM 0085A0 150 29 30 31 118 130 149 23 69 50 19 42 48 182 90 76 182 182 120 28 133 163 133 163 49 20 69 69 180 182 85 86 73 84 19 49 69 85 129 119 101 115 37 19 198 172 181 131 131 Modem Communications Protocol Modem Initialization Modem power Modem Status Mounting the DT80 Multiple Reports Naming Channel Variables NI No Logging No Sleep Conditions null modem cable ONINSERT DXC ONRESET DXC Optimal Speed Output Data Format Parameters Password Protection Comms Ports PH Configuration Commands PLC Plug and Play Polled Report Schedule RX Polled Schedule Polling Alarm Data Polynomials Yn Powering the DT80 Powering the DT80 s Modem PPP Communications Profile prog
281. ote each alarm uses 256bytes and consequently reduces data storage accordingly See also Data Storage Capacity Readings MB r70 USB memory device Commands FORMAT A This command reformats the inserted USB memory device and create the minimum directory and file structure Warning This command deletes all data from the USB memory device UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 125 INSIDE THE DT80 Accessing the main battery 1 Remove the power connector 2 Remove the screws from the other end of the logger 3 Remove this end of the logger 4 Pull the purple battery tail 5 Disconnect the battery terminals UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 126 Accessing the lithium memory backup battery 1 Remove the power connector ra 2 Remove all the terminal blocks 4 Remove the screws from the other end of the logger 5 Remove this end of the logger 6 Pull the purple battery tail UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 127 Mounting the DT80 Dimensions Clearances UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 128 Power POWERING THE DT80 Operating Environment The DT80 is an electronic instrument Electronics and water in any form do not mix Condensation can be a serious problem in the tropics and in cooler areas where wide temperature variations are possible Use a sealed case and include sachets of silica gel to avoid problems If the DT80 gets wet immediately disconnect and remove al
282. ows returned data to be in fixed fields All data is placed into fields of the same width defined by P33 by space padding to the left If the field width is not sufficient least significant characters are truncated from the right Fixed fields are useful when returned data is to be tabulated or forwarded to software with a simple string parser Logging Data Go for quality not quantity The DT80 stores data acquired from input channels and calculations into its internal memory or an external USB memory device Data is logged in files within the DT80 s file system see The DT80 File System 71 The data from each report schedule is logged into separate files When the logged data is later unloaded the data is unloaded for each report schedule in turn The DT80 stores approximately 90 000 data values per megabyte of memory Therefore the DT80 s 64MB internal memory can hold approximately 5 000 000 data values and a USB memory device can hold approximately 90 000 data values per Mbyte See also Data Storage Capacity Readings MB 270 Logged data is retained in the internal memory of the DT80 when the DT80 is reset and if its main power supply is removed LOGON and LOGOFF Commands Globally enable data logging by sending the LOGON command and globally disable data logging by sending the LOGOFF command Data logging can also be individually controlled for each of the report schedules by the LOGONx and LOGOFF x commands Reme
283. p RS485 network decode two returned floats separated by a comma into the two CVs UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 156 Schedule Action RAISERIAL STX 1SERIAL STX3d 1CV 1CV 1CV 1 Trigger schedule A on arrival of STX scan the integer into 1cv and increment it barcode scanner RAIM 1SERIAL Num Temp Press 13 10 3d 1CV 4 1 2CV send Num Temp Press then CRLF and on new lines 1CV as integer and 2CV as float report generation BEGIN Read data from analog channels and report as text to a printer RAIM connected to the serial channel in the same schedule report 1V 1CV 2TK 2CV generation 1SERIAL Flow 10 1 1CV 13 10 Temp 10 1 2CV 13 10 END PS 9600 N 8 Program to read latitude 8CV and North or South 9Cv BEGIN longitude 10CV and East of West 11Cv from the NMEA 183 RA1SERIAL GPRMC 1SERIAL RS232 8CV 3c 9CV 3 10CV c 11CV e 2 W D T 8 11CV FF2 END data stream issued continuously from a GPS unit Data is logged with date and timestamp Each read is triggered by the GPMRC header at the start of each transmission Remember that if DeTransfer is used to send commands then two backslash characters must be sent each time a backslash is required Configuring the Serial Channel RST CTS Y B RS 232 default RS232 No Used Hand Hand shake shake RS 422 eee Yes Used Used Used Used RS 485 RS485 Yes Z A Y B E that is Z is connected to A and Y is connected to B Handshake
284. perform direct tasks within the DT80 the moment they are sent for example switch parameter unload alarm job and delete commands directory an area on a data storage device used to store related files Also known as a folder DTE Data Terminal Equipment The information source and or destination in an RS 232 communications link The DT80 s Host RS 232 port and Serial Channel are DTE devices as is a PC s RS 232 port serial port The RS232 standard was originally designed for connecting a DTE to a DCE eg a modem However a DTEs can also be directly connected to another DTE by means of a null modem cable echo A communications option for commands you send to the DT80 When echo is turned on see Table 10 DT80 Switches r113 commands you send to the DT80 are automatically returned to the host computer screen Echo is useful for troubleshooting when the echo is on you can see by the returned commands that the DT80 is actually receiving them Once you re confident that it is receiving you can turn the echo off Also any error message appears right under the echo of the erroneous command making the error obvious EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory A special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge Requires data to be written or erased one byte at a time compare with Flash 2181 below Retains its contents even when power is unavailable See also MEMORY 7125 ena
285. permanent PH b Sets Host RS 232 port baud 50 75 110 rate DT80 default 57600 150 300 PH b p Sets Host RS 232 port baud 600 1200 N none rate and parity 2400 4800 O odd or PH b p d Sets Host RS 232 port baud 9600 E even 8or7 rate parity and databits 19200 PH b p d s Sets Host RS 232 port baud 38400 1 or 2 rate parity databits and 57600 or stopbits 115200 ELE Ig PH b p d s Sets Host RS 232 port baud NOFC no flow control rate parity databits stopbits HWE C hardware flow and flow control control or SWE C software flow control SWHW both hardware and software flow control PH Returns the current Host RS 232 port comms settings for example 57600 N 8 1 NOFC Table 8 DT80 Host RS 232 port configuration commands SETDIALOUTNUMBER Command Send the command SETDIALOUTNUMBER digits to the DT80 to specify the telephone number to be dialled by the DIAL command to establish a connection to the host computer DIAL Command The DIAL command causes the DT80 to instruct its modem to dial out to the telephone number specified by SETDIALOUTNUMBER If a call cannot be placed for any reason the command is ignored This is often used as an alarm action command to cause the D780 to dial out when an alarm condition arises see Alarm Action Processes sz HANGUP Command The HANGUP command causes the DT80 to instruct its modem to hang up disconnect the current dial out or dial in connection If there
286. ption of the firmware in the logger Status Indicator Lights Sample Indicator The sample indicator is illuminated whenever any channel in the current job is sampled This includes all analog digital and internal channels Disk Indicator The disk indicator is illuminated whenever the internal disk is reading or writing For example the disk indicator will illuminate when writing data to the internal data store or when unloading data from the data store Attn Indicator This LED is used to e warn that an unexpected DT80 reset has occurred flashing e warn that logging has been partially or fully suspended flashing e indicate a warning state under the control of a user program continuously on Unexpected Reset One of the following messages may be displayed following DT80 reset in conjunction with a flashing Attn LED Press any key to clear the message and the flashing LED DISO restarted The DT80 lost power both external and the internal battery This message may also be Power loss displayed if the hardware reset button accessed using a paper clip is pressed Diol restarted A triple push reset was performed by pressing the hardware reset button three times Safe mode within 10s which temporarily restores factory settings UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 93 DIGU restarted This indicates a possible problem with the DT80 firmware Contact dataTaker Support if SW exception you see this message The DT80 lost power and all
287. puts Current excited voltage measurement PT385 PT392 NI CU RTDs see PT385 P28 Output in Degrees as set by P36 YSO1 to YS07 YS16 YS17 thermistors see YSO1 YSO2 YSO3 Output in Degrees as set by P36 YS04 YSO5 YS06 YSO7 P28 4 Wire Resistance Inputs and terminals send an excitation current through the unknown resistance while the remaining terminals sense the voltage across it 4 wire resistance methods are the most accurate because e the resistances lead wires are not part of the measurement circuit e negligible current flows through the sense wires Maximum number of independent 4 wire resistance inputs on a DT80 1 per channel x 4 channels 4 Figure 60 R1 Wiring for 4 wire resistance input 2R 4W 1R 4W 3R 4W I 1PT392 4W 3 Wire Resistance Inputs Figure 61 R2 Wiring for 3 wire resistance input UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 160 3R 4R 1R 2 Wire Resistance Inputs Figure 62 R3 Wiring for 2 wire resistance input 3R 4R 1R Bridge Inputs BGV voltage excited bridge see BGV e27 BGI current excited bridge see BGV P27 6 Wire BGV Inputs Important a precision external Supply must be used Related information Output in parts per million ppm Output in parts per million ppm e the Bridge 227 category in the Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 222 table e the Resistance and Bridge 235 category i
288. r K 4 Offset corrections are subtracted from the measured value 5 The bitmask specifies which channels are affected by a multi bit read or write Channels where the corresponding bitmask bit is zero are not affected For example LDNO 3 0 will set digital outputs 1D and 2D low but the state of outputs 3D and 4D will be unchanged 6 The delay channel factor can be used in conjunction with the R channel option to generate a fixed width pulse output Note use delay carefully as it prevents execution of any other schedules measurements or outputs during the delay Internal Channel Types in detail The DT80 has its own internal channels which can be read in exactly the same way as the obvious external channels Use the channel types below Time amp Date The DT80 s real time clock calendar has a resolution of 122us based on a 24 hour clock Time is read in the same way as any channel but without a channel number That is sending T returns Tins LL i4S TO ZL3 This channel type is writable so you can set the time by sending T 12 20 00 Time can be in several formats selected by parameter P39 as follows O default Hours minute seconds seconds tias TO 00 P41 controls the number of sub second digits between 0 and 6 default is 3 digits 1 s s decimal seconds since midnight 12210 005 2 m m decimal minutes since midnight USA 3 h h decimal hours since midnight 11 752 The current date can also be returned D
289. r an external USB memory device Logging is a separate user configurable operation that the DT80 performs in addition to its basic function of data acquisition taking measurements from sensors connected to its inputs See also data logging system e180 and data acquisition system r180 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 182 Isb least significant bit within a byte LSB Least Significant Byte within a multi byte word mo milliohm 10 Q mA milliamp 10 A MB megabyte 1048576 bytes Mbps Megabits per second monolithic sensors Also called IC Integrated Circuit sensors Sensors that are constructed on a single piece of silicon using integrated circuit fabrication techniques Available sensors include those for measuring temperature see IC Temperature Sensors 137 pressure acceleration and concentration of various compounds in gases and liquids ms millisecond 10 s msb most significant bit within a byte MSB Most Significant Byte within a multi byte word multidrop In communications a multidrop configuration allows multiple devices to be connected in parallel by means of a single twisted pair cable This requires that each device switch off tri state its transmitter when it is not actively transmitting multiplexer A many in one out switching network that allows many input signals to time share one analog input circuit It sequentially routes multiple channels to a single signal processing syste
290. r can be changed at any time The trigger can also be modified by the program itself see Alarm Action Text so A list of channels without a trigger specification can be entered at any time These are scanned immediately without affecting other schedules that may be operating For more information P46 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 18 Important A schedule s channel list cannot be altered without re entering all schedules In fact all schedules must be entered at the same time either all on one line or between BEGIN and END keywords see WORKING WITH SCHEDULES 722 Jobs A DT80 job is a logical hold all for a group of schedules and other commands and related data and alarms Each job has a directory structure that organizes these components The command BEGIN signifies the start of a job and the command END signifies the end of the job A job comprises all statements beginning with and including BEGIN up to and including END The DT80 can store more than one job but only one can be the current active job A job remains current in the D780 until e reset the DT80 see RESETTING THE D780 r119 or e send anew job to the D780 or e use the RUNJOB JobName command to make JobName the current job P55 Scaling and Calculations The DT80 can scale the channel input data to engineering units by applying intrinsic functions spans or polynomials Arithmetic expressions provide cross channel and other calculations Various
291. r or a DT80 for example No two devices on the network should have the same node number Often called a host number There are five classes of IP addresses and the two parts of an IP address vary according to the class of the IP address The Bottom Line Take great care when obtaining a correct valid unused IP address for assigning to your DT80 The topic DT80 Ethernet Setup e106 contains step by step instructions for doing this IP Subnet Mask IP Gateway Small networks are usually a single entity just one network of nodes devices connected together by an Ethernet cable In these cases individual nodes on the network only require an IP address But larger networks may comprise a number of smaller networks called subnets connected together These require an IP subnet mask IPSN another 32 bit number that determines how each IP address is subdivided into network portion and node portion For example network portions underlined can be 192 9 200 15 or 192 9 200 15 or 192 9 200 15 In other words the subnet mask specifies which part or parts of every IP address are to be read as the larger network s address and which parts the remaining parts are to be read as the node s address Large networks may also be connected together through gateways computers that connect multiple networks together translating and routing one network s format protocol or application information for use on another network If a node on one
292. r value 74 ASCII J will be sent e The g and G conversions select exponential notation if the exponent is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the specified Width Precision and Flag The various conversion types described above can be further qualified using the optional width precision and flag specifiers These allow you to control exactly how the transmitted data will be formatted The width value specifies the minimum output field width that is the minimum number of characters that will be output If the converted value requires fewer characters than the specified field width then space or zero characters are used to pad the field to the specified width If the converted value results in more characters than the specified field width then all characters will still be output The width parameter is The precision value means different things depending on the conversion type not applicable for the Sc conversion type d x X o integer minimum number of digits to print leading zeroes will be added if necessary no minimum e E f floating point number of digits to the right of decimal point 6 digits g G mixed number of significant digits shown 6 digits UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 151 c single character not applicable s string maximum number of characters from the string to print no maximum The width and precision values are normally specified as numeric constants eg 39 2 but t
293. ram Programming Protecting Startup Files protocol PT385 DT80 User s Manual 101 102 103 114 102 32 128 33 47 56 65 39 78 78 84 36 64 139 62 129 101 102 103 108 109 114 2 24 97 101 102 102 109 ii ia 105 215 TE 119 120 184 18 113 113 116 116 184 28 28 PT392 Rainflow Cycle Counting Rainflow Data Real Time Repeating alarms Resets Resetting the DT80 Resistance Resistance and Bridge Resistance Inputs Retrieval Commands Retrieval Commands Summary Retrieving Logged Alarm States Retrieving Logged Data Returned Data Format RISC RS232 RS 232 Pinouts RTD SCADA Scaling Schedule Schedule Name Schedules Serial Channel Serial Channel Commands Serial Channel Commands in Schedules Serial Channel Debugging Tools Serial Channel Enable Serial Channel Examples 58 59 184 77 2 95 166 1 103 103 104 107 HEEE 119 119 35 161 161 160 136 137 73 86 166 168 20 73 185 185 97 97 100 171 2 97 171 28 133 137 138 160 185 185 19 61 185 40 19 20 39 42 178 43 148 157 149 159 111 158 156 Page 189 Serial Channel terminals DTE SETDIALOUTNUMB ER Command Setting the DT80 s Time T Setting Up a Direct Connection Setting Up a Remote Connection Shared Terminal Shared terminal current inputs u Shared terminal
294. rate and test them using a schedule command such as the one above prior to entering the full program Change the format of the returned data For example sending the parameter and switch commands P22 44 n u to the D780 instructs it to change the data separator to ASCII 44 the comma and disable channel number and units The returned data looks like 132 Up 300 ds LD Ar DI y USB memory devices The DT80 s USB port supports USB memory devices which can be used e as removable data storage See Logging r69 e as amedium for transferring logged data from the internal memory of a DT80 to a computer see Retrieving Logged Data USB memory device Transfer 273 e to upgrade a DT80 s operating system See UPGRADING DT80 FIRMWARE 2172 e to load a start up job into a DT80 see Startup Job 115 Data is stored on the USB memory device is in a Windows compatible file structure see Directory Structure of USB memory devices r72 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 20 Format of Returned Data The DT80 can e return data to a host computer as it is measured real time data and or e store data in memory to be retrieved at a later date logged data You can control whether data is returned or logged on a per channel per schedule or global basis Real time data The DT80 can be configured to return real time data in one of two possible formats e free format mode e fixed format mode also known as host mode or formatte
295. re discussed inHost RS 232 Port Commands 22s Modem Status The system variable 25SV gives an indication of the current state of the modem It can be used with alarms to determine the current state of the modem connection and to behave accordingly See 25SV 232 in the Table 2 DT80 System Variables r327 Setting Up a Remote Connection To set up a remote connection 1 Configure the following DT80 PROFILE parameters using a direct connection between a local computer running DeTransfer DeLogger or HyperTerminal and the D780 Figure 35 2103 a Use PROFILE HOST_ PORT BAUD _RATE if the DT80 s baud rate is to be set to something other than its default which is 57600 baud When the D780 initializes its modem the modem is automatically set to this baud rate see Modem Automatic Baud Rate Selection 102 b Use PROFILE HOST_ PORT FLOW_CONTROL to set the DT80 s flow control Hardware flow control is preferred c Use PROFILE HOST_ MODEM EXT POWER_SWITCH if the D 80 is to power down reset the modem see Figure 33 101 d Reset the DT80 to enable these PROFILE settings to take effect Use a firm reset send the SINGLEPUSH command or carry out a hardware reset or a power up reset see Resetting the DT80 r119 DT80 Configure E gt DT80 CABLE Figure 35 Use a direct connection to configure the DT80 for a remote connection Here s an example of commands that may be used PROFILE
296. re to the DT80 during the upgrade There are also other ways you can upgrade your DT80 s firmware remotely by FTP transfer for example If you have a special requirement such as this contact your data Taker representative Firmware Upgrade Host USB or RS232 Port Here s the procedure for upgrading the firmware of a DT80 by using DeLogger version 2 revision 16 or later on a computer directly connected to the DT80 s Host RS 232 port You can also use DeTransfer Version 3 18 or later Note If you attempt to make a connection to a DT80 DeLogger checks the firmware version of the DT80 against the latest version that it can see in the C Program Files datataker DeLogger Firmware dt80 directory and offers to initiate a firmware upgrade if it finds that a later version is available You should ensure you have properly prepared the DT80 as described in Recommended Preparation 2 72 above before allowing either this automatic upgrade to occur or when using the Upgrade Firmware menu option to initiate the upgrade process as described in the following steps 1 Obtain the appropriate firmware Flashware upgrade zip file from www dataTaker com or your dataTaker representative Unzip the files in the zip file and place them where the host computer can access them on the computer s hard disk or a network drive Placing them in the directory C Program Files datataker DeLogger Firmware dt80 is a good idea because DeLogger looks in this
297. roblem UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 138 Voltage Excitation BGV The DT80 can measure the excitation voltage at the bridge and compensate numerically for the lead voltage loss This requires a 6 wire connection with the BGV channel type see 6 Wire BGV Inputs 51 This is termed voltage excitation Constant Current Excitation BGI The alternative lead compensation method is to apply a constant current default is 2 5mA or 200uA to the bridge assuming the bridge resistance is known and constant and then calculate the excitation voltage Vex See Bridge Inputs P162 For full and half bridge constant current excitation use the nBGI Ra channel type where Ra is the bridge arm resistance in ohms If the arm resistances are not equal a correction must be applied For the full bridge all four resistors are external to the DT80 One or more of these resistors may be active and the remainder are completion resistors Four connection wires are required so that the 4W channel option is required For example nBGI 4W 120 defines a 4 wire constant current bridge with an arm resistance of 120 ohms For the half bridge bridge completion resistors are external to the DT80 Scaling The DT80 scales all bridge channel types to a ratiometric form with units of parts per million ppm V Reading By 52 10 ppm ex where Wow Is measured as a voltage V iS measured by a reference channel for voltage excitation but calcula
298. s The more channels you define the slower each channel is sampled Speed Factor Data Storage and Return Options Formatting data for storage or return consumes processor time and consequently reduces sampling speeds Speed Factor Data Formatting Minimizing the number of significant digits in the stored and returned data frees processor time which results in increased sampling speed Best Speed You can adjust one or more of the settings in the table below to increase the DT80 s normal mode sampling speed However be aware that such optimization generally compromises the accuracy of the DT80 The settings are listed in the order in which we recommend you apply them P11 Mains frequency Increase P11 to increase speed lr Return data Turn data returns off GLn Gain lock Use gain lock GLx to prevent autoranging P10 Sets recording of Test The default is zero which is the UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 168 MDn UM 0085A0 results on or off The fastest option Default 1s off Measurement delay Sets the delay after setting up an analog channel before the actual measurement is taken Should avoid setting this less than 5mS if changing input channels DT80 User s Manual Page 169 ASCII DECIMAL TABLE Decimal ASCII Control Description Decimal ASCII Description Decimal ASCII Description 0 NUL null 32 space 64 e 96 l backquote 1 SOH A 33 65 97 2 STX B 34 i dbl quote 66 98 p 3 ETX C 35 67 99
299. s 79 Alarm Digital Action CRANMGCIS ses ra a a o da 80 O A A Gen ade cscs deste A eee eee 80 PATAUI FAC UOM i PROCS SSCS an cette a Sewn sete Game ne aera same et aaa eee 82 COMINO AIIMS ee ene eee ea ane era eo de 83 O tame See ec aa cea ieee Moe La einen oe ea eta eee 84 Logging and Retrieving AlarmMmsS oococccccccncccccnconconnonnoncnncnncnncnaronronrnnrnnrnarnnrnannnnnanes 84 EGO ING Alar mMm A A A a 85 Logging Alarm States What s Logged What s Returned occcocccccccccccnccccnconcncnacnnnnnnnos 86 Retreving Logged Alarm tales tl aos 86 TRG Unload Commands q ei 86 TINSA Fundas COMMANA Skoa aden ts aentodeaasedeantaadenetardee tag seeess Gene 87 near Unid Commands ts sisi las 88 Deleting Logged Alarm RecordS sita tates amtearentices agama otstea ine 88 Part H DFOO Front Panes 90 A A A ela eae EEEE 90 Displaying Channels and Alarm sects te ccutenes os aie eaten cooen A ede tase A 90 CA PP O 91 Controlling what is shown on the display ocoooccccccncoccncccnoncnnccncncnncnonanononnnnnnnnnnnnonaninnnos 91 Transient MESSI Sida diosas 91 DISDIAY Back aiie a aa a dde laden ve taeoaatiaadac le Mla nana neuen ees 92 Yser dened TUN CIO Sais aia 92 The FUNCTION COMM Alda 92 Selecting FUNCION Sida 92 Default FUNCIONS i ai 92 Keypad OPE ON ii A A AE AAA a db 93 UE Notas cat ate E E E mina lineage daeiasenentbane 93 GF elo a5 arene es a OES ATU mn e a ee 93 Cancel r UNGCHON Rea aaa 93 Special Key Sequences 5c
300. s AD592 Note 2 shunt O Note3 AD590 series input using Analog Devices TMP 17 internal shunt P163 Calibrate by variation of shunt value channel factor Semiconductor zener LM135 2 V scaling degC Figure 70 L3 Wiring for diode voltage output LM2 35 factor Note3 LM135 series input P164 types 1M335 Calibrate using scaling National Semiconductor factor relative to O Kelvin Corp Default scaling factor is 2 to suit external voltage divider Semiconductor voltage 1M34 V offset degC Figure 68 L1 for LM35 output types LM35 adjust Note3 series input full National Semiconductor 1M45 degC temperature range P163 Corp Analog Devices LM50 Note 4 Figure 69 L2 Wiring for LM35 series input LM60 restricted temperature TMP 35 range P163 TMP 36 Offset adjustment is always TMP 37 in degC Digital Digital state input 1 bit DS State Result is 0 low or 1 high Max channel number 8 See Digital Digital nybble input 4 DN 15 bit mask Nybble Result is 0 to 15 Channels Pits Note 5 Channel number LSB of T nybble Max channel number 5 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 28 amp Figure 71 Digital Input Wiring P164 amp Figure 72 Digital Output Wiring P165 Counter Figure 71 Digital Input Wiring P164 Relay Figure 71 Digital Input Wiring P164 P144 Attention LED Figure 71 Digital Input Wiring P164 Internal Maintenance Digital byte input 8 bits Digital state input
301. s IFs Active Halted O Polynomials Spans Defined none none Scan Schedules LOGON LOGOFF 13650 0 Internal kB free used 169260 0 External kB free used B C A E f h 1 K 1 M N r S t U w x Z STATUSn Each STATUS line can be returned individually STATUS2 and 4 return extra information There are also other status levels that are not returned by the general STATUS command STATUS10 12 and 14 STATUS1 Returns version details of the D780 s current operating system For example dataTaker 80 Version 4 00 0001 Flash 2001 02 18 ALe2e 1 STATUS2 Returns information about the D780 s active halted schedules For example A none Scan Schedules Active Halted STATUS4 Returns the DT80 s current defined polynomials and spans For example 2 Polynomials Spans Defined Y1 3 54 1 009 Deg C sf 0 70 100 0 0 1 0 kPa STATUS5 Returns the data logging status lists schedules logging and not logging UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 122 STATUS6 Returns the amount of free and used space in the DT80 s internal memory kB STATUS7 Returns the amount of free and used space in an inserted USB memory device kB STATUS9 Returns the D780 s current switch settings For example B C d E f h T1 K 1 M N R S t U w x Z STATUS10 Returns additional information about the current program in the DT80 For example 27115 15035 1 0 4h 928 4 202 bulk 0 0 3 14 35 et bale Y 0 0 2d 65 8 Humidity TARH 00DA rary B A UA AA
302. s MB cccccccccseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeessaeeeesaeeeseeeeesaees 70 Halt and Go During Data Logging oocccoccccoccccccnccncncnncnnnnnnnnnnnonononncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnnaninos 70 Deleting Logged Datta cccccccscccssccceeeeceeeecueecececsueeseueesueeseeessueessueesaeessusecsueesueessneenaaes 70 Moving Copying and Archive Logged Dadta oocccoccccocnccccnccccnconcononcncnnnnnncncnncncnncnnnnnnnos 71 The T SO File SY SUC IA act cee a 71 Retrieving Logged Data isaac 73 Retrieving Logged Data USB memory device Transfer coocoocccccoccoccccnconconconincnnnnns 73 Retrieving Logged Data Comms Unload occoccccccccncoccocnccccccncononcncncononcncnnnncononanonos 73 UNIDA enee se pecs ccs E emesis aee pirata losas ae opa cie TT TA 714 The U Unload Commands scale ticos 74 The U Unload COMMANAS ccooccnccnccnccnccnnccnncnncnononcnnncononnncnnonnncnnnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnrrnnnnrrnnnrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnns 74 The U Unload CommandS eosrasntncicosato cantina acento tandas 75 Labelling the End of Unloaded Data oocccoccccccnccccnccccnconcnnnononnononnnnconcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnos 76 Guiting an UNI ira ias 76 Part G CAMS sis 77 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 5 Aa CONCE DIS ui i init 77 AC A deel nts antag ea Geese ioe ele seme ae td 78 AVEC A nen rt ROTM ORM tone ta II A Pema tone A 78 yAN Fella gt A Mee E E en A A Ee Ome ee E 79 PAR I se ON a A A A imeteatacu se
303. s is one of the reasons the data Taker data logger is shipped with its main battery disconnected to prolong the overall life of the memory backup battery The other reason is safety during shipping Once the memory backup battery is activated it can be de activated at a later time and thereby return it to an on the shelf situation of zero current drain by following the simple procedure described in Internal Memory Backup Battery During DT80 Storage r131 in the next topic Battery Guidelines for Long Term Storage To look after your DT80 s batteries if it is to be out of use for longer than a month or two do the following Internal Main Battery During DT80 Storage Charge the main battery periodically so that it never goes flat Eight hours charge every three to six months is safe a battery in good condition need only be charged every twelve months The DT80 can be used to to do this by applying power to one of its External Power inputs with the main battery connected inside or remove the battery from the data Taker data logger see INSIDE THE DT80 2126 and charge it from a suitable external charger UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 130 Internal Memory Backup Battery During DT80 Storage Remove the memory backup battery from the DT80 described in INSIDE THE DT80 r126 This of course returns the memory backup battery to a zero drain shelf life situation with an overall shelf life of at least 10 years Then as long as the
304. s not recognise the device as a valid USB mass storage unrecognised device UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 91 Processing If the USB memory device contains a file called ONINSERT DXC then it will be ON INSERT OXG automatically loaded and run by the DT80 Dat ms TTT i a alae This indicates progress during a COPYDATA operation Display Backlight The display backlight stays on when external power is supplied If the D780 is running from internal battery then the backlight will only stay on for 30 seconds after the last key press The actual period that the backlight stays on for after a key press is controlled by P17 in seconds User defined functions The user can define named macros called functions These functions can be executed by the user via the LCD and keypad of the DT80 Functions can be very useful For example the functions can be used to completely reprogram the D780 with a different program assigned to each function The functions can also be assigned by ALARMS The FUNCTION command Functions are defined with the use of the FUNCTION command The user may define up to 10 functions A function is deleted when the user provides no label or command text following the equal character The syntax is as follows FUNCTIONn label commands where n This is the id or slot number of the function to be redefined It must be an integer in the range from 1 to 10 inclusive oo This is optional It is a label that effe
305. s text U Appends measurement units to returned data see FORMAT OF RETURNED DATA 21 and makes error messages verbose see ERROR MESSAGES 174 Intermediate working w Allows working channels see W channel option 37 to be channels reported but not logged See also CALCULATIONS EXPRESSIONS P65 Progressive maxima x Display the progressive maximum and minimum values for and minima statistical channels on the built in display only Stops alarm messages Z Enables alarms to issue action text to host computer or printer See Alarm Action Text r80 Default switches Sets all switches to their default state Table 10 DT80 Switches User Startup Defaults The DT80 can start up after a firm reset a SINGLEPUSH command a hardware reset or a power up reset pre configured with the preferred settings and running the preferred job e To make the D780 start with the preferred configuration settings see data logging system s0 below Use this method to set startup defaults for time format date format mains frequency and other characteristics listed in the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 21 5 table below e To make the D780 start running the preferred job see Startup Job r116 The defaults can be protected against possible corruption see Protecting Startup Files e177 User Startup Profile The DT80 can store the preferred settings and automatically apply them after it is restarted by a firm reset see
306. schedule x U JobName x from Returns JobName s logged data for report schedule x starting from time or time date U JobName x from to Returns JobName s logged data for report schedule x starting from time or time date and ending with time or date time where UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 75 from canbe Type time and date in fixed format time start from first data point 1SO style see examples below logged at or after this time today date time start from first data point logged at or after this time and date to can be time end with last data point logged prior to this time today date time end with last data point logged prior to this time and date Examples U Commands Here s the U from command showing valid forms of fixed format mode date and time U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 250366 U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 U 2000 07 26 Here s the U from to command showing valid forms of fixed format mode date and time U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 250366 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 750244 U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 750244 U 2000 07 26 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 750244 U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 250366 2000 07 26 00 00 01 U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 2000 07 26 00 00 01 U 2000 07 26 2000 07 26 00 00 01 U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 0 250366 2000 07 26 U 2000 07 26 00 00 01 2000 07 26 U 2000 07 26 2000 07 26 Labelling the End of Unloaded Data As Figure 25 shows the DT80 automa
307. sconnected Hard reset like firm reset but DT80 restarts with factory defaults and does not load a new job Ignores does not delete user defaults For use in case of serious problems for example a faulty startup job or inability to communicate with the DT80 because of invalid user defaults FACTORYDEFAULTS Command Disconnected Uses Cleared Maintained Deleted and sent to the factory not run DT80 defaults see pajajap JOU oJe suJeje pue ejep pabBBo ino Factory Defaults P120 Like triple push reset but also deletes user defaults FORMAT B Command Maintained Maintained All jobs including Cleared Not run the current job internal are halted and memory sent to the DT80 removed only not the program job USB environment is memory reset device For low level system recovery and purging Reformats internal memory disk and rebuilds standard directory structure Table 12 DT80 Resets See also MEMORY 2125 Maintaining Parameters and Switches through a Reset You can use PROFILE commands to re apply parameter and switch settings after every soft and firm reset See the PARAMETERS 7114 and SWITCHES 7112 sections in the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 2115 table Wait after RESET Do not send any commands to the D780 for five seconds after sending either the RESET command or the SINGLEPUSH command For example use the DeTransfer command Wn to force a pause after a
308. setting in Hz P11 Vv 0 if none 1 if USB memory device inserted 0 for RX schedule 1 for RA schedule 2 for RB schedule y 11 for RK schedule 12 for immediate schedule Can be used as thermocouple reference channel for cases where the thermocouple output is already compensated eg RA1S 11SV TR 1TT Returns USB memory device presence Returns ID of the owning schedule Returns 0 0 Returns decimal days since base date 1 Jan 1989 Use formatting for more precision for example 12SV FF4 Returns DT800 s serial number Returns version number major minor of the DT800 s firmware see also 6SV and version number Use 14SV FF2 to see all decimal places in version number Returns date as day number of the current year zero 1st of January Returns Host RS 232 port input handshake Bitmask O to 15 line states 8 RI 4 DCD 2 DSR 1 CTS Bitmask 0 to 3 TA 2 DTR 1 RTS Bitmask O to 1 Returns Host RS 232 port output handshake line states Returns Serial Channel input handshake line states RS232 mode only 1 CTS Returns Serial Channel output handshake Bitmask 0 to 1 M line states RS232 mode only 1 RTS Returns current status of a modem 0 no modem connected direct connection assumed connected to the D780 s Host RS 232 port 1 modem connected and no call in progress SEE DT80 Modem Remote RS 232 2 modem connected and call in progress Connection Number of logged dat
309. si 2 Less than the first set point OR greater than or equal to the second set point e 2 Greater than or equal to the first set point AND less than the second set point that is between the two setpoints The setpoints can be floating point constants or channel variables Recommendation When testing digital state inputs for state O or 1 it s best to test for state O using nDS lt 0 5 and to test for state 1 using nDS gt 0 5 This avoids any hunting around the O and 1 values Examples Alarm Condition The alarm command ALARMn 5TK lt 100 actions tests if temperature measured on channel 5 5TK is less than 100 C lt 100 The alarm condition ALARMn 2R gt 50 actions tests if resistance on channel 2 2R is greater than or equal to 50 ohms gt 50 The alarm command ALARMn 10CV lt gt 20CV 30CV actions tests if the value of 10CV is less than the value of 20CV or greater than or equal to the value of 30CV that is if the value of 10CV is outside the range of 20CV to 30CV The alarm command ALARMn 3CV gt lt 5 5 8 5 actions tests if the value of 3CV is greater than or equal to 5 5 and less than 8 5 that is if the value of 3CV is between 5 5 and 8 5 The alarm command ALARMn T gt lt 06 30 18 30 actions tests if the DT80 s time is between 06 30 00 and 18 30 00 Alarm Delay Period An addition to test in the alarm command ALARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses e77 optiona
310. sistant to line and other noise No Flow Control NFC The DT80 can also be set to NFC No Flow Control in which case there is no control of the sender by the receiver Use this setting with care and only where there is no risk of the receiver being over run by excess data from the sender otherwise data loss will occur SWHW Both The DT80 s SWHW setting is provided for backwards compatibility It enables both software flow control and hardware flow control at the same time Echo By default the D180 echoes commands that it receives That is it automatically transmits received commands back to the host see also echo 18 This function can be turned off by sending the echo switch e 2113 Also it s forced off when the DT80 is in fixed format mode for returned data P21 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 99 Input Buffer How the DT80 Receives and Processes a Program The DT80 s input buffer can hold a maximum of 250 characters at any one time This means that any single command or line of a program that is sent to the D780 must be shorter than 250 characters Therefore when writing long command and or comment lines keep the length below 250 characters A command or program line is terminated by a carriage return character this is how the D780 recognizes the end of the command or line and the D780 begins to process the input buffer when each carriage return is received A full 250 characters of program takes up
311. sses e77 optional Action processes can be any DT80 functions to be executed when an alarm is true These functions can be reading input channels setting output channels calculations setting parameters and switches and so on In addition action processes are a very powerful programming facility for the D780 Use them to perform a wide range of program related functions such as re programming on events adaptive schedules see examples below programmed calibration cycles management of digital state outputs and management of the Serial Channel Immediate schedules can be included in action processes Note Action processes cannot include alarm commands or new report schedules Place action processes within the bracket sequence of an alarm command Action processes are executed e once when an ALARM or ALARMn tests true or e repeatedly at the controlling schedule s rate while an ALARMR or ALARMRn remains true Action processes have many uses Some common ones are demonstrated in the following examples Example Alarm Action Processes Switching an Actuator Probably the most traditional use of action processes is to manage the DT80 s digital state output channels which in turn manage devices connected to them relays for switching power to lights or sirens to annunciate an alarm condition to turn pump motors on or off Every second 1S the schedule RA1S ALARM 21 lt 12 54 Pump ON 3DSO W 1 tests the alar
312. st computer but is not logged Example Immediate Report Schedule Sending 1TK 2R 3W 3TT causes the D780 to immediately scan channels 1 6 and 7 once only and return the data Notice that this schedule has no schedule ID and no trigger Cautions for Using Immediate Schedules When programming the D780 give an immediate schedule time to execute before issuing a following BEGIN command otherwise the immediate schedule s data may not be returned Using DeTransfer can be helpful by inserting a W wait command for example W5 which pauses program execution for five seconds between immediate schedule commands and a BEGIN command If successive immediate schedules are entered too rapidly then the channels may be appended as if they were part of a single schedule Setting P22 13 see P22 r110 110 can overcome this by ensuring a return character is placed after each reading Re Running an Immediate Schedule The last entered immediate schedule can be run again by sending the asterisk command that is by sending a character Statistical Report Schedules TITTI ODD BUNEA AROAN gt gt gt RDVDDDD Statistical sub schedule Statistical report schedule Statistical sub schedule samples Statistical sub schedule Statistical result returned every 3 minutes y
313. st fixed F e Changes to program are not allowed E42 USB device not ready e No USB memory device inserted e DT80 has not yet read the required system information from the device wait a few seconds e USB device is faulty or not a memory device E50 Job locked A job that ahs been locked cannot be modified E51 ALARM IF command error Setpoint character lt gt lt gt or gt lt missing e AND OR XOR incorrectly entered Setpoint not specified or too large Delay incorrectly specified E52 Alarm text memory full Memory for storage of alarms text is full total is 16384 characters shared with expressions text E54 Expression error Syntax error e Expression too complex E55 Expression memory full Memory for storage of expressions text is full total is 16384 characters shared with alarms text E65 ALARM undefined e Alarm n does not exist E74 Serial sensor CTS detect timeout e Serial sensor CTS did not go to the required state UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 175 within timeout period E89 Serial sensor receive time out e Serial sensor expected characters were not received within timeout period E90 Serial sensor scan Error e Serial sensor could not convert the received text as specified in the control string E98 Flash writing error e ONRESET job too large max 16k e Flash memory faulty E104 Drive format failed e Unable to format the specified
314. st in the alarm command ALARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses 77 not optional The alarm input is the data item or value that is to be tested by the alarm command Alarm inputs for alarm commands can be any of the following e any analog digital counter or serial input channel definition channel number channel type channel options e any internal channel e any channel variable e time and date e any system timer e any system variable Examples Alarm Input The alarm command ALARMn 2R gt 50 actions UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 78 tests the 2R analog input channel The alarm command ALARMn REFT lt 100 actions tests REFT the DT80 s body temperature The alarm command ALARMn T gt 10 30 00 actions tests the DT80 s internal time channel T channel type see Time x0 The alarm command ALARMn 2SV gt 2000 actions tests 2SV the free space in the DT80 s internal data store see System Variables 31 Alarm Condition Part of test in the alarm command ALARMn test digitalAction actionText actionProcesses 277 not optional The alarm input is compared with the alarm condition which is either e one of the logical operators lt or gt followed by a single setpoint or e one of the logical operators lt gt or lt gt followed by a pair of comma separated setpoints 1 Less than the setpoint 1 Greater than or equal to the set point
315. st once every scan However by adding additional channel option sets each set enclosed in round brackets you can generate additional reports That is you can report the same data value in different ways The first channel option set determines how the channel is sampled and must include all sampling options required for the channel These channel options are listed above the configuration line in the rabie 3 prao Channel Options table Second and subsequent option sets may only contain reporting options those below the configuration line Multiple reports are particularly useful for statistical reports See statistical Report Schedules in that several different statistical operations can be performed on the same data set For Example RA1H 3YS04 II AV MX TMX MN TMN UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 33 defines five option sets The first option set specifies one sampling option II use 2 5mA excitation and returns the average temperature value calculated over the period 1 hour in this case since the last report scan The remaining option sets will return the maximum reading over the same interval the time at which it occurred the minimum and the time of minimum Remember that the first option set can contain options from any part of the channel option table while subsequent option sets can only contain options from below the Configuration Line Mutually Exclusive Options Options grouped by a shaded rectangle in
316. st runs at 19 30 00 that day then at 05 30 00 and 15 30 00 on the next day at 01 30 00 and 11 30 00 on the following day and so on That is every 10 hours of elapsed time Retrieving Entered Schedules and Programs Use the SHOWPROG command to return the current program running in the DT80 or the SHOWPROG JobName command to return the program for JobName in the logger r19 see Table 4 DT80 Job Commands 255 These commands return everything between BEGIN and END Triggering and Schedule Order When different schedules are due to trigger at the same time the schedules execute in the order of RA RB RK When there are statistical channels in a schedule and the statistical sub schedule is due at the same time as the report schedule the statistical sub schedule runs prior to the report schedules You cannot change this order Channels within schedules are sampled in the order of entry left to right Changing a Schedule Trigger The schedule s trigger can be changed at any time simply by sending a new schedule ID and trigger without any processes such as RC10M 2W Important If any processes are included a new schedule is created that replaces all previous schedules UNLESS e the previous schedules have logged data into memory or e logging is enabled by the LOGON command see LOGON and LOGOFF Commands 6s or e the schedules are locked by the F switch f 2112 or e aLOCKJOB command has been applied see
317. statistical functions including averaging and histogram channel options can be applied See Channel Options Scaling r612 Reducing Data In many instances the volume of the data recorded can be reduced by taking averages maximums minimums standard deviations histograms or integrals See CHANNEL OPTIONS STATISTICAL P56 Conditional statements can also be used to define when data is to be logged See Trigger While 44 and Alarm Condition P79 Alarms The DT80 s alarm facility is flexible and powerful Alarms are used to warn of error conditions and to control the DT80 s operation Alarms can e allow logical comparisons with set points e control DT80 digital state outputs e initiate execution of data Taker commands e trigger the sending of messages to the host computer Executing DT80 commands from an alarm can be particularly useful in modifying the DT80 s programming in response to changes in input s 277 IFs The DT80 s IF facility allows powerful program control See Conditional Processing IF Command r50 Data Logging The DT80 stores measurements in its internal data store and in removable USB memory device Logging begins only after you issue the LOGON command Time and date stamping is automatic By default the D780 overwrites the oldest data with new data once the memory is full If you prefer to have the logger stop logging once the memory is full then you need to set the no overwrite schedule
318. such as the following Rainflow 5 rejection 15 03 2000 VOSS i 22 niVRangeMeanCycles 110100 00 2102011 71897800 E ME Loa laat Uz 410415811 7128263 SLOG LLL 6553 le GLO6Z0311 739342 LOF3L6LZ2 29449 ANGE C IFA TIe 910942113 03950 1011047413 41919 LLLILIS2613 670U 1211257 913 03534 L3113632414 249 1411468414 920 il as 73715 1 161167890 00 171178420 0D00 1811885930 00 191199470 00 20120 gt 10000 00 Total cycles616640 Peak Valley mean11 7 Max Peak42 Min Valley 22 Max buffered cycles38 Valid input pointe 2100 00 Best Speed for Rainflow For best rainflow speed from the D780 e turn off house keeping k UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 60 e setthe gain lock to just above the maximum expected voltage GL30MV e make the rainflow channels working channels W For example BEGIN k RA5OT 1BGI RAINFLOW 1000 5 1 20IV GL30MV W END Channel Options Scaling Getting sophisticated The DT80 provides many different tools for scaling channel readings e automatic scaling e channel factor e intrinsic functions e spans e polynomials e Channel variables It can also carry out calculations on channel data see CALCULATIONS EXPRESSIONS r65 In addition scaling and calculation methods can be combined see COMBINING METHODS P65 Automatic Scaling The DT80 automatically scales measurements according to the channel types that have been specified In other words whatever the output of a
319. t For best performance it is recommended that these settings especially the mains frequency be configured and saved before taking any serious measurements UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 13 The DT80 parameter P11 specifies the local mains frequency in Hz default 50Hz When taking an analog measurement the DT80 integrates over one or more complete mains periods in order to minimise any mains related noise pickup The parameter P31 specifies the date format 1 for European DD MM YYYY 2 for North American MM DD YYYY and 3 for ISO YYYY MM DD default is European format These and any other settings can be applied in a set and forget fashion by entering them into the DT80 s startup profile For example the following commands will set up the DT80 for North American mains frequency and date format PROFILE PARAMETERS Pl11 60 PROFILE PARAMETERS P31 2 SINGLEPUSH The SINGLEPUSH command resets the DT80 which is necessary in order to apply profile settings For explanations of parameters and profiles See r115 Ways of Using the DT80 The DT80 can be deployed in many ways depending on factors such as location data volume and power availability e on line to a host computer data is returned in real time as it is acquired e periodic downloading to an on line host e periodic downloading to a portable computer e periodic downloading by modem to a host computer initiated by either the computer or the DT80 e data recov
320. t see Resetting the DT80 7 1 to force the new settings in USER INI to take effect The DT80 is now ready for Ethernet operation 6 Connect the DT80 to the Ethernet network or directly to a computer s Ethernet port and test for correct operation 4 gt Router 10BaseT Ethernet y Figure 40 Ethernet connection types direct connection and network connection a Using the correct cable a standard 10BaseT cable no crossover connect the DT80 s Ethernet port to a socket on the Ethernet network or directly to a computer s Ethernet port using a crossover cable b Ensure that the DT80 is powered c Using dataTaker host software DeTransfer DeLogger or DeLogger Pro running on a computer also connected DIRECT COMMUNICATION lt 410BaseT Ethernet Crossover cable NETWORK COMMUNICATION Ethernet Straight through cable UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 107 to the Ethernet network or for a direct connection on the computer to which the DT80 is directly connected create a software connection for communication with the DT80 The connection must use TCP IP protocol the DT80 s IP address from substep 1 b iv and port number 8 Connection Configuration _ 8 Type a meaningful name for the Connection Mame joTeno Ethernet Connection Connect Using TEPP l T Select TCP IP Type your DT800 s IF Address IP address w x y z Port Mo E M Type 8 Figure 41 Examp
321. ta Alarms Event Log USB memory device Attention LED User Defaults DELJOB DELJOB JobName DELJOB DELDATA DELDATA JobName DELDATA DELALARMS DELALARMS JobName DELALARMS CEVTLOG FORMAT A CATTN DELUSERINI DELONRESET DELONINSERT DELONINSERTALL Deletes the current job from the DT80 When a job is deleted all Deletes only JobName from the DT80 traces of it its name directory Deletes all jobs from the DT80 structure program data and alarms are erased from the data Taker Deletes the current job s data from the Job names directory DT80 structures programs and Deletes only JobName s data from the alarms are not erased DT80 Deletes all jobs data from the DT80 Deletes the current job s alarms from Job names directory the DT80 structures programs and Deletes only JobName s alarms from data are not erased the DT80 Deletes all jobs alarms from the DT80 Clears the event log Formats USB memory device deletes all data and alarms and copies the DT80 s current internal directory structure to card Clears the Attention LED 293 Deletes the working copy of USER INI from the DT80 s internal memory Deletes the working copy of ONRESET DXC from the DT80 s internal memory Deletes ONINSERT DXC from the DT80 specific directory on the card Deletes ONINSERT DXC from the root directory on the card See also the Table 12 DT80 Resets 119 Table 14 DT80 Delete Commands S
322. ted device a Lo gt Host computer s DT80 s modem modem Figure 30 DSR active high This feature greatly simplifies the RS 232 computer to D780 comms link which is discussed later in D780DT80 Direct Local RS 232 Connection r100 and DI80 DT80 Modem Remote RS 232 Connection 2100 Host RS 232 Port Commands The DT80 is shipped with its Host RS 232 port set to 57600 baud No parity 8 data bits 1 stop bit and SoftWare Flow Control If you need to change these settings there are two methods you can use e Use one or more PROFILE commands to permanently change the settings The changes are stored in the D780 s USER INI file and loaded every time the D780 is restarted See the HOST_PORT r114 section of the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 5 table UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 97 e Send a PH command see PH Configuration Commands 9s Doing this changes the settings temporarily That is the DT80 uses the new settings only until you restart it or until you send another PH command The following commands are available for configuring the D780 s Host RS 232 port and for controlling the dial out process of the modem connected to the DT80 PH Configuration Commands The PH commands PH gt Port Host set the comms attributes of the DT80 s Host RS 232 port Note that PH settings are not remembered through a reset use HOST PORT PROFILE commands for settings that you want to be
323. ted for constant current excitation To convert to other engineering units apply a polynomial span or use calculations see Manipulating Data 256 Strain Gauges Strain gauges change resistance when stretched or compressed and are commonly wired in a bridge The strain to resistance relationship is AL 1 AR Strain Toor where L T AL _ is the length change R is the initial resistance AR _ is the gauge resistance change G is the gauge factor a measure of the sensitivity of the gauge typical foil gauges have a gauge factor of 2 0 which means that if they are stretched by 1 their resistance changes by 2 To convert the DT80 s ppm bridge readings to strain use the formula Bridge reading in microStrain qe 5 Bout where Ba is the DT80 s bridge channel BGV or BGI result G is the gauge factor N is the number of active gauges in the bridge The conversion can be done in the DT80 by applying a polynomial as a channel option see Polynomials Yn r627 Y1 0 k uStrain Polynomial definition 3BGV Y1 Bridge channel where 4 k GxN Humidity Sensors Relative humidity is commonly measured by the wet bulb depression method Two temperature sensors are required one to measure air temperature and the other the cooling effect of a wetted surface Usually a temperature sensor is encased in UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 139 a wick extending into a reservoir of distilled water The temperature diff
324. ter times whichever is longer Clear all previously received characters from the receive buffer Print the current contents of the receive buffer for diagnostic purposes then clear it Read and discard incoming characters until the exact string text or the text in n is seen then discard the matching string Swidth opt Numeric data Interpret the received data according to the specified numeric format and store the result into nCV Note that _ signifies optional type nCv eg sd 2CV 9 7CV String data width type n Interpret the received data according to the specified string format and store the result into n eg S6s 5 Data to skip S width type Interpret the received data according to the specified numeric string format but do not store the result In other words skip over this data eg 3 6s 9 f value One ofa setof width type str1 str2 nCV m Ifthe incoming string matches str1 then strings set nCV 0 eg 39s goose moose 23CV 2 If the incoming string matches str2 then set nCV 1 If the incoming string matches str3 then set nCV 2 etc If a default value m is specified and the incoming string matches none of the strings then set nCV m Numeric and String Formats These tables describe the possible values for type that is the different ways in which the incoming string of characters can be interpreted floating point decimal integer hexadecimal integer octal inte
325. terval since last midnight see Time Triggers Synchronizing to Midnight 248 and subsequently runs every multiple of the interval thereafter If the interval is not an even multiple of 24 hours the DT80 inserts a short interval between the last run of the schedule prior to midnight and the run of the schedule beginning at midnight Examples Trigger by Time Interval The schedule header RA5S instructs the D780 to run Report schedule A every 5 seconds 5S The schedule header RG instructs the D780 to run Report schedule G continuously as fast as possible UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 42 Trigger on External Event bh dl t digital inpu 1 fter do n counter 1 S Figure 8 Typical externally triggered schedules ce Text aida arrives Serial Channel q Report schedules can also be triggered by external events which are manifested to the logger as state changes on the digital input channels nDS or as pulses on the counter channels nC nE Trigger on a rising or falling transition of digital input channel n n E Trigger on a rising transition of digital input channel n n E Trigger on a falling transition of digital input channel n m nE Trigger on a rising or falling transition of any of digital input channels m n m n E Trigger on a rising transition of any of digital input channels m n m n E Trigger on a falling transition of any of digital input channels m
326. the DT80 The Attn LED should now be flashing slowly 5s on 5s off and the display should show DT80 Bootstrap Release the Edit OK key 25 At this point you should now be able to repeat the above upgrade procedure ERROR MESSAGES The DT80 returns a message when it detects an error in a command or an operational difficulty The form of the error report is controlled by the U switch The default is the verbose form shown in the table below If the switch is set to u the error message is reduced to an error number e g E 3 Note this Switch also reduces the verbosity of other returned data Error messages can be switched off by the m switch The default is for errors to be reported M During a data retrieve operation error reporting is disabled until the unload is complete P73 If an error is detected during job entry ie between BEGIN and END then the remainder of the job is ignored Errors that are a result of reading a channel cause a special error value eg 99999 9 see also x to be returned or logged as the reading The table below lists all of the DT80 errors along with an explanation of their likely cause and or correction El Time set error e Must be in format defined by P39 and P40 e Illegal separator or non digits entered E2 Command line too long e Command too long maximum 250 characters E3 Channel option error e Illegal channel option used e Incompatible options used e Option invalid
327. the Mutual Exclusions column of the table below are mutually exclusive If more than one channel option from a mutual exclusion group is placed in a channel list only the last one specified is recognised Order of Application The DT80 applies channel options in a specific order regardless of the order in which they are specified in a channel definition The channel option table below lists the channel options more or less in the order of application In general terms the ordering is as follows 1 First the raw value is sampled taking note of sampling options ie those relating to the physical measurement process These include options in the input termination T U input attenuator A NA resistance bridge wiring 3W AW gain lock GL30V GL3V GL300MV GL30MV and excitation I II V E N categories along with NSHUNT 2V ESn and MDn The raw value may then be linearised according to the channel type e g for thermocouples the appropriate polynomial will be applied The resulting linearised value is then further processed as follows The channel factor is then applied if specified For most channel types this is a simple scaling multiplier value A user specified scaling option a span Sn polynomial Yn thermistor scaling Tz or intrinsic function Fn is then applied 4 The resulting scaled and linearised value may then be manipulated using a data manipulation option difference DF time difference DT rate
328. the amount of free space can be checked in the DT80 s internal memory and USB memory device with the following commands and system variables Line 6 internal memory kB free stored data See STATUS Line 7 USB memory device kB free stored data Commands 7122 or STATUS6 and STATUS7 Internal memory kB free See System Variables kB stored data P31 USB memory device kB free kB stored data Data Storage Capacity Readings MB Each schedule defined in the DT80 requires 185 Bytes of storage Every data point measurement stored requires 16 bytes and each alarm stored requires 255 bytes Use the following table to estimate how many readings per megabyte of data storage the DT80 can be expected to log for each schedule it is running Internal Store Capacity 64Mbyte approx 5 000 000 data points Removable USB memory device approx 90 000 data points per megabyte See also Storage Capacity P125 Halt and Go During Data Logging While data logging is in progress data from each report schedule is progressively stored into its respective data log file DATA_A DXD for example see Figure 23 272 and Figure 25 273 in the DT80 s internal memory or USB memory device if one is inserted Whenever a halt command Halt all report schedules is issued during a data logging session a discontinuity record is written into all currently open data log files Similarly wnenever a Hx command halt Report Schedule x is issued during
329. the computer if required Data Return Modes Real Time Data Real time data can be returned to the host in either free format mode the D780 s default or fixed format mode P21 Retrieving Logged Data Data stored in a DT80 s internal memory or USB memory device can be retrieved returned unloaded by means of the Host RS 232 port the Ethernet port or the USB port Data can be retrieved for an individual schedule or all schedules or for all jobs or an individual job Here are a few useful commands when retrieving logged data U begins to unload stored data A begins to unload stored alarms Q terminates unload See e RETRIEVING LOGGED DATA 273 e the Table 15 DT80 Retrieval Commands Summary r168 Data Return Mode Logged Data The DT80 always returns logged data to the host in fixed format mode See fixed format mode 221 Examples of Things You Can Do with Channels Read a channel once For example sending the command to the DT80 instructs it to read channel 2 as a type T thermocouple It returns data in the standard format 2TT 449 3 degC Read channels repeatedly For example sending the command RA1S 2 4TT to the DT80 instructs it to read channels 2 3 and 4 as type T thermocouples 2 4TT every second RA1S and return data in the standard format 2TT 451 5 degC JTT 263 4 degC ATT 487 8 degC 2TT 451 9 degC 3TT 569 8 degC y Important It is recommended that sensors are wired to channels Also calib
330. the reference temperature with another temperature sensor The DT80 makes this correction in software The software approach allows support for any thermocouple type without hardware dependence Isothermal Block Generally the reference junctions are held at the same temperature by a physical arrangement that ensures good thermal conductivity between the junctions This structure is called an isothermal block It is advisable to insulate the isothermal block from rapid ambient temperature changes Reference Junction Support By default the DT80 uses the internal temperature sensor see Table 1 DT80 Channel Types 222 REFT channel type as the reference junction sensor The internal sensor has an accuracy of 0 5 DegC ITS90 In 1990 the definition of the International Temperature Scale changed The DT80 is calibrated to ITS9O Thermocouple Types The DT80 supports all commonly recognized thermocouple types UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 135 e W 5 Re W 26 Re 0 to 2320 D W 3 Re W 25 Re 0 to 2320 E Ni 10 Cr Cu 45 Ni 200 to 900 G W W 26 Re 0 to 2320 J Fe Cu 45 Ni 200 to 750 K Ni 10 Cr Ni 2 Mn 2 Al 200 to 1250 N Ni 14 Cr 1 Si Ni 4 Si 0 1 Mg 200 to 1350 R Pt 13 Rh Pt 0 to 1450 S Pt 10 Rh Pt 0 to 1450 T Cu Cu 45 Ni 200 to 350 Each type has characteristics Sensitivity stability temperature range robustness and cost that make it appropriate for particular applications Grounded Thermo
331. theses end date and time in the format of the D780 s current 272 below date format P31 and time format P39 settings U commands square Unload data for a period defined by a beginning and See The U Unload Commands brackets end date and time in the strict format of P75 YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 0 ssssss which overrides the current date format P31 and time format P39 settings The U Unload Commands The U unload commands return all logged data that is from the first record to the last record for a specified job and report schedule Here are the DT80 s U commands U Returns all of the current job s logged data in the order of report schedule A K Ux Returns all of the current job s logged data for report schedule x U JobName Returns all logged data for JobName in the order of report schedule A K U JobName x Returns all logged data for JobName for report schedule x Examples U Commands The command Beal instructs the D780 to return all of the current job s data schedule by schedule The command UC instructs the D780 to return all of the current job s data for report schedule C only The U Unload Commands The U unload commands return logged data for a specified job and report schedule for a period of time designated by a beginning and end time and date that must be specified in the DT80 s current date format Parameter 31 and time format Parameter 39 settings Here are the DT8
332. through 7 inclusive e ATK Boiler Temp read analog input channel 4 as a type K thermocouple and assign it the name Boiler Temp e 3DSO 0 set digital state output channel 3 low Note that the example above is only a channel list and not a complete schedule Here s the same channel list used in a schedule the schedule header RJ2M has been added RJ2M 1V 3R 5 7DS 4TK Boiler Temp 3DSO 0 The header identifies the schedule as Report schedule J that runs every 2 Minutes A Simple Schedule A schedule comprises a schedule ID schedule identifier a trigger that determines when the schedule runs and a list of processes to be carried out every time the schedule runs For example the schedule RA1OM 1V 3R specifies report schedule A as follows UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 41 e RA schedule ID e f logging is enabled then data will be stored to the internal flash disk 1MB will be allocated and old data will be overwritten when full This schedule does not define any alarms so no alarm storage will be allocated e 10M trigger run the schedule every 10 minutes e 1V 3R channel list Groups of Schedules Jobs A DT80 job is essentially a group of one or more schedules each specifying a set of processes that performs the overall task It s entirely at the user s discretion how the processes of an overall task are allocated between schedules there are no hard and fast rules For example choose to differe
333. tically includes special records when it returns logged data to the host computer These records signify e the end of the unload of an individual schedule s data end of schedule record e the end of a complete unload may contain one or more schedules end of unload record Date Time Schedule Record type pom Pimat Record index Readings only one N shown here Schedule B returned data Schedule C End of schedule records returned data End of unload record Number of schedule B records unloaded 746 Number of schedule C records unloaded 98 Total number of records unloaded 746 98 844 Figure 25 Typical output data always returned in fixed format mode The records are added even if the unload process is aborted before completion by sending the Q command see next topic Quitting an Unload Stop an unload operation by sending the Quit Unload command Q to the DT80 There may be a short delay between sending the command and the return of data actually stopping This is because the output buffer of the DT80 is generally full during an unload and these records have still to be returned to the host Sending O actually stops the copying of stored data into the DT80 s output buffer UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 76 Part G Alarms Alarm Concepts Limits tests and actions DT80 alarms allow decisions to be made based on the magnitude of D780 input channels channel variables timers the clock
334. tive high DSR inactive low DTE Echo EEPROM Error Messages Ethernet Ethernet Commands Ethernet Communications Ethernet Setup Excitation EXT POWER_SWIT CH Extending Battery Life Factory Defaults File Structure File System Firmware DT80 User s Manual 180 179 180 17 28 43 141 36 111 111 144 28 109 112 2 20 97 97 180 181 99 181 181 La 113 174 176 108 181 106 104 105 106 129 131 732 119 72 69 71 178 10 Firmware Upgrade Fixed Format Mode 1H Flash Flow Control Fn Format of Returned Data Free Format Mode Uh Frequency Front Panel FTP Communications FTP_ SERVER Glossary Ground Loops Ground systems Ground Terminals Guard Halting amp Resuming Schedules Hardware Reset Histogram Host Port Host RS 232 Port Commands HOST MODEM HOST _PORT Hot Plugging Humidity Measurement Humidity Sensors IC Temperature Sensors IF IF THEN ELSE Immediate Report Schedules Immediate Schedule Independent 2 wire AD590 series inputs Independent Analog Inputs Independent Current input Independent Voltage Inputs INIT 181 98 99 181 181 182 186 36 61 21 67 110 112 86 81 27 109 133 134 90 108 iis 177 ma 136 141 141 141 101 102 102 114 114 182 140 133 139 100 135 183 19 50 Page 188 Input Actions Internal Maintenance Internal Mem
335. tively driven inputs however the maximum count rate is approximately 100kHz Phase Encoders A phase encoder is a device for measuring relative angular or linear position As it moves it outputs two streams of pulses A and B whose phase relationship A leading or B leading indicates the direction of travel The DT80 s PE channel type decodes these pulses and returns a signed position value in counts Note that the mode of a counter channel pair ie whether it operates as two counters or a single phase encoder channel is set when the channel is defined ie when the job is entered not when it is evaluated This implies that a particular counter input pair cannot be read as a phase encoder value at one point in a job and as a pair of counters at another In other words if your job defines a channel 1PE then it should not also define channels 1HSC or 2HSC and vice versa Other Considerations The high speed counter inputs continue to function while the DT80 is asleep However it is important to note that each hardware counter is 16 bits wide Count values are maintained and returned as 32 bit values but the physical hardware counters attached to inputs 1C 4C are 16 bit If more than 65536 pulses occur while the DT80 is sleeping then the hardware counter will overflow and this will cause an inaccurate count value to be returned when the DT80 wakes It is therefore necessary to ensure that the DT80 is programmed to wak
336. to 500ms to process if the D780 is not scanning and up to 5 seconds if it is running long schedules and many alarms Any digital delay periods such as 1DSO 1000 0 or general delay periods such as DELAY 1000 add to this time The host must ensure that the D780 has sufficient time to process each line of a downloaded program This is achieved by using either e software flow control or e hardware flow control or e time delays between transmissions if no flow control is used Comms Wakes the DT80 If communicating with the Host RS 232 port or the Serial Sensor port of the D780 while it s in sleep mode low power mode the first few characters sent wake the D780 To reliably wake a D780 that may be in sleep mode it is recommended that a carriage return is sent or line feed character then wait 500ms before sending any commands These instructions can be included at the start of your program DT80 Direct Local RS 232 Connection A common and the most simple way of communicating with the D780 for configuring it programming it and retrieving data from it is to connect its Host RS 232 port directly to a serial port on the host computer using the RS 232 comms cable supplied This is known as a direct connection to a local D780 Figure 33 2100 po COM port Host RS 232 ON E RS 232 comms cable dataTaker product code IBM 6 Figure 32 Direct local connection The information in DT80 RS 232 Basics 297 applies
337. to a direct connection For recommended flow control settings for this type of connection see Figure 32 Direct RS 232 Cable Communications cables for connecting the D780 a DTE device directly to a 9 pin computer comms port or 25 pin computer comms port DTE devices are detailed in Figure 73 171 A suitable 9 pin cable data Taker product code IBM 6 may be ordered for this purpose Since the DSR line is not connected inactive in these cables the D780 automatically assumes a direct connection to the host computer see Automatic Device Detection 297 Figure 30 297 in particular Cable Length Although the RS 232 standard specifies a cable of not more than 4 metres 15 feet longer cables can be used It s possible to use RS 232 cable runs of 100 metres or more but to achieve reasonably error free communication these generally need to have heavier wires and a slower baud rate may be necessary Setting Up a Direct Connection To set up a direct connection 1 Connect a suitable comms cable between a serial port on the host computer and the D780 s Host RS 232 port as shown in Figure 33 2100 Cables are discussed in Figure 32 Pi00 above Run suitable data Taker or terminal software for example DeTransfer DeLogger or HyperTerminal 3 Configure the software to communicate using the same communications parameters that the DT80 is set to it defaults to 57600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit no parity and software flow contro
338. tomate monitoring and control of industrial equipment plug and play A device whose characteristics are automatically determined when it is plugged in All USB devices are plug and play polling Requesting information port A plug socket or interface that enables connection to another device for information transfer For example the DT80 has three ports for communicating with a host computer Ethernet USB and RS232 PPP Point to Point Protocol A low level protocol that allows TCP IP based protocols to be used over an RS232 connection process list The part of a schedule command that follows the schedule header and trigger and lists the processes you want the schedule to carry out It may include for example a channel list and an IF command program A DT80 program is a group of one or more jobs or commands that you send to the DT80 protocol The language or set of rules that devices use to communicate over a network For the Information Superhighway think of protocols as the rules of the road All devices on a network must use the same protocol to communicate with each other See TCP IP 2186 RAM Random Access Memory Memory that allows the storage locations within it to be accessed written to or read from directly non sequentially This characteristic makes RAM very fast Often simply called memory See MEMORY P125 RAM disk An area of RAM configured by a software program to emulate a disk drive real ti
339. trict format of YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 0 ssssss which overrides the current date format P31 and time format P39 settings DELDATA Deletes data for all jobs from internal memory and USB memory device FORMAT B Reformats the internal memory removing all logged data and alarms See also the Table 12 DT80 Resets P119 FORMAT A Reformats an inserted USB memory device removing all logged data and alarms See also the Table 12 DT80 Resets P119 See also Summary Delete Commands 21656 for a complete list of DT80 delete commands When any of the DELDATA commands are used the appropriate data log files are deleted and logging continues into new files Resetting the DT80 by a soft reset or a firm reset see Resetting the DT80 rii9 does not delete logged data Moving Copying and Archive Logged Data The MOVEDATA and COPYDATA are used to either move or copy data and alarm files to the removable USB memory device The ARCHIVE command will save in its current directory a version of the file which has been renamed It also compresses the file by removing unused space in the file Where lt Job s gt di All store files for the current job are copied JobName All store files for the named job are copied b jobs jobname a data_a dbd The store file at the specified path is copied Where lt Job s gt All store files for the current job are moved JobName All store files for the named job are moved b jobs jobnam
340. ts to interpret the command echo as a command The modem command ATEO turns echo off e Don t report results of commands Results codes and strings only serve to confuse the D780 as it does not use these codes and may accidentally interpret them as commands The modem command ATQ1 enables quiet mode which stops result codes from being returned e The modem will keep DSR active at all times This behaviour is ensured by sending the modem command AT amp S0 e If DSR goes inactive the modem must terminate its call if one has been made This functionality is used by the D780 to hang up its modem This behaviour is ensured by sending the modem command AT amp D2 e The modem must make CD active whenever it establishes a connection with a remote modem and make CD inactive when the connection is broken The DT80 interprets an active CD line to mean that it is connected to a remote host via a modem This behaviour is ensured by sending the modem command AT8C1 All of the above settings are included in the INIT profile key see the HOST_MODEM r114 section of the Table 11 DT80 PROFILE Details 115 the default value of the INIT profile key is ATEOQ1 amp D2S0 4 amp C1 amp S0 The DT80 issues these commands and their settings to its modem whenever it determines that the modem should be initialised see Modem Initialization Conditions e101 above AT Command Set The DT80 supervises the modem using standard AT commands and common mode
341. tssesseeeseueesseeessneeees 136 Accuracy Thermocouple Techniques c ccccceeceeeeeceeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeseesseeeseeeseueeaeeeseeesaees 136 TOEI O roo ici 136 A A e E O XA 137 IC Temperature Sensors asin irte iria airis 137 o AA e o E o e E SO OO O nabs E 138 Bridge Excitation Lead Compensation oocccccoccccccnccnccnocnnonnnnnonononnnnnronononcnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnns 138 A 139 ERE APA PP on 139 A e ceeavetdcocateeseezedaedeesavessevtasceddercdesacveedebceesaneescysecuedsdepevsedseeccubasteesstivescdeese 139 Analog Logic State IADU S ses ees cdecsces Sern eect deesatesesvbdecectesciesiaysusetdssntessaubedcecdyscsieatseeancbddeneises 140 DT80 Analog SUD SYStOM ccccc cece secs eeeceece ees eeeeeceeceeeseeeeeeseesseesesseeseeeseeseeeeeeaeeees 141 DT80 Ground Terminals src ndsenaannanenaeens 141 DIGITAL CHANNELS Sn 141 UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 8 Bidirectional Digital VO Chamnels oocooccocncoccccnconocononcocononcocononnonanoncnnanonnnnanenannnnos 142 Using Digital INP isis TA is 142 Ghannel Type AP nn a a a a R a eae eeecea ess 142 Chameleon E UR Nad Re nN 142 COMMECUIIMG to Ira ex ced ae is 143 OMS CONSID CIATION Set 143 Usa Digital CUNO UNS fs saps sehen asis tilda dotes 144 Channel MND CS isso cctiit hte iia aid 144 Channel Opon Sesarpa dancin ada 144 Digital Qumu t operato si E aden ada te 144 Connecting to Digital Outputs occccocncconncccncnconnononcnnoncnn
342. two hours 2H while digital input 9 is high 9W The schedule header RC5M 12CV instructs the DT80 to run Report schedule C every 5 minutes 5M while channel variable 12 is not zero 12CV The schedule header RF6 8E 5W instructs the DT80 to run Report schedule F on any transition of digital channels D6 D7 or D8 6 8E while digital input 5 is high 5W Continuous Report Schedules No Trigger Lia Lilia Ly A E LL o Onn p r T Figure 13 Continuous schedule Report schedules that run continuously can be created These schedules start scanning as soon as they are received by the DT80 they are not activated by a trigger and run until it is stopped by sending a halt command or resetting the DT80 for example Define a continuous schedule simply by omitting the trigger from a report schedule Example Continuous Schedule Sending RA 1TK 2R 3W 3TT causes the DT80 to scan channels 1 6 and 7 continuously Notice that this schedule has no trigger for example no 1S after RA Special Purpose Report Schedules Polled Report Schedule RX LL Ju 1 Figure 14 The DT80 s solitary polled schedule The polled schedule is a report schedule with a trigger of request information now command issued e by a host computer connected to the D780 during data acquisition or e by an alarm action see Example Alarm Action Processes Using an Alarm to Poll a Schedule r83 283 The DT80 supports one
343. types Analog AD592 1uA K Devices TMP17 1uA K UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 137 Semiconductor voltage LM135 10mV C Figure 70 output types National LM235 10mV C Semiconductor Corp LM335 10mV K Semiconductor voltage LM34 10mV F output types National LM35 10mV C Semiconductor Corp LM45 10mV C 500mV Analog Devices LM50 10mV C 500mV LM60 6 25mV C 424mV TMP35 10mvV C TMP36 10mV C 500mV TMP37 20mV C For more details see the Table 1 DT80 Channel Types r29 table Calibration IC temperature sensors have different calibration grades The lowest grades typically have an error of up to 2 C at 25 C More expensive sensors have an error of 0 25 C This error is a combination of an offset or zero error and a slope error The DT80 provides a slope or scale correction capability on a per sensor basis using the channel factor see PT385 p28 Frequently a slope correction based on a single point calibration point is enough for reasonable accuracy The pivot point for the slope correction depends on the sensor type AD590 0 0K 273 15 C Series resistor R Q RxC LM335 0 0K 273 15 C Attenuation factor A AxC LM34 O F 17 78 C Calibration factor C LM35 0 C Calibration factor C The calibration factor is calculated from CH 4 AT 2 TT p where AT _ is the temperature error All temperatures T is the temperature of the calibration MUSt be in the a me units T is the pi
344. ucts the DT80 to unload schedule A s logged data from the first data point stored BEGIN until 11 15 The command UB 12 00 19 1 2000 12 05 20 1 2000 instructs the DT80 to unload schedule B s logged data starting at 12 00 on the 19 1 2000 and ending at 12 05 on the 20 1 2000 Examples U Shortcuts The command UC 13 21 13 21 instructs the D780 to return only the current job s data for schedule C that was logged during the minute 13 21 that is from 13 21 00 to 13 21 59 The command UD 13 13 instructs the D780 to return only the current job s data for schedule D that was logged during the hour 13 that is from 13 00 00 to 13 59 59 The U Unload Commands The U unload commands return logged data for a specified job and report schedule for a period of time designated by a beginning and end time and date that must be specified in the strict format YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 0 ssssss ISO date format which overrides the current date format Parameter 31 and time format Parameter 39 settings Here are the DT80 s U commands Ux Returns the current job s logged data for report schedule x Ux from Returns the current job s logged data for report schedule x starting from time or date time Ux from to Returns the current job s data for schedule x starting from time or time date and ending with time or date time U JobName x Returns JobName s logged data for report
345. ue Any non thermocouple temperature sensor measuring isothermal block temperature If already compensated use 11SV TR as reference channel 11SV always retuns 0 0 TR channel temperature is used for all subsequent thermocouple measurements in this schedule This zero would be measured at the isothermal block TZ channel zero is used for all subsequent thermocouple measurements in this schedule BR channel voltage used for all subsequent BGV measurements in this schedule RS232 is the default if none of these is specified All instances of 1SERIAL in a job use the same comms type See Serial Channel Page 36 Rainflow Cycle RAINFLOW Analysis half duplex CONFIGURATION LINE see Multiple Reports Data tags Statistical See Channel Options Statistical PSG Variables See Channel Variables NCV 263 Destination Output Data Format UM 0085A0 DDE OLE AV MX TMX TMN DMX DMN IMX IMN INT NUM Hx y m nCV nCV nCV nCV nCV nCV NR Prefix returned channel ID with DDE tag Prefix returned channel ID with OLE tag Average of channel readings Standard deviation of channel readings Maximum channel reading Minimum channel reading Time of maximum channel reading Time of minimum channel reading Date of maximum channel reading Date of minimum channel reading Instant time and date of maximum Instant time and d
346. ule B on the arrival of the specific character sequence Pasta8zZ at the DT80 s Serial Channel terminals The schedule header RG1SERIAL instructs the D780 to run Report schedule G on the arrival of any character at the DT80 s Serial Channel terminals Trigger on Internal Event ge Af yr ano ro Figure 9 Typical internally triggered CV triggered schedule Report schedules can also be triggered by internal events this must be specified to the DT80 as channel variables CVs changing value nCV Trigger on any change of nCV to zero or from zero n CV Trigger on any change of nCV from zero n CV _ Trigger on any change of nCV to zero UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 43 where n is the channel variable number See Channel Variables NCV 263 Examples Trigger on Internal Event The schedule header RK6CV instructs the D780 to run Report schedule K upon any change of channel variable 6 to or from zero For instance the schedule RK e will trigger when 6CV changes from 0 0 to 1 0 from 0 06 to 0 0 or from 1 3 to 0 0 e will not trigger when 6CV changes from 0 0 to 0 0 7 0 to 6 0 or from 112 3 to 0 001 The schedule header RK12 CV instructs the D780 to run Report schedule K whenever the value of channel variable 12 changes from 0 to any value Trigger on Schedule Specific Poll Command oll c and from host computer or alarm Figure 10 Typical schedule specific poll triggered schedule Instead of a time
347. ummary Summary Retrieval Commands The following table summarizes all the information retrieval unload commands supported by the DT80 program data alarm and event retrieval Program SHOWPROG Copies the current job s program file to the host port SHOWPROG JobName Copies JobName ss program file to the host port SHOW PROG Copies all currently defined jobs program files to the host port Data U U Returns the current job s data in the order of report schedule A to K Ux Returns the current job s data for report schedule x U JobName Returns data for JobName in the order of report schedule A to K U JobName x Returns data for JobName report schedule x Data U Returns the current job s data in the order of report Type date and U schedule A to K time in formats U from Returns the current job s data starting from BEGIN that match your time or time date DT80 s current U from to Returns the current job s data starting from BEGIN setup P31 and time or time date and ending with END time or P39 l Pre dale Ifa schedule isn t mz specified data is Ux Returns the current job s data for report schedule x always unloaded Ux from Returns the current job s data for schedule x starting schedule by sche from BEGIN time or time date dule Ux from J to Returns the current job s data for schedule x starting Note BEGIN and UM 0085A0 from BEGIN time or time date and ending with END used here DT80 User s Manual Page 1
348. unnnnunennnnsennnnasnnnaennnunennnne 39 WV TANS Schedules tiesa fee a tices des dede A de og een canadian eee dea iat 39 Sehedule IMA A o al OA iO 39 A o A enn ree 39 Schedule Name a oi 40 Schedule OPUONS iss sabi oes eee idk a sia 40 Schedule UTI GCI cotas ace dneeatialsnaiehdauseatenaedens 41 CPA SHEN S Oech ci cet een aie atts Sassoon acl Oe ce malin a aacetiate saclen dusters neiddoaseictenseetes 41 A O euutetateuesine 41 Groups Ol Schedules JODS iiis dali 42 Types of Scnequies anna 42 General Purpose Report Schedules RA RB RK oocooccoccoccoccoccoccocccocconcoccononnnos 42 PONG ST OLY Mee Valsa a seal ul ii NA a 42 Trigger on External EVEN sonrisa E ad RE 43 Trigger on Internal EVEN rabia ao 43 Trigger on Schedule Specific Poll Command ooccccccccncnccccnconcncnncnnnnnnononnnncnonaconnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 44 RA e oo O 44 Continuous Report Schedules No TrigQer occococncocccccccccocnccncnconcnonncononcnonononnnncnncnnnnos 45 Special Purpose Report Schedules oocoocoocconcoccoccocnoccconconconnononnoncnonnonnonncnnnnnonnoncnnns 45 Polled Repot Schedule IRA sities aa ida 45 Immediate Report Schedules oocoocoonconcocioccoccocnoonconconnononnnononnonnonnnonncnncnnonnnanonnnnnnns 46 Statistical Report o cnhequies aid a es 46 VVOFKING With Schedule S aia 48 Entering Schedules into the DT80 BEGIN END occoccccnccnnnccccncnconcncnocnnnononncncnncncnncnnnanonos 48 Using Immediate Schedules in
349. up version Protecting ONRESET DXC A copy of ONRESET DXC is created in the D780 s Flash memory and automatically replaces the working copy in internal memory every time a reset occurs Deleting the Backup Files from Flash DELUSERINI command will delete the copy of the USER INI in flash as well as the one held on the internal memory drive The RUNJOBONRESET will copy the ONRESET DXC job to the flash as well as the internal memory drive The DELJOBONRESET will delete the ONRESET DXC file from both FLASH and the internal memory drive A backup will be re created the next time you send a PROFILE command Without the backup file in Flash the automatic protection mechanism described above no longer occurs UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 117 Setting the DT80 s Clock Calendar The DT80 s real time clock calendar is based on a 24 hour clock that has a resolution of 122us To make the timestamps and datestamps that the D780 includes with readings meaningful set the D780 s clock calendar to local time and date This is described in the next two topics Time and date are maintained in when the logger is switched off or reset If the logger is switched off and the internal Memory Backup battery see Internal Memory Backup Battery 30 is removed or discharged then the date and time will be set to 1989 01 01 00 00 00 Setting the DT80 s Time T When setting the data Taker data logger s clock use the time format defined by P39 and P40
350. urned data Default off Include scan Time at beginning of returned data Default off Include schedule ID Default off Character Pairs Carriage Return Line Feed The DT80 s default is to automatically add a carriage return character CR ASCII 13 and a line feed character LF ASCII 10 to the end of appropriate chunks of information it returns to the host computer These return and line feed pairs CRLF make data and other returned information easy to read on the host screen or a printout Two Format Modes for Returned Data The DT80 has two modes for the format of data and other information it returns to the host computer e free format mode enabled by h e fixed format mode enabled by H Logged data is always returned to the host computer in fixed format but real time data can be returned in either free format or fixed format Free Format Mode h Also known as unformatted mode This is the DT80 s default mode for real time data return enabled by the h switch command in which data and other information is returned to the host computer in a verbose descriptive conversational style suitable for on screen display and printing For example when the D780 is in free format mode the schedule command RA5S 1V 3PT385 1C Widgets returns each data item in the form 1V 2 490 mV 3PT385 395 0 degC Widgets 3498 Counts to the host computer screen The switches listed in the table above default to U N C and par
351. using software on the host computer that doesn t support SWFC or when using devices in the communications link such as modems radios or line drivers that don t support SWFC Figure 30 299 Summarizes the recommended flow control settings for the two general types of RS 232 connections between a DT80 and its host computer Serial COM Host RS 232 E l port pon DT80 cable Use a DeLogger or SWFC DeTransfer connection the DT80 s default set to SWFC ME Serial COM port Host RS 232 port Neder cable Modem cable N e odeniink Host computer s MOEA DT80 s Enable error correcting protocol and Use a DeLogger or HWFC HWFC in both modems HWFC HWFC DeTransfer connection set to HWFC Figure 31 Recommended flow control settings for the two types of connections Software Flow Control SWFC In SWFC mode the receiver controls the flow of characters by transmitting e the XOFF character ASCII 19 or Control Q to stop the sender from sending further characters e the XON character ASCII 17 or Control S to allow the sender to resume sending characters During data return to the host computer if the D780 receives an XOFF character from the host it stops transmission within two character periods Then when the host has processed the buffered data and is ready to receive again the host should transmit an XON character to the D780 This is the resume transmission signal to the D780 If the D780 is left in the XOFF
352. various displayed options e Three status LEDs are provided the blue Sample LED flashes each time a measurement is taken the green Disk LED indicates internal flash disk activity and the red Attn LED indicates various warning conditions e A USB socket allows connection of a USB memory device which provides a convenient way to retrieve data from the DT80 or load a program onto it Sensor Interface On the sloping front panel of the DT80 there are two rows of terminal blocks digital channels on the left analog channels on the right The green terminal blocks can be quickly unplugged from the DT80 without unscrewing the sensor cabling This interface includes e 8 digital input output counter channels 1D 8D e an input to wake the DT80 from low power sleep mode WK e 4counter inputs or two phase encoder inputs 1C 4C e a pair of voltage free relay contact outputs RELAY A and B e an RS232 422 485 compatible serial port Tx Rx RTS and CTS e 4 analog input channels 1 4 e an external excitation input EXT Communications Power Interface On the left side panel you have a variety of connectivity options e 10 Base T Ethernet for connection to a host computer or local area network e USB for high speed connection to a host computer e RS232 for connection to host computer or modem e two alternative DC power connectors a standard plug pack socket DC jack and a 4 pin terminal block For more details see COMMU
353. very hour RA1H the average of one second readings because one second is the default scan rate for the statistical sub schedule taken from the type T thermocouple connected to channel 2 2TT AV Note e Simply including a statistical channel option AV in the example above invokes the statistical sub schedule e There is no need to include RS the statistical sub schedule s ID anywhere unless you want to alter RS s trigger see Redefining the Statistical Sub Schedule s Trigger r47 r47 below For details of the statistical channel options available see the Statistical 237 category of the Table 3 DT80 Channel Options r38 table or CHANNEL OPTIONS STATISTICAL 256 Triggering and Schedule Order 249 249 is also relevant to the statistical sub schedule Redefining the Statistical Sub Schedule s Trigger The statistical sub schedule s trigger can be altered from its default of one second Define the statistical sub schedule s trigger in the same way as for report schedules see r40 by using the RS schedule ID and sending an RS schedule command to the D780 If you don t specify the RS schedule s trigger in this way it defaults to once per second Here are some examples RS10S every 10 seconds RS30M every 30 minutes RS1 E on each 1 to 0 transition of digital input 1 RS continuously Statistical Sub Schedule Halt Go The statistical sub schedule can be halted by sending the HS command an
354. vot temperature P Example AD590 For the AD590 sensor the channel factor represents the value of the series resistor used to measure the output current default value is 100 09 Without changing the actual resistor this channel factor can be adjusted as follows If the temperature error is determined to be 1 7 C higher than actual at 100 C the channel factor correction is AT 1 7 Channel factor R1 a 100 1 r 99 T T 100 2273 15 add and is applied as follows 5AD590 99 544 Bridges WIRING DIAGRAMS see Bridge Inputs r161 Because of its sensitivity the Wheatstone bridge circuit is commonly used for the measurement of small changes in electrical resistance Applications include load cells pressure sensors and strain gauges Bridge Ry R2 excitation voltage Bridge Vex 4 J 3 output voltage Vout Figure 47 Wheatstone bridge When one of the four resistors in a bridge is active that is sensitive to the quantity being measured the circuit is called a quarter bridge and the remaining three resistors are called bridge completion resistors Similarly half and full bridges imply two and four active gauges Bridge Excitation Lead Compensation The bridge is a ratiometric circuit where the output sensitivity is proportional to the excitation voltage Unfortunately the excitation voltage is reduced by resistive cable and connector voltage drops There are two ways the DT80 can resolve this p
355. while the DT80 is waiting for a particular CTS state ie cO or c1 input action e151 then evaluation of the LSERIAL channel will be terminated and a CTS timeout error code 5 will be returned e If data is received which violates the input action specification then evaluation of the LSERIAL channel will be terminated and a Scan Error code 29 will be returned Once the 1SERIAL channel has returned a success or failure code the DT80 will then move on to evaluating the next channel if any in the schedule The following sections describe in detail the various output and input actions that can be specified in a control string UM 0085A0 DT80 User s Manual Page 150 Control String Output Actions The table below lists the ways in which prompts and text strings can be sent from the DT80 to the device connected to the Serial Channel These commands must be enclosed by in the control string Text text eg abci009def 1013 GETVAL M J Break character b n or A sequence of characters to be sent Non printable characters may be specified using nnn where nnn is the ASCII code 0 255 char notation may also be used for control characters ASCII 1 31 For example 1013 and M both specify a CR carriage return character Transmit a break set the Tx line to logic 0 state for n or nCV character periods Set RTS to a value gt 3 5V RS232 only Clear RTS to a value lt 3 5V RS232 only Dela
356. xample Action Text in Fixed Format actionText Mode H 81 for a description of the alarm action text returned in real time actionText actionText actionText actionText Retrieving Logged Alarm States Retrieve unload logged alarm state records from the DT80 to the host computer using alarm unload commands e Acommands no brackets unload all alarm records from the beginning to the end of the alarm store e A commands round brackets parentheses unload alarm records for a user defined period in the format specified by the DT80 s current P31 and P39 settings date and time formats e A commands square brackets unload alarm records for a user defined period in the DT80 s fixed format style YYYY MM DD hh mm ss 0 ssssss which overrides the D780 s current P31 and P39 settings Note Logged alarm state records are not cleared deleted from the DT80 by unload operations You can unload the same logged records as many times as you want until you purposefully delete it of course see Deleting Logged Alarm Records P88 The A Unload Commands The A unload commands return all alarm state records that is from the beginning to the end of the alarm store for user defined jobs and or report schedules A Returns the current job s alarms in the order of report schedule A to K Ax A JobName schedule A to K A JobName x Table 5 Alarm Unload Commands A Returns the current job s
357. ximum value is reached 1 1ST 1 second 60 1 minute Second of the minute 2 2ST 1 minute 60 1 hour Minute of the hour 3 3ST 1 hour 24 1 day Hour of the day 4 4ST 1 day 7 1 week Day of the week O Sunday 1 Monday 2 Tuesday 3 Wednesday 4 Thursday 5 Friday 6 Saturday System timers are normally synchronised to the previous midnight or Sunday and increment at the beginning of each second minute hour or day If the DT80 s date time is set the system timer channels will be updated to match the new time The range of a system timer can be set using the channel factor For example 2ST 15 will count from 0 to 14 resetting every quarter hour on the quarter hour If the range is set to O then the timer will not reset except at midnight 1 3ST or midnight Sunday 4ST If a system timer is explicitly set to a value eg 1ST 12 then it will no longer necessarily be synchronised to the actual time In this example after being set 1ST will count up from 12 to 60 at which point it will reset back to O and start counting again It will always differ from the time of day seconds count by a fixed offset If a system timer s range is set it will automatically be resynchronised to the actual time Therefore 2ST 60 can be entered at any time to return 2ST to its default behaviour If a system timer is set to a value outside its range it is immediately adjusted so that it is in range When you enter nST x you are actually doing
358. xt instead of the usual double quote the text is always sent to the Host serial port see Alarm Action Text 280 DO actionProcesses actionProcesses can in theory be any D780 command However in practice some DT80 commands are likely to cause program runtime errors and even program failure In particular do not include report schedules or alarms in DO commands The most common use of DO actionProcesses is to change parameter and switch settings to suit requirements of various parts of your program actionProcesses are executed where they occur in report schedules Therefore be aware that their result is in effect when the DT80 executes the next command of your program Examples DO Command The schedule command RA5M DO Hello World instructs the D780 to return the message Hello World to the host computer when the schedule runs every five minutes In the program BEGIN RB1M DO Boiler 99 M J EE END the DO command returns the heading text string Boiler 99 before each record of data M carriage return J line feed The command DO RUNJOB Phase_ 2 runs the job Phase_2 each time it executes The schedule command RC2 E DO AT amp F EO Q1 SO 2 M instructs the D780 to output a modem initialization string AT F EO Q1 SO 2 M whenever an external event occurs 2 E for example whenever the modem powers up The schedule command RD1M DO P11 500 P47 10 1 5TK DO P11 50 P47 5 8V 10V
359. xternal Event 223 that is trigger only while a particular external state or internal An internal event that is an event See Trigger on Internal Event 43 state exists see Trigger While generated within the DT80 P44 A poll command from a host See Trigger on Schedule Specific computer Poll Command 222 Channel List Channel List Most often schedules will be created that instruct the D780 to carry out channel related tasks such as scanning one or more of its input channels and or setting one or more of its output channels When these schedules are created group the channel details their IDs and optional instructions together in a channel list within the schedule Figure 6 39 shows a typical schedule notice its schedule header and channel list components A channel list may contain just one channel entry or many and each channel in the list must be separated from the next by one or more space characters Similarly a schedule s header must be separated from its channel list by one or more space characters The DT80 processes the channels in a channel list from left to right Example Channel List The channel list 1V 3R 5 7DS 4TK Boiler Temp 3DSO 0 specifies the following channels each is separated from the next by a space character e 1V read analog input channel 1 as a voltage e 3R read analog input channel 3 as a resistance e 5 7DS read the state of digital input channels 5
360. y for n or nCV milliseconds Actual delay time will be approximately 2ms or 2 character times whichever is longer b nCv Control signal El r0 Wait w n or Ww nCv character CV value flag width precision Output character type nCcv Output the value of nCV in the specified eg sd 2CV or 9 3f 7CV or numeric format see below Note that _ 206d 1CV signifies optional precision s n Output the value of string variable n string value flag width opt eg S s 1 or 9 9s 2 Numeric Formats This table describes the possible values for type that is the different ways in which a CV value can be converted into a string of characters floating point floating point exponential format floating point exponential format or e format depending on value f or E format depending on value integer hexadecimal integer hexadecimal integer octal integer QN O X X Q Q Q BHB 0 mh single character 1ISERIAL f 1CV gt 74 36 1SERIAL e 1CV gt 7 436e01 1SERIAL E 1CV gt 7 436E01 1SERIAL g 1CV gt 74 36 1SERIAL G 1CV gt 74 36 1SERIAL d 1CV gt 74 1SERIAL x 1CV gt 4a 1SERIAL X 1CV gt 4A 1SERIAL o 1CV gt 112 1SERIAL c 1CV gt J e The c conversion outputs the value of nCV as a single 8 bit character Only the lower 8 bits of the integer portion of nCV are output So in the above example the characte

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

  PGI 5 User's Guide - The Portland Group  Elite ETO-180B Use and Care Manual  - Parts World    DC Simulator - Rockwell Automation  Sommaire Pratiques n° 16  JMI Telescopes MAX Computer User's Manual  VGN-UX100 Series - Manuals, Specs & Warranty  Manitou 1999 Spyder Service Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file